Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

The night air was thick with tension, as it always was when Daniel LaRusso and Johnny Lawrence were in the same space. The moon hung low in the sky, casting long shadows across the empty parking lot behind the dojo, where their latest argument had boiled over into something more physical.

Daniel wiped a trickle of blood from his lip, his chest heaving from exertion. His eyes blazed with frustration as he squared off against Johnny, who was pacing in a tight circle, fists clenched and eyes narrowed.

“You just can’t let it go, can you?” Daniel shouted, his voice hoarse from both the shouting and the fighting. “Every time things calm down, you come back swinging, starting the same old fight!”

Johnny stopped, staring at Daniel with a mixture of anger and something deeper, something he couldn’t quite name. “Me? You’re the one who’s always looking down on me, LaRusso. Acting like you’re so much better, like you’ve got everything figured out. News flash, you don’t know shit about me.”

They stood there, facing off like they had so many times before, their shared history stretching between them like an electric wire, buzzing with years of rivalry, anger, and misunderstandings. But tonight, it felt different. The fight had started the same way it always did—a few sharp words, a push, a shove—and before long, fists were flying. But now, something was off. The blows had stopped landing, but neither of them could seem to walk away.

“I never wanted to be better than you,” Daniel shot back, his voice quieter now, strained. “I just wanted… I wanted us to stop hating each other. After all these years, don’t you get it? This fighting doesn’t solve anything.”

Johnny’s jaw tightened. He wanted to argue, to tell Daniel he was wrong, that he deserved the resentment, that this wasn’t something they could just brush aside. But the words wouldn’t come. All he could do was stare at Daniel, his mind racing as something unfamiliar began to settle in his chest.

He wasn’t angry anymore. At least, not in the way he thought he was. The adrenaline that had fueled their fight was draining out of him, leaving behind something raw and confusing. His fists unclenched, and he took a step closer.

“What if I don’t know how to stop?” Johnny muttered, almost more to himself than to Daniel. His voice cracked, the vulnerability in it startling even him. He wasn’t used to this—being honest, being open. But there was something in the way Daniel was looking at him, like he wasn’t the enemy, like he was something more.

Daniel’s expression softened, and for the first time that night, his body relaxed. He took a step forward too, closing the gap between them, their breaths now mingling in the cool night air. The tension that had once felt like it would snap now hung suspended, fragile, delicate.

“You’re not the only one who feels stuck, Johnny,” Daniel said quietly. “We’ve been fighting so long, I don’t even know why anymore. I just know… I’m tired of it.”

Their eyes met, and for the first time in years, there wasn’t anger or resentment in Johnny’s gaze—just exhaustion, confusion, and something else Daniel couldn’t quite place. 

Johnny’s lips parted as if to respond, but instead, he hesitated, his breath catching in his throat. His pulse was racing again, but not from the fight. He could feel the heat radiating off Daniel’s body, so close now. His mind was screaming at him to move, to pull away, to do anything but stand there like an idiot. But he didn’t move.

Daniel took another step forward, his face inches from Johnny’s now. “We don’t have to keep doing this.”

Johnny’s breath hitched as Daniel’s hand found his arm, not in anger, but gently, like he was grounding himself in this moment. There was a long, agonizing beat of silence as they stared at each other, something shifting between them, something that neither of them had ever dared acknowledge before.

And then, as if pulled by an invisible force, Daniel leaned in, his lips brushing against Johnny’s in a tentative kiss. It was soft at first, almost uncertain, as though they were both waiting for the other to pull back, to laugh, to punch. But no one pulled away.

Johnny’s hand instinctively found the back of Daniel’s neck, fingers curling into the soft hair there, and he pressed forward, deepening the kiss. The tension that had been building between them for years, manifesting as fists and sharp words, now broke in an entirely different way. It wasn’t aggressive or desperate; it was something softer, something that felt inevitable.

Daniel’s hands slid up Johnny’s chest, gripping the fabric of his shirt as if to anchor himself. The kiss grew more insistent, but not frantic. It was full of years of unspoken words, of confusion, of a connection that had always been there, hidden beneath their rivalry.

When they finally pulled apart, both of them were breathless, their foreheads resting against each other. Neither spoke for a long moment, the reality of what just happened settling in.

Johnny was the first to break the silence, his voice rough but not unkind. “So… what now?”

Daniel chuckled softly, though there was no mockery in it, just relief. “I don’t know. But maybe we don’t need to figure it all out tonight.”

Johnny nodded slowly, his hand still lingering on the back of Daniel’s neck. “Yeah. Maybe we don’t.”

They stood there, the remnants of their fight fading into the night, replaced by something new—something neither of them fully understood, but were finally ready to stop fighting against.

The End (maybe)

Chapter Text

The sun was setting over the beach, painting the sky in shades of pink and orange. The waves crashed softly against the shore, a peaceful backdrop to what should have been the perfect moment. But instead of peace, Johnny Lawrence’s heart was pounding in his chest as he knelt in the sand, a ring box clutched tightly in his hand.

He looked up at Daniel LaRusso, his blue eyes filled with hope and fear. It wasn’t like Johnny to be this vulnerable, to lay everything on the line, but he had. He couldn’t keep pretending that what they had was just casual—he was in love with Daniel. Always had been, ever since their rivalry turned into something more than just fights and insults. It was passion, connection, and something Johnny thought would last forever.

Daniel, standing over him with his arms crossed, let out a small, almost disbelieving laugh.

“Johnny… what the hell are you doing?” Daniel said, shaking his head. “A proposal? Seriously?”

Johnny blinked, taken aback. “I’m… I’m serious, Daniel. I love you. I know we’ve had our ups and downs, but we can make this work. I want to spend my life with you.”

The words felt heavy, like they were being ripped out of him, exposing everything he’d held back for so long. He was laying it all out, no barriers, no masks. Just him.

But Daniel’s laughter grew louder, and it wasn’t the soft chuckle of someone embarrassed or touched by the moment. It was harsh. Cruel.

“Johnny, come on,” Daniel scoffed. “You really thought this was something more than what it was? We were just hooking up. That’s it. You’re good for a fun night, but love? Marriage? You can’t be serious.”

Johnny’s stomach twisted. The ring in his hand suddenly felt like a weight pulling him down. He swallowed hard, trying to hold on to any shred of dignity he had left. “I thought… I thought we had something real.”

Daniel looked at him with something between pity and amusement. “Real? No, Johnny. You were good in bed, and that’s where it ends. I didn’t sign up for anything more than that. You should’ve known better.”

Johnny’s hands trembled as he stared at the sand beneath his knees, his heart crumbling with every word. He’d thought—hoped—that he meant something to Daniel. But as Daniel’s cold words settled in, he realized just how wrong he was. 

Daniel glanced at the ring box and shook his head, a cruel smirk tugging at his lips. “You really thought this was going to work out, didn’t you? That’s… cute. But this? Us? It’s over, Johnny.”

With that, Daniel turned and walked away, leaving Johnny kneeling in the sand, alone. The sound of Daniel’s laughter still echoed in his ears long after he disappeared from view, the waves crashing over the silence that followed.

Johnny didn’t move for a long time. He stayed there on his knees, staring at the ring he’d never get to put on Daniel’s finger, feeling like a fool. His heart ached, not just from the rejection, but from the brutal realization that he had been used—nothing more than a fling to Daniel, something convenient when he needed it. And now, he had nothing.

---

Two Years Later

Johnny sat on the edge of his ratty couch, a beer in hand as he stared at the faded walls of his rundown apartment. His life had spiraled after that night. His dojo had failed, his finances had dried up, and he was barely scraping by. Everything he’d built had crumbled, and it seemed like the universe had no plans to throw him a break. 

But it wasn’t just his financial situation that had gotten worse. The loneliness gnawed at him, day after day. He had tried to move on from Daniel, to forget the way he had been humiliated on that beach, but the memory was a wound that never fully healed. Every failed attempt at rebuilding his life only reminded him of how far he had fallen.

And then, as if life wasn’t cruel enough, he saw Daniel again.

Johnny had been walking through the busy downtown streets, trying to clear his head, when he spotted him. Daniel LaRusso, the man who had shattered him, was standing across the street. But he wasn’t alone. He had a woman beside him—his wife, Johnny guessed from the way her hand rested so casually on his arm. And next to them, two kids, laughing and playing, holding Daniel’s hands as they walked together like the perfect, happy family.

Johnny froze, his breath catching in his throat. He felt a punch to the gut that knocked the wind out of him, as if all the pain he had felt over the years was brought back to the surface at once. He watched them from across the street, his heart heavy with bitterness and regret.

Daniel looked… happy. He was smiling in a way Johnny had never seen before, carefree and content. His wife was beautiful, his kids looked like they adored him, and together they looked like a picture-perfect family. A life Johnny had never been a part of. A life he never could’ve had.

Johnny tried to turn away, to walk off before Daniel noticed him, but it was too late. Daniel’s eyes met his, and for a brief moment, time seemed to stand still. Daniel’s smile faltered, just for a second, and Johnny could see the recognition in his eyes. The way he looked at Johnny wasn’t pitying, or even apologetic. It was just… indifferent.

Daniel gave a small nod, acknowledging him, but there was no warmth in it. No trace of the connection they once shared. Just a glance, like passing a stranger on the street. Then Daniel turned back to his family, laughing at something his son said, and walked away without looking back.

Johnny stood there, feeling smaller than he had ever felt in his entire life. The man he had once loved, the man he had bared his soul to, had moved on so easily. He had a family, a future, a life that didn’t include Johnny. And here he was, standing in the same spot, stuck in the same misery, watching Daniel live the life he would never have.

The ring Johnny had once held in his hands felt like a ghost around his finger, a reminder of everything he had lost, everything he could never reclaim.

As the sun began to set, just like it had on that beach two years ago, Johnny walked away from the scene, disappearing into the city’s shadows. His heart ached, and for the first time in years, he didn’t have the strength to fight the tears that blurred his vision.

The End.

Chapter Text

The night was supposed to be like any other, filled with the usual arguments between Johnny Lawrence and Daniel LaRusso. But this time, the fight was different. The anger felt more intense, more desperate, as if the words they exchanged could never be taken back. Their voices echoed through the empty house, the walls seeming to absorb their pain.

“Why do you always have to be so damned stubborn?” Johnny shouted, his face flushed with rage.

“And why do you always push me to my breaking point?” Daniel snapped back, his voice trembling with hurt. “I’m done with this. I need to get out of here.”

The argument had escalated quickly, their words sharp and cutting, each accusation landing like a punch. Daniel, feeling overwhelmed and unable to cope with the intensity of the fight, stormed out of the house. He didn’t even bother to grab his jacket as he left, his breath misting in the cold night air.

Johnny watched him go, a sinking feeling in his chest. He knew the argument had been bad, but he hadn’t realized just how far Daniel was willing to go. The thought of Daniel wandering out alone in the middle of the night, in his state of distress, gnawed at Johnny.

He tried calling Daniel’s phone, his hands shaking as he dialed. But every call went straight to voicemail. Panic set in, and Johnny knew he couldn’t just sit there. He had to find him. He grabbed his car keys and raced out of the house, the fear and guilt overwhelming his senses.

---

Daniel drove through the darkened streets, heading towards Amanda’s house. He was too numb to realize the danger he was putting himself in. His mind was a whirlwind of emotions—anger, regret, and sadness—all swirling together, leaving him feeling lost and broken.

Meanwhile, Johnny’s car sped through the empty roads, his eyes darting between the road and his phone, trying to find any trace of Daniel. His heart pounded in his chest, each second stretching out as he desperately searched for his partner.

Unbeknownst to Johnny, a drunk driver had gotten behind the wheel that night. The driver’s senses were dulled by alcohol, his reaction times severely impaired. As Johnny’s car rounded a bend, the drunk driver veered into his lane, heading straight for him.

The collision was sudden and brutal. The screech of tires, the crunch of metal, and then a silence that was only broken by the distant sound of sirens. Johnny’s car was a twisted wreck, its lights flickering before going dark.

---

When Daniel arrived at Amanda’s house, he was met with a worried Amanda, who could see how distraught he was. She tried to comfort him, but Daniel’s mind was elsewhere. He had a sinking feeling that something was terribly wrong.

Hours passed, and Amanda eventually persuaded Daniel to check his phone. His heart sank as he saw the missed calls from Johnny. Desperation gripped him, and he turned to Amanda with tears in his eyes.

“I need to find him,” Daniel said, his voice barely above a whisper. “Something’s wrong.”

Amanda tried to calm him, but Daniel was already moving, getting back into his car and heading out. The night had become a fog of despair as he drove, his eyes scanning the streets for any sign of Johnny.

He didn’t know that Johnny’s car had been reduced to a wreckage, and the man he loved was lying lifeless in the darkness.

---

By the time Daniel arrived at the scene, it was too late. The flashing lights of emergency vehicles illuminated the wreck, but Johnny was already gone. The realization hit Daniel like a sledgehammer, his world collapsing around him. He staggered towards the wreckage, his cries of anguish piercing the cold night air.

“No, no, Johnny!” he screamed, his voice breaking. “Please, wake up!”

But Johnny was gone. The paramedics tried to comfort him, but Daniel could barely hear them over the roar of his own grief. The world spun around him, each step feeling like a mile as he stumbled away from the wreck, his heart shattered into pieces.

---

The days that followed were a blur of sorrow and guilt for Daniel. He attended Johnny’s funeral, a place where he could barely breathe, let alone speak. As he looked at Johnny’s casket, his heart felt as if it were being crushed under the weight of his own regret. The love of his life, gone because of a fight they had, and the realization that his last words to Johnny had been filled with anger.

He tried to stay strong, but the weight of his grief became unbearable. He couldn’t live with himself, couldn’t forgive himself for what had happened. He found himself crying uncontrollably in his empty house, the silence echoing the emptiness he felt inside.

As the weeks turned into months, the pain never eased. He continued to see Johnny’s face everywhere, in every corner of his life, in every memory. The love he had once shared with Johnny now felt like a cruel joke, a reminder of what he had lost and could never get back.

One night, unable to bear the weight of his sorrow any longer, Daniel made a decision. He sat alone in the dim light of his apartment, the room eerily quiet except for the sound of his own ragged breathing. He reached for the gun he had purchased in a moment of despair, its cold weight heavy in his hands.

He wrote a note, his handwriting trembling, his tears smudging the ink. It was a final apology, a final goodbye to the world that had taken Johnny from him. The note was filled with regret, love, and a sorrow that words could never fully express.

With the gun pressed against his temple, Daniel whispered one last time, “I’m so sorry, Johnny. I love you.”

The final sound was a single, sorrowful echo that marked the end of Daniel’s pain. The world was left with the tragic silence of a man who couldn’t live without the love of his life, and the memory of a love that had ended in heartbreak and loss.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

It had been a week since the All Valley Tournament, and the intensity between Daniel and Johnny had shifted dramatically. No longer adversaries on the mat, they had realized that the energy between them wasn’t just rivalry—it was something far deeper. They had begun to secretly date, stealing moments whenever they could, away from the judgmental eyes of their friends and family.

Today, Daniel had brought Johnny over to Mr. Miyagi’s house. The little garden was peaceful, the air fragrant with the scent of jasmine and bonsai trees, and inside the house, it was even quieter. The small, cozy space felt like a world of their own, hidden away from everything.

Daniel stood by the window, a nervous smile on his face as he glanced at Johnny, who was sitting on the couch.

“You sure Mr. Miyagi won’t be back for a while?” Johnny asked, his blue eyes flickering with a hint of worry.

“Relax,” Daniel replied, laughing softly. “He said he was gonna be out all afternoon working on a car in the village. We’ve got plenty of time.”

The tension in the room faded as Daniel walked over and sat next to Johnny. There was a moment of hesitation, and then Daniel leaned in, kissing Johnny softly. Johnny melted into the kiss, their hands intertwining as the world outside seemed to vanish. The connection between them was undeniable now, and being together like this felt natural—right, even.

They were so lost in each other that neither of them noticed the gentle sound of footsteps approaching the house.

Suddenly, the door creaked open. Daniel pulled away in an instant, his heart racing, as both he and Johnny looked up to see Mr. Miyagi standing in the doorway, holding a small bonsai pot. His face was unreadable, and for a moment, time froze.

Daniel’s stomach dropped, and Johnny’s hand slid away from his. Mr. Miyagi had always been a little old-fashioned, and Daniel was terrified of what he might say. After all, the man had practically raised him—he was like a father. Would he be disappointed? Angry?

“M-Mr. Miyagi!” Daniel stammered, jumping up from the couch. “We were just—uh, it’s not—” He was at a loss for words, his face flushing with embarrassment.

Johnny stood too, his posture tense as he prepared for the worst.

But then, to their surprise, Mr. Miyagi’s lips curled into a small, amused smile. He shook his head slightly, chuckling under his breath.

“Next time, make sure to lock door,” Mr. Miyagi said calmly, setting the bonsai down on the table. “Very bad idea to get caught by unexpected visitors.” He gave them a knowing look and then simply walked back out, closing the door behind him.

The room fell into stunned silence. Daniel blinked, his mind still catching up to what had just happened. Johnny let out a breath he didn’t know he was holding, his shoulders relaxing.

“Did… did that just happen?” Johnny whispered.

Daniel turned to him, eyes wide. “I think it did.”

There was a beat of silence before they both burst into nervous laughter. Relief washed over them, but Daniel couldn’t let it go. He had to know if Mr. Miyagi was really okay with this, with them—especially after everything that had happened between him and Johnny in the past.

“I need to go talk to him,” Daniel said after a moment, his voice steadying. He glanced at Johnny, who nodded in understanding.

“Yeah, go. I’ll wait here.”

Daniel stepped outside and found Mr. Miyagi in the backyard, quietly tending to his bonsai trees. For a second, Daniel just stood there, watching the man he respected so much. Then, gathering his courage, he walked over.

“Mr. Miyagi?”

Mr. Miyagi didn’t look up from his work, but there was a sense that he had been expecting Daniel. “Hmm?”

“Are you really… okay with this? With me and Johnny, I mean?” Daniel asked, fidgeting slightly. “Even after everything he’s done?”

Mr. Miyagi paused, gently trimming a leaf before turning to look at Daniel with kind, wise eyes. “People can change, Daniel-san. You of all people know this. Johnny Lawrence… he not same person you fight. I see it in how he look at you. He change for better.”

Daniel bit his lip, still uncertain. “But… I thought maybe you’d be upset or something. I mean, you always had kinda old-school beliefs…”

Mr. Miyagi chuckled softly, shaking his head. “Old does not mean stuck in old ways. Love is love. Does not matter what form it takes.” He looked at Daniel with a mischievous glint in his eye, the one that always appeared when he was about to tease him. “And besides… Mr. Miyagi not blind. See way you look at Johnny-san long time ago. Only matter of time.”

Daniel’s face turned beet red. “Wh-what?!” he spluttered. “You… you knew?”

Mr. Miyagi gave him a sly smile and went back to his bonsai. “Very obvious, Daniel-san. Very obvious.”

Daniel could feel the heat radiating off his cheeks. He rubbed the back of his neck, utterly flustered, but he couldn’t help but smile, too.

“So… you’re really okay with this?” he asked softly, his voice filled with hope.

Mr. Miyagi turned to him once more, his expression gentle and full of warmth. “Daniel-san, most important thing is you happy. If Johnny-san make you happy, then Mr. Miyagi happy too.”

Daniel’s chest swelled with emotion, and he nodded, his heart lighter than it had been in days. “Thanks, Mr. Miyagi,” he said, his voice sincere.

Mr. Miyagi gave a soft grunt of approval and then, in typical fashion, waved him off. “Now go. Johnny-san still waiting. Don’t keep him waiting too long.”

Daniel smiled, his embarrassment fading as a warmth spread through him. He turned to head back inside but paused for a moment at the door, looking back at Mr. Miyagi once more. “You’re the best, you know that?”

Mr. Miyagi didn’t look up, but Daniel could see the faint smile playing at his lips. “Always, Daniel-san. Always.”

With his heart full, Daniel went back inside, ready to face whatever came next—because now, he knew that he had Mr. Miyagi’s support. And that made everything else seem a little less scary.

And a lot more right.

Chapter Text

The sun dipped low over the horizon, casting an orange glow across Mr. Miyagi’s tranquil garden. The air, usually peaceful, was filled with the sound of fists striking, feet sweeping through the air, and the occasional grunt of effort. Johnny and Daniel were sparring in the middle of the garden, their muscles taut and movements precise. What had started as a friendly bout had escalated into something more—a fiery, competitive dance between two skilled fighters.

“Come on, LaRusso,” Johnny teased, dodging a swift kick from Daniel. “You’re too slow. That’s why I’m taking you down today.”

Daniel smirked, sidestepping one of Johnny’s high kicks before spinning and striking out with his own. Johnny barely blocked it in time, their eyes locking as the adrenaline surged through them. “Oh yeah? I’m about to beat you just like I did at the tournament.”

Johnny’s lips curled into a familiar cocky grin, his breath ragged from the effort. “That match was rigged, and you know it. I’m reclaiming my title right now.”

They moved with a fluid intensity, kicks and punches exchanged in quick succession, neither willing to give an inch. The garden, usually a place of serenity, now played host to their clash of wills. Each strike brought them closer, the competition spurring them on, but underneath it all was an unspoken connection—one that neither of them could deny.

Daniel ducked, aiming for a sweep, but Johnny was quicker. In one swift motion, Johnny grabbed Daniel’s arm, using his weight against him to send him crashing to the ground. Daniel grunted as his back hit the grass, the breath knocked from his lungs. Before he could react, Johnny was on top of him, pinning him down with his knees on either side of Daniel’s waist, his hands on either side of Daniel’s head, caging him in.

For a moment, time seemed to slow as they stared at each other. Johnny’s chest heaved from the effort, sweat glistening on his skin, and Daniel’s heart pounded against his ribs, his pulse quickening not just from the fight but from the heat radiating between them.

“Still think you’re gonna win, LaRusso?” Johnny murmured, his voice low and teasing, his eyes locked on Daniel’s with a fire that was anything but playful now.

Daniel, breathless, smirked up at him. “Only if you don’t cheat this time.”

Johnny leaned in a little closer, his face inches from Daniel’s. “Is Mr. Miyagi home?”

Daniel’s heart skipped a beat. “No,” he said, his voice barely audible.

Without another word, Johnny’s smirk softened, and he lowered himself down slowly, his face so close to Daniel’s that their breaths mingled in the space between them. Daniel’s pulse raced, anticipation hanging in the air as Johnny’s lips brushed against his.

The kiss was slow at first, tentative, as if they were testing the boundaries of what had always been there. But the moment their lips met, the spark ignited into a flame. What started soft quickly became heated, the pent-up energy of their sparring match turning into something far more passionate.

Johnny’s hand slid to the back of Daniel’s neck, pulling him closer as he deepened the kiss. Daniel responded immediately, his hands gripping Johnny’s waist, pulling him down as their bodies pressed together. The kiss grew more fervent, their mouths moving against each other in a desperate rhythm, as if neither could get enough.

The heat between them was undeniable, electric. Johnny’s lips parted, and Daniel’s tongue slid against his, the kiss growing wetter, more intense. Every breath they shared was filled with a hunger that had been simmering beneath the surface for weeks, months, maybe even years.

Johnny pulled back just enough to catch his breath, his forehead resting against Daniel’s as they both panted, their chests rising and falling in sync. “I told you I’d win,” Johnny whispered, his voice rough and breathless.

Daniel, still dazed from the kiss, managed a weak laugh. “If this is what losing feels like, I don’t mind it.”

Johnny chuckled, leaning down to kiss Daniel again, softer this time but no less passionate. Their bodies stayed pressed together, the warmth between them lingering as they exchanged slow, lingering kisses, the intensity of the fight slowly giving way to a different kind of high.

As the night began to settle over the garden, Johnny finally pulled away, sitting back on his knees, still straddling Daniel. He wiped the sweat from his forehead, a satisfied grin on his face. “You know, we could make this a regular thing,” he said, his eyes glinting with mischief.

Daniel sat up slightly, propping himself on his elbows as he looked up at Johnny, still breathless from the kiss. “The sparring or the kissing?”

Johnny smirked. “Both.”

Daniel chuckled, shaking his head in disbelief, but the warmth in his gaze was undeniable. “You’re impossible, Lawrence.”

Johnny leaned down, brushing a soft kiss to Daniel’s lips, lingering there for just a moment before pulling back. “You love it.”

Daniel rolled his eyes, but there was no hiding the smile that tugged at his lips. “Yeah, I do.”

They stayed there for a while longer, tangled together on the grass, the remnants of their sparring match forgotten as they exchanged slow, lingering kisses, the intensity of the day fading into a quiet, shared contentment.

The rivalry that had once defined them had evolved into something much deeper, something that couldn’t be measured by wins or losses. And as the night settled over Mr. Miyagi’s garden, they both knew that no matter what challenges came their way, they’d face them together—sparring partners, rivals, and something so much more.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

The sun shone brightly over the valley, casting a warm glow on the familiar streets of Reseda. It was one of those rare Saturdays when there were no karate competitions or training sessions to attend, leaving Hawk and Demetri free to enjoy each other’s company.

They decided to meet at their favorite café, a cozy little place with outdoor seating, known for its delicious pastries and strong coffee. Hawk arrived first, his blue mohawk standing out against the sea of casual hairstyles around him. He took a seat at a small table, tapping his fingers on the surface as he scanned the crowd, excitement bubbling within him.

“Hey, sorry I’m late!” Demetri called as he approached, a little out of breath. His hair was slightly tousled, and his face broke into a wide smile as he spotted Hawk. “I had to decide between three different shirts. You know how it is.”

Hawk chuckled, gesturing for Demetri to sit down. “You look good. It’s not like I’m here for a fashion show, anyway.”

Demetri rolled his eyes playfully. “Well, I want to look good for you.” He plopped down in the chair, a slight blush creeping up his cheeks.

They ordered their drinks and pastries, the friendly barista giving them an extra smile as she recognized the couple. Hawk couldn’t help but steal glances at Demetri as they waited, admiring the way the sunlight danced off his hair and how his eyes sparkled with excitement.

“So, what do you want to do today?” Demetri asked, taking a sip of his iced latte. “I was thinking we could go to the arcade or maybe catch a movie?”

Hawk leaned back, a mischievous glint in his eyes. “How about we do both? And then we can grab some ice cream afterward?”

Demetri’s eyes widened, and he grinned. “That sounds amazing! You really know how to plan the perfect day.”

After finishing their drinks, they made their way to the arcade. The place was filled with bright lights and the sounds of video game music, creating a vibrant atmosphere. Hawk immediately dashed toward the racing game, his competitive nature kicking in. “Last one there pays for ice cream!”

Demetri laughed and sprinted after him, “You’re on!”

They spent the next couple of hours playing various games, their laughter echoing through the arcade. Hawk was particularly good at the shooting games, while Demetri excelled at the rhythm games, where he danced and tapped his way through every level.

“Okay, okay, I think you’ve officially beaten me at that one,” Hawk admitted, watching Demetri as he finished his last song with a flourish. “But I’m definitely taking you down in the racing game!”

They settled into the racing game, controllers in hand, and the competition was fierce. Hawk leaned in closer, trying to distract Demetri. “Are you even paying attention? I’m gonna leave you in the dust!”

Demetri smirked, unfazed by Hawk’s antics. “Not if I can help it!”

As the countdown began, the intensity in the air was palpable. With the sound of the starting signal, they both shot forward, fingers working furiously on the buttons. The game was neck and neck, and Hawk couldn’t help but admire the concentration etched on Demetri’s face.

“Come on, come on!” Hawk shouted, the excitement bubbling over.

In the final seconds, Demetri pulled ahead, crossing the finish line just in time. “Yes! I win!” he cheered, throwing his hands up in triumph.

Hawk groaned, dramatically falling back in his seat. “This is rigged! I demand a rematch!”

Demetri laughed, enjoying the playful banter. “Later, but first, ice cream!”

They left the arcade, hand in hand, and strolled down the street toward their favorite ice cream shop. The afternoon sun felt warm against their skin, and the gentle breeze carried the sweet scents of the nearby bakery.

As they reached the ice cream shop, Demetri’s eyes widened at the menu. “I can’t decide! They have so many flavours.”

Hawk leaned in closer, glancing at the options. “How about we get two different ones and share?”

“Great idea!” Demetri nodded enthusiastically. After some deliberation, they each ordered a scoop of their favourite flavours—Hawk chose cookies and cream, while Demetri opted for strawberry.

With their cones in hand, they wandered to a nearby park, finding a sunny spot to sit on a bench. They leaned back, enjoying the warmth of the sun and the sweetness of their ice cream.

“This is perfect,” Demetri said, looking over at Hawk, who was happily licking his cone. “I’m so glad we have days like this.”

“Me too,” Hawk replied, his expression softening. “I wouldn’t trade it for anything.”

As they enjoyed their treats, Demetri suddenly had an idea. “Let’s have a contest! Whoever finishes their ice cream first wins!”

Hawk raised an eyebrow, a playful challenge igniting between them. “You’re on!”

They both dug in, licking and biting at their cones, the ice cream melting quickly in the sun. Laughter filled the air as they playfully tried to distract each other, stealing bites when they could.

In a moment of mischief, Hawk leaned over, trying to swipe some of Demetri’s strawberry ice cream. “Hey!” Demetri protested, but he couldn’t help but laugh at Hawk’s antics.

“You know, I think I like your flavor better,” Hawk teased, licking the remnants off his cone with a smirk.

Demetri rolled his eyes but smiled, enjoying the playful moment. “You just want to win!”

Just as they were nearing the end of their cones, Demetri took a bold step and leaned over, pressing a quick kiss to Hawk’s lips, catching him off guard. “How’s that for distraction?”

Hawk blinked, a surprised smile breaking across his face. “You cheater!”

Demetri laughed, his cheeks turning a light shade of pink. “All’s fair in love and ice cream!”

With a final competitive spirit, they both finished their cones, Demetri winning by a mere second. “I can’t believe I won!” he exclaimed, raising his arms in victory.

“Fine, you win this round,” Hawk admitted, feigning defeat. “But I’ll get you next time!”

They lingered in the park for a while longer, chatting and enjoying each other’s company. As the sun began to set, painting the sky in shades of pink and orange, Hawk leaned back against the bench, pulling Demetri closer.

“Thanks for today,” he said softly, looking at Demetri with a warm smile. “I really had a great time.”

Demetri smiled back, his heart fluttering. “Me too. We should do this more often.”

“Definitely,” Hawk replied, his expression turning serious for a moment. “I love spending time with you, Demetri. You make everything better.”

Demetri felt his cheeks heat up, and he smiled shyly. “I feel the same way, Eli.”

As the evening sky deepened, they sat in comfortable silence, holding hands and soaking in the moment. The world around them faded away, leaving just the two of them in their little bubble of happiness.

With a soft sigh, Demetri leaned his head on Hawk’s shoulder, feeling perfectly content. “This is my favorite day ever.”

Hawk grinned, pressing a kiss to the top of Demetri’s head. “Mine too.”

And as the stars began to twinkle above them, they knew that they had many more perfect days ahead.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

The sun was shining bright on what was supposed to be the happiest day of Johnny's life. Surrounded by the hustle and bustle of wedding preparations, he stood in the dressing room, feeling a mixture of excitement and nerves. Today, he was marrying Carmen, the woman who had brought light back into his life after a dark period. He stood in the dressing room, adjusting his suit, feeling a whirlwind of emotions. Today was supposed to be the happiest day of his life, but a lingering unease tugged at him, like a shadow refusing to fade.

A soft knock on the door broke him from his thoughts. “Come in,” he called out, trying to mask the tremor in his voice.

When Daniel LaRusso stepped inside, his presence filled the room with an intensity that sent Johnny’s heart racing. Dressed sharply, Daniel’s eyes were a mixture of determination and vulnerability.

“What are you doing here?” Johnny asked, surprised yet relieved to see him. “Shouldn’t you be with the guests?”

“I wanted to check on the groom,” Daniel replied, a hint of a smile breaking through his serious demeanor. “How are you feeling?”

“More nervous than I thought I’d be,” Johnny admitted, running a hand through his hair. “But ready, I guess.”

Daniel stepped closer, his fingers brushing against Johnny’s bowtie as he adjusted it. The closeness made the air thick with tension, and Johnny felt the weight of unsaid words pressing down on them.

“Looks good,” Daniel murmured, his voice barely above a whisper. They locked eyes, and in that moment, time seemed to slow. Johnny could see the emotions swirling in Daniel’s gaze—something unspoken, something deep.

“Daniel…” Johnny started, but the words died in his throat as Daniel’s expression shifted.

“I need to tell you something,” Daniel said suddenly, stepping back slightly, his hands trembling. “I’ve liked you for a long time. More than just friends.”

The confession hung in the air, thick with possibility and heartbreak. Johnny’s heart dropped. “What?”

Before Johnny could process it, Daniel leaned in, capturing his lips in a kiss that was both tentative and electric. It was everything Johnny had ever wanted, yet everything felt so wrong. He kissed Daniel back, but the moment quickly turned complicated. Johnny gently pushed him away, breathing heavily.

“Why now, Daniel?” Johnny’s voice was strained, hurt lacing his words. “You choose now, right before my wedding?”

“I couldn’t keep it in anymore,” Daniel said, his eyes wide with a mix of fear and hope. “I didn’t want to hide it, especially not from you.”

“It’s too late for that!” Johnny’s frustration bubbled to the surface. “I’m about to marry someone else. I’ve been in love with you for years, but I didn’t say anything because I didn’t want to ruin our friendship!”

Daniel’s face fell, pain etched across his features. “I thought you were moving on. I didn’t know…”

Johnny stepped back, feeling his heart fracture. “I’m sorry, Daniel. But I’ve found the love of my life. I’m ready for this.”

Tears welled in Daniel’s eyes, shimmering with unspoken emotions. “I just… I thought maybe…” His voice trailed off as he struggled to hold back the flood of feelings.

Johnny reached out, wiping a tear from Daniel’s cheek with his thumb. “You deserve happiness,” he whispered, leaning down to kiss Daniel’s closed eyes, hoping to offer some comfort in a moment of unbearable sadness. “Just not with me.”

Daniel turned away, the weight of their shared pain hanging heavily in the air. “I need to go,” he said quietly, his voice breaking as he stepped out of the room, leaving Johnny alone with his racing thoughts.

---

The wedding ceremony began, and guests filled the seats, dressed in their finest. Johnny stood at the altar, his heart pounding in his chest. Carmen was beautiful, walking down the aisle with a radiant smile. But even as she approached, Johnny couldn’t shake the image of Daniel from his mind.

Daniel sat among the guests, his expression a mask of forced happiness, but his eyes were betraying him. Tears streamed down his cheeks, and those around him assumed they were tears of joy. The truth, however, was much more complicated.

As Carmen reached the altar, Johnny felt a rush of conflicting emotions. He was supposed to be celebrating love, yet the thought of Daniel lingered in his heart like a ghost. When it came time to exchange vows, Johnny’s voice shook.

“Carmen, I love you,” he began, each word feeling like a weight on his soul. “You are my best friend, and I promise to cherish you.”

But even as he spoke, his thoughts drifted to Daniel. The reality that he was about to commit to someone else while harboring feelings for his best friend left him feeling hollow. Every time he glanced at Daniel, who sat silently weeping, a fresh wave of regret washed over him.

The ceremony continued, but Johnny found it hard to concentrate. The laughter and cheers around him faded into a dull roar. He caught sight of Daniel again and felt his heart twist painfully in his chest. Daniel quickly turned his head, trying to hide the tears that stained his cheeks, but it was too late; Johnny saw everything.

As they exchanged rings, Johnny felt a knot tightening in his throat. He forced a smile, trying to project happiness, but the truth was, he wished things had been different. He wished that Daniel had confessed sooner, that they could have been standing together at the altar.

Finally, as the ceremony concluded, Johnny leaned in to kiss Carmen, but the act felt like a betrayal. In that moment, he wished more than anything that their paths had crossed differently, that they could have shared this moment together.

---

The reception was a blur of laughter and celebration, but Johnny felt lost in the crowd. He moved through the guests, nodding and smiling, but his heart was heavy with regret. As he stood at the edge of the dance floor, watching Carmen celebrate with their friends, he felt a presence beside him.

“Can we talk?” Daniel’s voice was soft, almost fragile.

Johnny nodded, leading Daniel outside to a quieter area under the stars. The cool night air wrapped around them, contrasting sharply with the warmth inside.

“About earlier…” Daniel began, but Johnny held up a hand.

“I don’t want to complicate things further,” Johnny said, his voice thick with emotion.

“It’s too late for that,” Daniel replied, his eyes shimmering with unshed tears. “I should have told you sooner. I didn’t know it would come to this.”

“Neither did I,” Johnny said, feeling the weight of their unfulfilled potential. “But we can’t change the past.”

Daniel took a step closer, his voice dropping to a whisper. “I just want you to be happy, Johnny. Even if it’s not with me.”

The sincerity in Daniel’s eyes made Johnny’s heart ache. “I’m trying, but it’s hard,” he admitted, the vulnerability raw between them.

For a moment, they stood in silence, the unsaid words echoing between them. Johnny wished he could reach out, to take back the hurt, to find a way to make it all right. But the reality loomed heavy; they were standing at the crossroads of what could have been.

“I should go,” Daniel said finally, his voice breaking as he turned away.

“Yeah,” Johnny replied, feeling helpless. “I’ll always care about you. You know that.”

“I know,” Daniel said, a sad smile flickering on his lips before he stepped back into the night.

As Johnny stood alone, he felt a piece of himself shatter. The truth was, he had always loved Daniel, but life had thrown them into different paths. The timing had never aligned, and now, as he returned to the wedding festivities, he felt a profound emptiness.

As he watched Carmen celebrate, the joy of the day felt bittersweet. Johnny fought back tears, knowing he was losing not just a chance at love but the best friend he had ever had.

And so, as the music played on, the night continued, but in that moment, it felt as if time had stopped for both of them—caught in a moment of heartbreak that would linger long after the celebrations ended.

---

The End. (Maybe?)

Chapter Text

Johnny leaned against the kitchen counter, arms crossed, watching Daniel pack the last of their snacks into a cooler. Daniel, of course, was meticulous—each sandwich wrapped perfectly, every fruit slice cut to equal size. Johnny couldn't help but smirk at his husband’s perfectionism. Even after all these years, Daniel’s attention to detail was equal parts amusing and impressive.

“Are you sure we need that much food for a three-hour drive?” Johnny asked, cocking an eyebrow.

Daniel glanced up, raising his own eyebrow. “It’s not just for the drive, Johnny. We’re spending a weekend at the lake house, remember? The kids will get hungry between meals. I don’t want to hear anyone complain that we’re out of snacks.”

Johnny rolled his eyes, but a smile tugged at the corner of his lips. “Alright, Mr. Prepared. But just so you know, when we run out of space in the car because you insisted on bringing an entire grocery store, it’s on you.”

Daniel shot him a mock glare, his lips twitching as if he was fighting a grin. “Don’t blame me when Robby and Sam are complaining about being hungry. And I’ll be the one who has to hear it all weekend.”

Johnny snorted. “Like they’ll complain to you. You’re the fun parent. I’m the one they complain to.”

Before Daniel could respond, footsteps thundered down the stairs. Samantha, their eldest, breezed into the kitchen with the energy only a seventeen-year-old could muster. She tossed her duffle bag by the door and reached for an apple from the counter.

“Are we leaving yet?” she asked, taking a bite.

“Almost,” Daniel said, zipping up the cooler. “Where’s your brother?”

“Still upstairs, doing whatever it is Robby does for hours in his room,” Samantha replied, rolling her eyes. “I told him we’re about to leave, but you know him. It takes forever to get him to move.”

Johnny straightened and headed for the stairs. “I’ll get him. If we leave it up to you two, we’ll be here all day.”

As Johnny headed up the stairs, Daniel shot Samantha a knowing look. “You excited about the trip?”

Samantha shrugged, but the slight smile she couldn’t hide gave her away. “Yeah, I guess. I mean, it’s not like I had big plans or anything.” She paused. “But yeah, it’ll be nice.”

Daniel grinned. “That’s what I thought.”

Upstairs, Johnny knocked on Robby’s bedroom door. “Hey, Robby! Let’s go! If you’re not down in two minutes, I’m leaving without you.”

The door creaked open, revealing Robby, his long hair tousled as if he’d just rolled out of bed. “Chill, Dad. I’m ready. Just had to grab a few things.”

Johnny gave him a skeptical look. “You’ve been ‘grabbing a few things’ for twenty minutes. Get your stuff and let’s go.”

Robby rolled his eyes but grabbed his backpack, slinging it over his shoulder. “Alright, alright. I’m coming.”

By the time Johnny and Robby made it downstairs, Daniel was already ushering everyone toward the car. He gave Johnny a look that said, See? This is why I plan ahead.

“Everyone ready?” Daniel asked, holding up the car keys.

“Ready as we’ll ever be,” Johnny muttered, grabbing the cooler and loading it into the trunk.

The family piled into the car, Robby and Samantha in the back, bickering over who would control the playlist for the ride. Johnny climbed into the passenger seat while Daniel slid into the driver’s seat. He adjusted the mirrors, started the engine, and turned to Johnny with a smirk.

“Alright, Lawrence,” Daniel said, “we’re off.”

Johnny chuckled and leaned back in his seat as they pulled out of the driveway, the hum of the car and the chatter from the kids filling the air. The drive through the winding roads of California brought back memories, some pleasant, some less so. It wasn’t too long ago that he and Daniel couldn’t stand to be in the same room, let alone share a life, a home, and a family.

But things had changed. Over time, their rivalry had softened into something else—something neither of them had expected. After years of clashing, they’d found common ground. What started as begrudging respect evolved into friendship, and then, unexpectedly, into love.

They had both grown as men, as fathers, and eventually, as partners. And now, as they sped along the highway toward their family vacation, Johnny couldn’t help but think about how far they’d come.

“Dad, can we stop soon?” Samantha asked from the backseat. “I need to use the bathroom.”

Daniel glanced at Johnny, who rolled his eyes. “I thought you didn’t need to stop, LaRusso. Something about being perfectly prepared for everything?”

Daniel shot him a look. “It’s different when your kid needs to use the bathroom.”

Johnny grinned. “Yeah, yeah. Alright, let’s find a place to stop.”

After a quick pit stop, the family was back on the road. Johnny turned in his seat to glance at the kids in the back, who had finally settled on a playlist. Robby was tapping his foot to the music, his gaze out the window, while Samantha scrolled through her phone.

“Everyone doing alright back there?” Johnny asked.

“Yeah,” Robby muttered, not looking up from the scenery. “Just bored.”

Samantha shrugged. “It’s fine. I’m just ready to get to the lake.”

“Trust me,” Daniel chimed in, “we’re almost there. Just a bit longer.”

The sun was starting to dip below the horizon by the time they pulled up to the lake house. It was a cozy cabin nestled among towering trees, with a clear view of the shimmering lake just beyond. As Daniel parked the car, the kids bolted out, eager to stretch their legs and explore.

“I call the biggest room!” Samantha yelled, running towards the cabin.

“Not if I get there first!” Robby shot back, racing after her.

Johnny and Daniel exchanged amused glances as they unloaded the car.

“Think they’ll ever outgrow that?” Johnny asked, nodding toward the retreating figures of their kids.

Daniel laughed. “Probably not. Sibling rivalry is timeless.”

Once the bags were inside, the family settled into the cabin. Samantha and Robby’s excited chatter echoed through the hall as they explored their rooms. Johnny and Daniel stood on the back porch, looking out over the lake as the evening settled in around them.

“It’s nice out here,” Johnny said, taking a deep breath of the fresh air.

“Yeah,” Daniel agreed softly. “It is. It’s good to get away every once in a while, just the four of us.”

Johnny smiled and glanced at Daniel. “Who would’ve thought, huh? You and me, married, kids, doing the whole family vacation thing.”

Daniel chuckled. “Yeah, if you’d told me this would be my life twenty years ago, I would’ve called you crazy.”

Johnny bumped his shoulder lightly. “You’re welcome, by the way.”

Daniel raised an eyebrow. “For what?”

“For making your life more interesting, LaRusso.”

Daniel laughed, the sound warm and familiar. “Oh, I’ll give you that. You’ve definitely made things interesting.”

They stood in comfortable silence for a moment, the sound of the lake gently lapping at the shore filling the space between them.

“Come on,” Daniel said after a while, turning back toward the cabin. “Let’s get dinner started before the kids raid the kitchen.”

Johnny grinned. “Sounds like a plan.”

As they headed inside, Johnny couldn’t help but feel a sense of contentment wash over him. His life hadn’t turned out the way he’d expected, but standing there with Daniel, with their kids nearby, he realized it had turned out better than he could have ever imagined.

The End.

Chapter Text

The summer sun hung low, casting a warm glow over the San Fernando Valley. In the quiet confines of Johnny Lawrence’s house, the air was thick with the scent of youth and the thrill of a secret. Daniel LaRusso and Johnny had spent the weeks since the karate tournament exploring a new dimension of their relationship—one that was electric and undeniably real.

They were on the couch, lips moving together with a desperation that felt both thrilling and terrifying. Johnny’s hands cradled Daniel’s face, fingers tangling in his hair as their kisses deepened, a fiery exploration of everything they had kept hidden for so long.

“Did you ever think we’d end up like this?” Daniel murmured, breathless, his fingers tangled in Johnny’s hair.

“Not a chance,” Johnny grinned, leaning in closer, his lips brushing against Daniel’s. “But I’m not complaining.”

Just as Daniel was about to deepen the kiss, the door swung open, and there stood Sid, Johnny’s step-father, his expression a mixture of disbelief and disgust. The moment shattered, leaving an icy tension in the air.

“What the hell is this?” Sid's voice cut through the silence, filled with an anger that sent a chill down Johnny's spine.

“Sid, wait!” Johnny shouted, pulling away from Daniel, panic rising in his chest. But Sid’s face was set in a mask of horror, and Daniel felt a rush of dread.

Sid’s voice dripped with contempt. “You think this is okay? You think I’m going to let you two sickos make a mockery of my house?” He pointed a finger at Daniel, his face twisted in anger. “Get out. Now!”

“Sid, don’t—” Johnny tried to protest, stepping forward, but Sid pushed him back.

“Shut the fuck up! You don’t get to talk back to me. I can’t believe you’d stoop this low. You’re going to regret this.”

Daniel felt his heart drop. “Johnny, I—”

“Just go, Daniel,” Johnny said, his voice strained, eyes pleading. “Please.”

With a final look of desperation, Daniel turned and fled, the weight of Sid’s words echoing in his ears.

---

The next day at school, Daniel felt a gnawing anxiety in the pit of his stomach. He had been trying to reach Johnny all morning but hadn’t heard a word from him. With each passing hour, his concern grew. After lunch, he decided to head to Johnny’s house, desperate to find out what had happened after Sid’s outburst.

As he approached the Lawrence home, the sight of new security cameras made his heart sink. Sid had clearly upped the stakes, ensuring Daniel wouldn’t be able to sneak in. Daniel’s stomach twisted with fear as he realized he had no way to get to Johnny.

“Come on, Johnny,” he whispered to himself. “Where are you?”

When the school day ended, Daniel left with a heavy heart, not knowing how to reach his friend. He spent the evening tossing and turning, anxiety gnawing at him.

---

Two days later, Daniel spotted Johnny in the school hallway. His heart leaped, but as he approached, the sight made his stomach churn. Johnny looked terrible. Dark circles hung under his eyes, and bruises marred his skin, painting a picture of pain.

“Johnny!” Daniel called, rushing toward him, but Johnny didn’t meet his gaze. Instead, he pushed past Daniel, heading for the exit.

“Wait!” Daniel pleaded, grabbing Johnny’s arm. “What happened? Are you okay?”

Johnny flinched at the touch, pulling away. “I’m fine,” he said, though his voice was hoarse and lacking conviction. “Just leave me alone.”

“Don’t do this, Johnny,” Daniel insisted, desperation creeping into his voice. “I’m worried about you. What did Sid do?”

Johnny finally looked at him, and Daniel saw a flash of hurt in his eyes. “It doesn’t matter.”

“It matters to me!” Daniel exclaimed. “You matter to me. Please, talk to me.”

With a heavy sigh, Johnny glanced around to make sure no one was watching. “Sid’s taking me to conversion therapy,” he muttered, his voice barely above a whisper.

“What?” Daniel’s heart dropped, disbelief washing over him. “You can’t be serious. That’s—”

“It’s what he calls ‘getting rid of disgusting behavior,’” Johnny interrupted, his voice strained. “He thinks this is all my fault.”

“No, it’s not your fault!” Daniel urged, stepping closer. “Johnny, we’re not sick. This isn’t wrong. You know that.”

“Doesn’t matter,” Johnny said, a bitterness lacing his words. “Sid doesn’t care what I think. I have to go. I can’t fight him.”

Daniel felt his heart shatter. “But there has to be something we can do! We can’t let him take you away like this.”

Johnny’s eyes flickered with a mix of sadness and anger. “I can’t run away from him. I wish I could, but I can’t.”

Daniel could feel the weight of helplessness settling over him. “You’re not alone in this, Johnny. I’ll be here, no matter what. You have to know that.”

Johnny shook his head, tears glistening in his eyes. “You don’t understand. Sid is relentless. He won’t stop until I’m…fixed.”

“Fixed?” Daniel repeated, frustration boiling inside him. “You’re not broken! You’re perfect just the way you are.”

The bell rang, signaling the end of the day, but Daniel couldn’t focus on anything but Johnny’s pain. “Please, don’t do this,” he begged, feeling the heat of tears pricking at his eyes. “We’ll figure something out. Together.”

“I wish it were that easy,” Johnny said, his voice breaking. “But I can’t let him hurt you too. Just…stay away from me.”

“Johnny, no!” Daniel shouted, reaching out as Johnny turned to leave. But Johnny was already gone, disappearing into the crowded hallway, leaving Daniel standing alone, feeling the walls of despair close in around him.

---

That night, Daniel lay awake, the weight of everything pressing heavily on his chest. He thought of Johnny, the way he had smiled before, the warmth of their secret moments together. Now it felt like everything had been ripped away, leaving only a hollow ache.

Determined not to let Sid win, Daniel resolved to find a way to help Johnny. He began researching resources, reaching out to friends who might know of ways to support him. He wouldn’t let Johnny face this alone, even if it meant risking everything.

As the darkness of night surrounded him, Daniel vowed to fight for the boy who had stolen his heart. Their love was worth it, and he would do anything to protect Johnny, no matter the cost.

---

To be continued…

Chapter Text

The sun barely crested the horizon as Daniel LaRusso paced the length of his bedroom, his mind spinning in frantic circles. Johnny’s words from the day before echoed endlessly: “Stay away from me.” But Daniel couldn’t—wouldn’t—let that be the final word. The thought of Johnny, broken and beaten down by Sid’s cruelty, tore at him in ways he couldn’t describe. He knew Johnny well enough to sense the deep fear under his tough exterior, the cracks in his resolve. And that Sid, with his malicious grip, was driving him to the edge.

Daniel didn’t sleep much that night. His phone lay on the bedside table, and every few minutes, he checked it, hoping for some miracle—a text from Johnny, a call—anything that would show Johnny hadn’t been swallowed by the suffocating control of his stepfather.

Morning light crept into his room, and Daniel made a decision. He couldn’t wait any longer.

---

At school, Daniel’s eyes scanned the hallways, searching for any sign of Johnny. The minutes passed agonizingly slow as Daniel weaved through the crowded halls, ignoring the casual chatter of his classmates. His heart pounded in his chest, his worry growing with each passing second. Where was Johnny?

At lunch, he sat on the edge of his seat, barely touching his food. He hadn’t seen Johnny all morning, and the pit in his stomach grew deeper.

“Daniel!” A familiar voice broke through the haze of his thoughts. It was Ali. She approached his table, concern etched on her face.

“Hey, Ali,” Daniel said, forcing a smile, though it didn’t reach his eyes. “What’s up?”

“Are you okay? You look really distracted,” she asked, taking a seat beside him.

Daniel hesitated, unsure how much he should share. Ali was his friend, but the truth about Johnny and him was something he wasn’t ready to reveal—not to her, not to anyone.

“It’s…complicated,” Daniel finally said, trying to keep his voice even.

Ali frowned but nodded, sensing his reluctance. “Is it Johnny? I haven’t seen him around.”

Daniel’s heart skipped a beat. “You haven’t seen him either?”

“No,” Ali replied, her worry deepening. “I figured he was just skipping again, but…something seems off.”

Daniel clenched his fists under the table. Ali was right—something was definitely off. Johnny wouldn’t just disappear like this. He was in trouble, and Daniel needed to find him.

“I have to go,” Daniel said abruptly, standing up.

“Wait, Daniel—”

“I’ll see you later, okay?” he cut her off, already walking toward the door. Ali’s voice faded behind him as he made his way out of the cafeteria, determination settling in his chest.

---

After school, Daniel found himself standing outside Johnny’s house, staring up at the building. The security cameras Sid had installed watched him like silent sentinels, and Daniel knew there was no way he could just walk up to the door without setting them off. Sid would know immediately.

But Daniel had to try.

He glanced around, making sure no one was watching, then made his way toward the side of the house. There was an old tree near Johnny’s window, one they had climbed countless times as kids, before their rivalry had consumed them. Now, it was Daniel’s only hope.

With a deep breath, Daniel grabbed onto the lowest branch and hoisted himself up. His muscles strained as he climbed, his heart pounding in his chest. By the time he reached Johnny’s window, his palms were slick with sweat.

Carefully, Daniel tapped on the glass.

For a long moment, nothing happened. Panic began to creep in. What if Johnny wasn’t there? What if Sid had already taken him? But just as Daniel was about to give up, the curtains shifted, and Johnny appeared on the other side.

Daniel’s breath caught in his throat.

Johnny looked worse than before. His eyes were bloodshot, dark bags under them. Bruises mottled his skin—new ones, darker and more vicious than before. For a moment, Johnny just stared at Daniel, as if he couldn’t believe he was real.

“Daniel?” Johnny whispered, his voice hoarse and broken.

“Let me in,” Daniel urged softly, his heart aching at the sight of his bruised and battered boyfriend.

Johnny hesitated, glancing behind him, fear evident in his eyes. “Sid will kill me if he finds out you’re here.”

“I don’t care,” Daniel said firmly. “I’m not leaving you.”

After a moment, Johnny relented, sliding the window open. Daniel climbed in, his feet landing softly on the carpet. He took a deep breath, feeling the tension in the room.

Johnny quickly shut the window, then turned to face Daniel, his expression torn between relief and frustration. “You shouldn’t have come.”

“I couldn’t stay away,” Daniel replied, his voice steady despite the whirlwind of emotions inside him. “Johnny, what’s going on? Why won’t you talk to me?”

Johnny looked away, his jaw clenched. “It’s Sid. He…he said if I don’t go to the therapy, he’ll kick me out for good.”

Daniel’s stomach twisted. “What?”

Johnny nodded, his voice bitter. “He said I’m a ‘disgrace’ to the family. That I need to be fixed.”

“No,” Daniel said fiercely, stepping closer. “You don’t need to be fixed, Johnny. You’re perfect just the way you are.”

Johnny let out a bitter laugh, but there was no humor in it. “Yeah, well, try telling Sid that.”

“I will,” Daniel shot back, determination flaring in his chest. “I’m not going to let him do this to you.”

Johnny’s eyes softened for a moment, but then he shook his head, stepping back. “You can’t stop him, Daniel. You don’t understand—he has too much control over me. I can’t just…walk away.”

“Why not?” Daniel asked, his voice rising with frustration. “Johnny, we can figure this out together. You don’t have to go through this alone.”

Johnny’s expression twisted, pain flickering in his eyes. “I don’t want to drag you into this mess.”

“I’m already in it,” Daniel said, his voice softening. “Johnny, I love you. I’m not going to just stand by and watch while Sid hurts you.”

For a moment, Johnny seemed to falter, the weight of Daniel’s words sinking in. But then he closed his eyes, shaking his head. “I don’t deserve you.”

“Yes, you do,” Daniel said fiercely, stepping forward and cupping Johnny’s bruised face in his hands. “You deserve everything.”

Johnny’s breath hitched, and for a moment, Daniel saw the boy he had fallen in love with—the one who was strong and brave, despite everything. But then the walls came crashing down again, and Johnny pulled away.

“You need to go,” Johnny said, his voice thick with emotion. “Sid’s going to be back soon.”

“I’m not leaving you,” Daniel insisted, his heart breaking at the sight of Johnny’s pain.

“You have to,” Johnny whispered, his eyes pleading. “Please, Daniel. If Sid finds you here…”

Daniel hesitated, his heart warring with his instincts. He didn’t want to leave Johnny alone in this nightmare, but he knew Johnny was right. If Sid found him here, things could get even worse.

Reluctantly, Daniel nodded. “Okay. But I’m not giving up, Johnny. We’ll figure this out.”

Johnny gave him a small, broken smile. “I hope so.”

With one last look, Daniel slipped out of the window and disappeared into the night, his heart heavy with the weight of what was to come.

---

To be continued...

Chapter Text

The days after Daniel’s visit to Johnny’s house were some of the longest of his life. Each morning, he hoped for a sign, a message, or even just a glimpse of Johnny at school. But Johnny had all but vanished, leaving Daniel feeling more helpless with each passing hour. The weight of Johnny’s bruises, the broken look in his eyes, haunted Daniel’s every thought. He couldn’t focus in class, couldn’t sleep, and worst of all—he had no idea how to help the person he loved more than anything.

Sid’s grip on Johnny had tightened like a noose, and Daniel knew the kind of control Sid had. It wasn’t just physical—it was emotional, financial, everything. Sid had power over Johnny’s entire life, and Johnny was too trapped to break free.

But Daniel wasn’t going to sit by and let that happen. Not anymore.

---

Two weeks had passed since Daniel had last seen Johnny. Two excruciatingly long weeks where Daniel had tried everything he could to find a way to talk to him. He had gone to Johnny’s house every day, only to be greeted by Sid’s new security cameras and gates, all but daring him to try something. Daniel had even tried calling Johnny’s house, but Sid had intercepted every attempt, his cold voice telling Daniel to stay away.

Then, one Friday after school, just as Daniel was about to head home, he saw him.

Johnny was standing at the far end of the parking lot, leaning against his beat-up motorcycle, arms crossed over his chest. His eyes were hidden behind sunglasses, and his face was set in an unreadable expression. He looked rough—still bruised, still worn—but there was something else in his posture. Something that made Daniel’s heart race.

Without thinking, Daniel started walking toward him.

Johnny noticed him almost immediately, stiffening as Daniel approached, but he didn’t move. When Daniel finally reached him, Johnny pulled off his sunglasses, revealing those tired, haunted eyes Daniel knew too well.

“Johnny,” Daniel breathed, relief flooding through him. “You’re okay.”

Johnny let out a bitter laugh. “Yeah. Okay.”

Daniel reached for his arm, needing to feel some kind of connection, but Johnny stepped back, shaking his head. “Don’t, Daniel.”

“What do you mean ‘don’t’?” Daniel asked, frustration creeping into his voice. “I’ve been worried sick about you! You disappeared for two weeks—what the hell was I supposed to do?”

Johnny sighed, rubbing a hand over his face. “I’m trying to keep you out of this.”

“You can’t keep me out of this!” Daniel shot back, his voice rising. “I’m in it whether you like it or not. You think I can just walk away and pretend everything’s fine? I know what Sid’s doing to you, Johnny. You don’t have to go through this alone.”

Johnny’s eyes flashed with something Daniel couldn’t quite place—guilt, shame, maybe even fear. “You don’t get it. It’s not that simple.”

“Then make me understand!” Daniel pleaded, stepping closer. “Talk to me, Johnny. Please.”

For a moment, Johnny’s tough exterior cracked, and Daniel saw the pain underneath. The vulnerability. Johnny’s hands clenched into fists at his sides, as if he was physically holding himself back from something—maybe from breaking down, or maybe from pulling Daniel into his arms. But whatever it was, it made Daniel’s heart ache.

“I…” Johnny started, his voice thick with emotion, but he couldn’t seem to find the words. His shoulders slumped in defeat. “Sid’s making me go to this place. Some kind of…conversion therapy camp.”

Daniel’s blood ran cold. He had known Sid was cruel, but hearing those words out loud made it real in a way that punched the air out of his lungs.

“Johnny, no,” Daniel whispered, shaking his head. “That’s…that’s insane. You can’t go there.”

“I don’t have a choice,” Johnny muttered, looking away, his jaw tight. “He’s paying for everything—school, food, the house. If I don’t do what he says…”

“Then come with me,” Daniel said suddenly, the words spilling out before he could stop them. “Run away with me, Johnny. We’ll figure it out together. My mom won’t care if you stay with us. We’ll—”

“I can’t, Daniel!” Johnny’s voice broke through the haze, sharp and filled with a kind of desperation Daniel had never heard from him before. “I can’t just leave everything behind. It’s not that easy.”

“It is that easy!” Daniel insisted, grabbing Johnny’s arm, his grip firm. “Johnny, you don’t have to do this. We can figure something out. You don’t have to go through that hell.”

Johnny’s eyes softened for a moment, his guard lowering just enough for Daniel to see how torn he was. But then, as if some invisible wall snapped back into place, Johnny shook his head again.

“Sid’s got too much power over me, Daniel. If I don’t do this, I’m done. I’ll lose everything.”

“Johnny…” Daniel whispered, his heart breaking. “Please.”

Johnny looked away, his body tense, like he was fighting a war within himself. The silence between them stretched out painfully, each second feeling like a lifetime.

Finally, Johnny spoke, his voice low and broken. “I wish things were different, Daniel. I really do. But you have to understand…I don’t want you to get hurt because of me. I don’t want Sid to make your life hell too.”

“I don’t care about Sid,” Daniel said fiercely, his hands still gripping Johnny’s arm. “I care about you. You’re all that matters to me.”

Johnny met Daniel’s gaze, and for a brief, heart-stopping moment, Daniel saw everything he had ever hoped for in those blue eyes. All the love, all the desire, all the unspoken feelings that had been buried under layers of fear and pain. But then, just as quickly, the moment passed, and Johnny pulled away.

“I’m sorry, Daniel,” Johnny whispered, his voice barely audible. “But I have to do this.”

Daniel’s heart shattered. He wanted to scream, to shake Johnny, to make him see that there was another way. But the look in Johnny’s eyes told him that nothing he said would change his mind.

Without another word, Johnny turned and walked away, leaving Daniel standing there in the parking lot, his heart in pieces. He watched as Johnny climbed onto his motorcycle, the roar of the engine cutting through the stillness of the afternoon. Johnny didn’t look back as he sped off, disappearing down the road.

Daniel stood there long after Johnny was gone, the weight of everything crashing down on him. He had lost him—lost the one person who mattered more than anything. And the worst part was, there was nothing he could do to stop it.

---

The next day, Johnny didn’t show up at school. Or the day after that. And as the days turned into weeks, Daniel’s hope slowly faded away.

Johnny had been taken to the conversion therapy camp.

Sid had won.

---

To be continued…

Chapter Text

It had been nearly a month since Johnny had been taken to that conversion therapy camp. The days felt like they stretched into infinity, and Daniel spent each one fighting against a feeling of helplessness. He had tried everything he could think of to get in touch with Johnny, but every attempt was met with silence. Sid had built a wall between them, and Daniel felt like he was watching someone he loved slowly slip away, like a candle flame flickering in the dark.

Each morning, Daniel woke up hoping to find a message or a sign that Johnny was okay, but all he had were memories of their brief moments together. The last image burned into his mind was of Johnny’s haunted eyes as he rode away on his motorcycle, leaving Daniel feeling shattered and powerless.

Daniel knew he couldn’t keep waiting. The love he had for Johnny was a flame that refused to be extinguished, and if there was any chance to save him, he had to act. The realization hit him one night as he lay in bed, staring at the ceiling. Sid’s control over Johnny was suffocating, and he was terrified of what could be happening to him in that camp. It was time to stop waiting for someone else to save Johnny and take action himself.

---

Daniel spent the next few days researching everything he could about the conversion therapy camp where Johnny was being held. It was a place that thrived on fear, promising to “fix” people who didn’t fit into Sid’s narrow view of what was acceptable. The more Daniel read, the angrier he became. It was a place of torment disguised as treatment, and the thought of Johnny suffering in there was unbearable.

After some digging, Daniel discovered that the camp was located about an hour’s drive outside of town. The idea of breaking into the place was terrifying, but the alternative was even worse. He knew he couldn’t just sit back and let Johnny be tortured any longer. He had to be strong—for Johnny’s sake.

On the day he planned to rescue Johnny, Daniel felt like he was operating on pure adrenaline. He packed a small bag with essentials: a flashlight, his phone, a water bottle, and a baseball bat for protection. He knew that he was taking a huge risk by attempting this, but he couldn’t let fear paralyze him. He needed to trust that he would find a way to bring Johnny back, no matter what it took.

As Daniel drove toward the camp, his heart raced. The road felt like it stretched endlessly before him, each mile bringing him closer to a place filled with dread. He parked his car a safe distance away, knowing he needed to approach carefully. The camp was surrounded by tall, barbed-wire fences, and the buildings were stark and cold, a stark contrast to the warmth he felt when he was with Johnny.

He crouched behind a tree and watched the camp for a few minutes. A few staff members moved about the grounds, but there didn’t seem to be any strict security. He spotted some kids wandering around, their faces drawn and weary, and his heart sank. This was a place of pain, a prison disguised as rehabilitation.

Gathering his courage, Daniel crept closer to the fence, looking for a weak spot. He found a section where the barbed wire had been bent, allowing just enough space for him to slip through. His heart pounded in his chest as he wriggled his way through, feeling the sharp edges brush against his skin. He winced, but the pain was nothing compared to the fear of what Johnny was enduring inside.

Once inside the compound, Daniel kept to the shadows, moving quickly but quietly toward the main building. He had no plan; he just hoped to find Johnny and get him out before anyone noticed. As he approached the entrance, he could hear muffled voices inside. Anxiety twisted in his stomach, but he pressed on.

Stepping through the door, he was hit by the stark reality of the place. The walls were painted a sterile white, but they felt cold and unwelcoming. He spotted a group of boys sitting in a circle, their expressions vacant. They looked like they had lost all hope. Daniel felt a surge of anger rise within him, fueled by the desire to save Johnny.

He moved further into the building, listening for any sounds that might lead him to Johnny. As he crept down the hallway, he caught sight of a door slightly ajar. Holding his breath, he pushed it open quietly.

Inside, he found a room filled with uncomfortable metal chairs and a harsh fluorescent light. In the corner, Johnny sat hunched over, staring at the floor. His face was bruised and tired, and his clothes hung loosely on his frame. The sight of him sent a jolt of pain through Daniel’s heart.

“Johnny!” Daniel whispered urgently, stepping inside.

Johnny’s head snapped up, his eyes wide with disbelief. “Daniel?” he breathed, looking around as if he feared being caught. “What are you doing here?”

“I came to get you out,” Daniel replied, his voice steady despite the fear coursing through him. “We need to leave—now.”

“No, you can’t be here,” Johnny said, panic rising in his voice. “If Sid finds out—”

“Let him find out!” Daniel shot back, stepping closer. “I’m not letting you stay here another minute. You deserve so much better than this.”

“But I can’t just leave!” Johnny insisted, his voice rising with frustration. “They’ll come after you!”

“Let them come!” Daniel pleaded. “I’d take a hundred punches for you. You don’t have to go through this alone anymore. You’re not alone, Johnny.”

Johnny stared at Daniel, his eyes glistening with unshed tears. “I can’t,” he said softly, shaking his head. “You don’t know what they’ll do to me if I leave.”

“I don’t care,” Daniel said, stepping even closer. “I care about you. I love you, Johnny. And I won’t let them take you from me. Not now, not ever.”

Johnny’s breath caught, and for a moment, the world outside fell away. The tension in the air shifted, and it felt like it was just the two of them in that room, with everything they had fought for hanging in the balance. But then the door swung open, and a tall figure filled the doorway.

“What’s going on in here?” a camp staff member barked, eyes narrowing at the sight of Daniel and Johnny together.

“Shit,” Johnny muttered, his eyes wide with fear.

“Run!” Daniel shouted, grabbing Johnny’s hand and yanking him toward the door. They bolted past the startled staff member, sprinting down the hallway as alarms began to blare throughout the camp.

“Go, go, go!” Daniel urged, pulling Johnny along as they raced toward the exit. They could hear shouts behind them, footsteps pounding on the floor. The adrenaline surged through Daniel’s veins as they pushed through the door and into the open air.

Outside, the sky was overcast, casting a gray hue over everything, but Daniel didn’t care. He could feel Johnny’s hand in his, and that was all that mattered. They ran across the grounds, dodging staff members who were shouting and trying to catch them.

“Over here!” Daniel yelled, gesturing toward the trees at the edge of the camp. They sprinted toward them, ducking behind the thick trunks as they tried to catch their breath.

“What the hell were you thinking?” Johnny gasped, his chest heaving. “You could have gotten yourself killed!”

“I’d do it again in a heartbeat,” Daniel replied, looking into Johnny’s eyes. “You’re worth it.”

Before Johnny could respond, they heard the sound of voices approaching. Daniel gripped Johnny’s hand tighter, their eyes darting around for an escape route. They had to get out—there was no other option.

“Let’s go!” Daniel urged, pulling Johnny deeper into the trees. They pushed through the underbrush, adrenaline pushing them onward. The voices were getting closer, and Daniel’s heart raced.

Finally, they broke through the trees and into a clearing. Daniel spotted his car parked in the distance, his hope soaring. “We can make it! Just a little further!” he called, pulling Johnny along.

But as they neared the car, Daniel heard a shout from behind them. “Stop right there!”

Daniel’s heart sank. They had been spotted. Without thinking, he turned to Johnny and said, “Get in the car! I’ll hold them off!”

“Daniel, no!” Johnny protested, panic in his voice.

“Just go!” Daniel insisted, shoving Johnny toward the passenger door. “I’ll be right behind you. Just drive away!”

With a desperate glance, Johnny jumped into the car, but Daniel didn’t give him a chance to argue. He turned to face the staff members who were charging toward them, fists raised and ready.

As they approached, Daniel steeled himself. He wasn’t going to let them take Johnny back. Not without a fight.

“Hey!” Daniel shouted, his voice filled with defiance. “You’re not taking him anywhere!”

The staff members stopped, looking momentarily taken aback by Daniel’s courage. But it didn’t last long. “Get out of the way, kid!” one of them growled. “This is none of your business!”

“It is my business!” Daniel shouted back, standing his ground. “You’re not going to hurt him anymore!”

With that, the first staff member lunged at Daniel, and he quickly sidestepped, feeling the rush of adrenaline surge through him. He had trained for moments like this, and he wasn’t going to back down now. He dodged the punch and aimed a kick at the man’s knee, sending him crashing to the ground. As he fell to the grass, Daniel felt the exhilaration of fighting for Johnny, but he couldn’t let himself be distracted. He turned just in time to see another staff member rushing him from the side. Daniel raised his arms, bracing for impact, but before he could react, a figure shot past him.

“Get away from him!” Johnny shouted, surprising both Daniel and the staff member. Johnny, fueled by desperation and determination, lunged at the man who was approaching Daniel. He pushed him hard, using the adrenaline coursing through his body, sending the man stumbling backward.

“Johnny!” Daniel exclaimed, momentarily taken aback by Johnny’s sudden bravery. “You shouldn’t be here! Get in the car!”

“No way!” Johnny yelled, breathing heavily as he faced down another staff member who was moving in. “You’re not doing this alone!”

As they stood side by side, they felt a powerful bond of camaraderie. They had been through so much together, and the thought of being separated again ignited a fire in both of them. They fought like they had trained together their whole lives, throwing punches and dodging blows, defending each other with every ounce of strength they had.

The remaining staff members, now realizing they were outmatched by the two boys fighting as a unit, hesitated. Daniel could see the fear in their eyes as they faced him and Johnny, who had transformed from the scared boys they’d captured into fierce fighters.

“Now!” Daniel shouted, and they both made a break for the car. The sound of yelling and chaos behind them only fueled their determination. Johnny dove into the passenger seat as Daniel slipped into the driver’s side, his heart racing.

“Go, go, go!” Johnny urged, looking back to see if anyone was coming after them.

Daniel turned the key in the ignition, and the engine roared to life. He slammed the car into gear and sped away, the tires screeching as they left the camp behind. The freedom of the open road rushed over them, but it was quickly followed by the heavy weight of what they had just escaped.

As they drove, the reality of the situation began to sink in. Johnny was breathing hard, and Daniel could see the tension in his shoulders. He glanced over at Johnny, who had his arms crossed tightly, trying to process everything that had just happened.

“Are you okay?” Daniel asked, his voice gentle.

Johnny looked at him, his eyes wide with emotion. “I don’t know,” he replied, his voice trembling slightly. “I can’t believe you actually came for me. I thought I’d never get out of there.”

“I told you I’d do whatever it takes,” Daniel said softly. “You’re important to me, Johnny. I wasn’t going to leave you there.”

Johnny’s eyes glistened with unshed tears, and for a moment, the tension broke. They shared a glance, and Daniel could see the gratitude and love in Johnny’s expression. But that wasn’t the only thing he saw; there was also a flicker of fear, and it made Daniel’s heart ache.

“Daniel,” Johnny said, his voice low. “I can’t go back to that. Sid will never stop coming after me. He wants to ‘fix’ me, and I… I don’t know what that means for us.”

Daniel pulled the car over to the side of the road, turning to face Johnny directly. “You’re not going back, Johnny. We’ll figure this out together. You’re not alone anymore. You have me.”

“But what if Sid comes after you?” Johnny’s voice cracked, and he looked away, fighting back tears. “What if he makes your life hell because of me?”

“I don’t care,” Daniel insisted, his heart pounding in his chest. “I’d face a hundred Sid’s if it meant keeping you safe. You’re worth it, Johnny.”

Johnny turned to him then, his eyes searching Daniel’s face for sincerity. “You really mean that?”

“Absolutely,” Daniel replied, feeling the weight of his words. “You are everything to me. I’ve loved you for so long. I thought we could keep this relationship hidden, but after seeing you in that place, I realized I’d never forgive myself if I didn’t fight for you.”

Johnny’s expression softened, and a flicker of hope ignited within him. “You love me?” he whispered, disbelief etched on his face.

“I do,” Daniel admitted, his voice barely above a whisper. “I always have and will.”

In that moment, the world outside faded away. They were just two boys, sitting in a car that felt like a lifeboat in a storm. All the pain and fear they had faced over the past month melted away, leaving only the raw truth of their feelings. Johnny reached out hesitantly, brushing his fingers against Daniel’s cheek, a soft touch that sent shivers down Daniel’s spine.

“Daniel…” Johnny began, his voice trembling with vulnerability. “I was so scared. Scared of losing you, scared of being me. I didn’t want to ruin what we had.”

“You could never ruin it,” Daniel replied earnestly, leaning into Johnny’s touch. “You’re everything I’ve ever wanted, and I’ll always be here for you, no matter what.”

Suddenly, Johnny leaned forward, their foreheads nearly touching. Daniel could see the storm of emotions swirling in Johnny’s eyes—fear, pain, hope. “I’ve wanted to be with you for so long, but I thought it was too late,” he confessed. “I thought I’d lost you forever.”

“Never,” Daniel whispered, his heart racing. “You’re not going anywhere, not now. Not ever.”

With that, Johnny closed the gap between them, pressing his lips to Daniel’s in a kiss that felt electric. It was soft at first, tentative, but it quickly grew deeper, fueled by the desperation and longing they had both kept buried for far too long. Daniel felt the warmth of Johnny’s body against his, their hearts beating in sync as they poured everything they had into that moment.

Time stood still as they kissed, the world outside forgotten. All that mattered was the connection they shared, the love that had blossomed between them despite the odds. Daniel wrapped his arms around Johnny, pulling him closer, feeling the warmth radiate from him.

When they finally pulled away, both breathless, they rested their foreheads together, a smile breaking across Daniel’s face as he whispered, “I’m not letting you go again.”

Johnny chuckled softly, the tension in his body easing. “Yeah, I like the sound of that.”

But reality came crashing back as the sound of sirens echoed in the distance, and Johnny’s smile faded. The camp wouldn’t give up easily. They had to keep moving.

“We need to get out of here,” Daniel said, determination washing over him. “We’ll figure this out, Johnny. I promise.”

Johnny nodded, a newfound fire in his eyes. “Together,” he affirmed, his voice strong.

With that, they both turned back to the road ahead, the uncertainty of their future still looming but their hearts intertwined in a way that made them both feel invincible. They were ready to face whatever came next, together.

As they drove off into the unknown, Daniel felt a sense of hope blooming within him. No matter the challenges they faced, he knew they would fight for each other. Their love was worth it, and together, they would find a way to create a life where they could be free to love without fear.

---

The road stretched on before them, but they didn’t care. With each mile they traveled, they were leaving behind the pain of their past, ready to embrace a future filled with hope, love, and the promise of being together, no matter the odds.

The End.

Chapter Text

It had been three years since Daniel LaRusso rescued Johnny Lawrence from the clutches of the conversion camp, and in those three years, everything had changed. They had left the chaos of their teenage years behind and found a new life together—a life filled with love, laughter, and peace. No longer running from their past, they had finally found the stability they deserved, building something together that neither of them had ever thought possible.

The house they lived in was small but comfortable, nestled on the outskirts of a sleepy town far away from the memories of the Valley and all the pain it held. It was a cozy place, with a sprawling garden out back and enough space to practice karate when the mood struck them, which it often did. They’d turned their sparring into something of a tradition, but now it was more playful than competitive. There were no more angry matches or bitter tournaments—just the two of them, pushing each other, challenging each other, and enjoying the simple joy of being together.

The morning sun streamed through the windows as Daniel stood at the stove, making breakfast. The sizzle of eggs filled the kitchen, and the rich smell of coffee wafted through the air. Johnny shuffled into the kitchen, his hair still tousled from sleep, wearing an old tank top and loose sweatpants. He looked like he’d just rolled out of bed, but to Daniel, he looked perfect.

“Morning, sleepyhead,” Daniel greeted him with a smile, flipping the eggs in the pan.

Johnny grunted in response, rubbing his eyes. “Morning,” he muttered, still not fully awake. He stumbled toward the coffee pot, pouring himself a mug and taking a long sip before sighing in contentment. “Okay, now I’m alive.”

Daniel chuckled. “You say that every morning.”

Johnny shrugged, leaning against the counter. “Because it’s true every morning.” He glanced over at the stove. “You making my favorite?”

“Of course,” Daniel said, plating the eggs and setting them on the table. “You think I’d let you go without your scrambled eggs and bacon?”

Johnny grinned and took a seat, grabbing his fork. “I knew I loved you for a reason.”

Daniel rolled his eyes but couldn’t hide his smile. “Oh, is that the only reason?”

Johnny smirked. “Nah, there’s a couple more. Like your ability to drive me completely crazy in every possible way.”

Daniel shook his head but sat down across from Johnny, grabbing his own fork. “You’re lucky I put up with you, Lawrence.”

Johnny chuckled, his grin widening. “Yeah, yeah, I know. I’m one lucky bastard.”

They ate in companionable silence for a while, the sound of clinking forks and the occasional sip of coffee filling the room. It was a peaceful morning, like so many others they’d shared. But even after all this time, Daniel still found himself marveling at how far they’d come—how much they’d been through and how lucky they were to have found each other again, after everything.

Three years ago, after they’d escaped the conversion therapy camp, they’d been on the run for a while, not sure where to go or who to trust. Johnny had been terrified, and Daniel had been right there with him, determined to keep him safe no matter the cost. They’d bounced from place to place, living in cheap motels and keeping a low profile, but eventually, they’d realized they couldn’t live like that forever. So, they’d decided to start fresh somewhere far away, a place where they could be themselves without fear.

It hadn’t been easy at first. Johnny had struggled with the trauma of what Sid had done to him, and there had been nights when he woke up in a cold sweat, shaking and crying, convinced that Sid was going to find them and drag him back. But Daniel had been there, every single time, holding Johnny and reassuring him that they were safe—that he was safe.

It had taken time, but eventually, Johnny had started to heal. The nightmares became less frequent, and the fear that had once gripped him began to loosen its hold. Daniel had been patient, never pushing Johnny to talk about it unless he was ready, but always there to listen when Johnny needed him. And over time, the wounds had started to close.

Now, as they sat together in their little kitchen, eating breakfast like any normal couple, Daniel couldn’t help but feel proud of how far Johnny had come. He’d fought so hard to reclaim his life, to reclaim his sense of self, and he’d succeeded. Johnny was stronger now, more confident, more at peace with who he was. And Daniel loved him all the more for it.

After breakfast, they cleaned up together, their movements easy and familiar. It was a routine they’d settled into, one that felt comforting in its simplicity. Once the dishes were done, Johnny stretched, yawning.

“I’m gonna head out back for a bit, maybe practice some katas,” he said, running a hand through his messy hair.

Daniel raised an eyebrow. “Need a sparring partner?”

Johnny’s eyes gleamed mischievously. “You offering?”

Daniel smirked. “You know I can’t resist kicking your ass.”

Johnny laughed, the sound warm and genuine. “We’ll see about that, LaRusso.”

They headed out to the backyard, where the morning sun cast a golden glow over the grass. The garden was in full bloom, with colorful flowers lining the fence and a small vegetable patch off to the side. But the centerpiece of the yard was the makeshift dojo they’d set up—a simple wooden platform where they practiced karate together. It wasn’t fancy, but it was theirs.

Johnny stretched his arms, loosening up as he stepped onto the platform. “You ready for this?”

Daniel joined him, bouncing on the balls of his feet. “I was born ready.”

They squared off, their eyes locked in playful challenge. This was how they’d started, back when their relationship had been filled with rivalry and tension. But now, their sparring sessions were different. They weren’t about proving who was better—they were about pushing each other, testing each other’s limits, and having fun.

Johnny was the first to move, launching a quick jab that Daniel easily dodged. He followed up with a roundhouse kick, but Daniel blocked it, countering with a sweep that Johnny barely avoided.

“Getting slow, Lawrence,” Daniel teased, a grin tugging at his lips.

Johnny narrowed his eyes playfully. “Oh, you’re asking for it now, LaRusso.”

The fight picked up, their movements fluid and practiced. They knew each other’s styles inside and out, anticipating each other’s moves with ease. But even though they were evenly matched, there was always a spark of competitiveness between them—a need to push each other just a little harder.

After a particularly intense exchange of blows, Johnny managed to grab Daniel’s arm, spinning him around and pinning him to the ground in one smooth motion. Daniel landed with a grunt, the breath knocked out of him.

Johnny grinned, leaning over him. “Told you I’d kick your ass.”

Daniel looked up at him, his heart racing from more than just the sparring. Johnny’s face was inches from his, and for a moment, time seemed to freeze. The sunlight framed Johnny’s blonde hair, casting a halo around him, and Daniel couldn’t help but be reminded of how lucky he was to have this man in his life.

“You’re such a cocky bastard,” Daniel muttered, but there was no malice in his voice—only affection.

Johnny’s grin softened, and for a moment, the teasing fell away. He leaned down, brushing his lips gently against Daniel’s in a soft, tender kiss. It was a kiss that spoke of love, of gratitude, and of a future they were building together.

When Johnny pulled back, his blue eyes met Daniel’s brown ones, and the connection between them felt stronger than ever. They didn’t need words to express what they felt in that moment—it was written in every glance, every touch, every beat of their hearts.

“I love you,” Johnny said quietly, his voice barely above a whisper.

Daniel smiled, reaching up to cup Johnny’s cheek. “I love you too.”

They stayed like that for a moment, lost in each other’s eyes, before Johnny finally rolled off of him, lying back on the grass next to Daniel. They both stared up at the sky, the world peaceful around them.

“You know,” Johnny said after a while, “I never thought I’d have this.”

Daniel turned his head to look at him. “Have what?”

“This,” Johnny gestured around them. “A home. Peace. You.”

Daniel’s heart swelled with emotion. He knew how much this life meant to Johnny—how much they had both fought to get here. He reached out, taking Johnny’s hand in his, squeezing it gently.

“We built this together,” Daniel said softly. “And we’re going to keep building it, every day. No one’s taking this from us.”

Johnny turned his head to look at Daniel, his eyes filled with a quiet determination. “Yeah,” he said, his voice steady. “We are.”

And in that moment, Daniel knew that no matter what challenges the future held, they would face them together. They had fought for their love, and now they were finally free to live it—without fear, without shame, and without regret.

As Johnny and Daniel lay side by side on the grass, soaking in the morning sun, a deep sense of peace settled over them both. They had come such a long way—from bitter rivals to something more than even love. What they had wasn’t just a relationship, but a bond that had been forged in pain, struggle, and resilience. They had endured the worst, but now, all they had was each other, and that was more than enough.

Daniel turned his head slightly to look at Johnny, his chest swelling with gratitude for the man beside him. There was still a part of him that couldn’t believe how lucky he was, how far they had come from the days of the dojo rivalries, teenage fights, and complicated pasts. Now, they had this—their own quiet, happy life.

Johnny broke the silence first, his voice soft but steady. “You know, LaRusso… if you'd told me back in high school that one day we'd be lying here like this, I probably would've punched you in the face.”

Daniel laughed, squeezing Johnny's hand. “Yeah, well, if you'd told me the same thing, I would've swept your leg out from under you.”

Johnny chuckled, a warm, low sound that made Daniel’s heart skip a beat. The years had been kind to Johnny in some ways, and in others, they had hardened him. But here, with Daniel, all that melted away, revealing the man who had always been there underneath—the one who loved fiercely and fought even harder for the people he cared about.

“You think we could’ve done this sooner?” Johnny asked suddenly, his tone curious. “Maybe… avoided all that time wasted.”

Daniel took a deep breath, thinking it over. It wasn’t a question he hadn’t asked himself a thousand times, especially on the nights when he wondered what would’ve happened if they’d been honest with themselves from the start. But deep down, he knew the answer.

“I don’t know,” Daniel admitted softly, his thumb brushing over Johnny’s knuckles. “I think we had to go through all that to get here. You know? All the fights, all the mess—it brought us to this point. And now… well, we finally get it right.”

Johnny looked over at him, a thoughtful expression in his blue eyes. “Yeah, maybe you’re right. We needed the time to grow up. Hell, I know I needed it.”

“You weren’t the only one,” Daniel said with a small smile. “I was a real hothead back then, too.”

Johnny smirked, giving him a sidelong glance. “Still are sometimes.”

Daniel rolled his eyes. “Takes one to know one.”

They fell back into a comfortable silence, the kind that came when words weren’t necessary anymore. The birds chirped in the trees, and a gentle breeze rustled the leaves overhead. The world seemed perfectly still in those moments, as if all the turmoil and chaos of their past had finally settled into something beautiful and serene.

Eventually, Johnny sat up, stretching his arms over his head and letting out a long sigh. “Alright, LaRusso. Enough lying around. What do you say we go into town, grab some lunch, maybe hit the beach?”

Daniel raised an eyebrow, sitting up to join him. “The beach, huh? I didn’t take you for a beach guy.”

Johnny shrugged, a grin tugging at his lips. “What can I say? You’ve rubbed off on me, LaRusso. Plus, it’s a perfect place for me to show off that I still look better shirtless than you.”

Daniel laughed, shaking his head. “You wish.”

Standing up, Daniel offered his hand to Johnny, helping him to his feet. They lingered for a moment, face to face, hands still intertwined. There was a warmth in the air between them, something tangible and real, something that reminded them both of how far they had come—and how much further they had to go, together.

Johnny’s smirk faded, replaced by a soft, affectionate look that was still so rare for him. “I don’t say this enough, but… thanks, Daniel. For everything.”

Daniel blinked, momentarily caught off guard by the sincerity in Johnny’s voice. He smiled, pulling Johnny in for a quick, heartfelt kiss. When he pulled back, their foreheads rested together, the world beyond them fading into nothingness.

“You don’t have to thank me,” Daniel whispered. “We got through it together. And that’s how we’ll keep going.”

Johnny closed his eyes, letting the moment sink in. Then, with a quiet chuckle, he pulled away, a teasing glint returning to his eyes. “Alright, enough of the sappy crap. Let’s hit the road, LaRusso.”

Daniel laughed, feeling a lightness in his chest that he hadn’t felt in a long time. "Fine, but I’m driving."

Johnny shot him a playful glare. “Not a chance.”

They bickered good-naturedly as they headed back into the house to grab their things, the lighthearted banter echoing through the walls of their home. The warmth between them never faded, not even for a second. There was a sense of permanence in everything they did now, a quiet understanding that they would be at each other’s side for the rest of their lives.

---

The drive to town was filled with laughter, teasing, and the occasional argument over who had the better taste in music. Johnny insisted on blasting his 80s rock classics, while Daniel tried to introduce him to something new, something softer. It was all part of their routine now—bickering over the little things, but never losing sight of what really mattered.

When they reached the beach, the sand was warm beneath their feet, the ocean stretching out endlessly before them. The waves crashed gently against the shore, and the smell of salt and sea filled the air. Johnny had demanded they bring a frisbee, claiming it was the perfect way to show off his “superior” athletic skills, but Daniel had just rolled his eyes, knowing full well that he’d be the one winning by the end of the day.

As the sun began to set, painting the sky in hues of orange and pink, they sat side by side on a large rock overlooking the water, their shoulders brushing as they watched the waves roll in. The light from the setting sun caught in Johnny’s hair, making it glow, and Daniel couldn’t help but smile at the sight.

“This is nice,” Johnny said quietly, his voice carrying a note of contentment. “Never thought I'd be the type to enjoy sunsets on the beach.”

Daniel chuckled. “You’re full of surprises, Lawrence.”

Johnny turned to look at him, and for a moment, their eyes met, something unspoken passing between them. Johnny reached out, taking Daniel’s hand in his, and squeezed it gently.

“You really are the best thing that ever happened to me, LaRusso,” Johnny said, his voice low but filled with meaning.

Daniel’s heart swelled at the words, and he leaned in, pressing his lips softly against Johnny’s in a kiss that was full of love and promise. When they pulled away, their foreheads rested together once more, the world around them fading into the background.

“Right back at you,” Daniel whispered.

And as the sun dipped below the horizon, they sat there, hand in hand, knowing that no matter what came next, they would face it together—stronger, happier, and more in love than ever before.

This was their new life, and they were finally free to live it to the fullest.

Chapter Text

The morning sun streamed through the curtains, casting a warm glow over the modest living room of Johnny and Daniel’s shared house. It was quiet, the kind of peaceful stillness that had taken years to settle into. After all the ups and downs, after the rivalries, the regrets, and the moments they thought they’d never get here, they had somehow found their way to each other.

Daniel sat at the kitchen table, sipping his coffee, lost in thought. He glanced at the clock. Johnny was supposed to be up by now, but he wasn’t surprised that he wasn’t. Ever since they’d moved in together, Johnny had made a habit of sleeping in, especially on the weekends. Daniel didn’t mind. It was one of the small things that made their life together feel like home. The small, mundane routines that told him they were no longer caught in a whirlwind of competition, bitterness, or unresolved tension.

Now, they were just… Johnny and Daniel.

Daniel sighed and set his cup down, listening to the faint sound of Johnny’s snoring coming from the bedroom. The house was quiet, almost too quiet for a man like Johnny, who had always thrived on noise, action, and chaos. Yet here they were, living this domestic life together. Sometimes, Daniel still couldn’t believe it. They had gone from throwing punches to sharing a bed. From bitter enemies to husbands.

Yes, husbands. That still made Daniel smile, even after all this time. They’d been married for three years now, and while it wasn’t always easy, it was better than he could have ever imagined.

Still, there were days—like today—when Daniel couldn’t shake the feeling that things had shifted, just slightly. It wasn’t anything major, but a nagging sense that maybe, just maybe, Johnny wasn’t entirely happy.

Me and my husband, we’re doing better.

Daniel hummed the thought to himself, the lyrics of that Mitski song he’d heard a while back floating through his head. He leaned back in his chair, staring out the window. He’d always been good at putting on a front, at making everything seem perfect even when it wasn’t. But the truth was, no matter how much he loved Johnny, no matter how hard they worked at this relationship, there was always a part of him that worried it wasn’t enough. That he wasn’t enough.

Johnny wasn’t the easiest person to love. He was stubborn, impulsive, reckless—and yet, he was also fiercely loyal, deeply caring in his own rough-edged way. Daniel loved him more than he’d ever thought possible, but that didn’t stop the insecurities from creeping in sometimes.

He pushed his chair back and made his way to the bedroom, standing in the doorway for a moment, watching Johnny sleep. His hair was a mess, tousled from sleep, and his arm was draped lazily over his eyes. Even in his sleep, Johnny looked like a fighter, like someone who was always ready to get back up and swing again.

Daniel smiled softly. “Come on, Johnny,” he whispered, walking over to the bed and sitting down on the edge. “You’re going to waste the whole day in here.”

Johnny grumbled something incoherent, rolling over and burying his face in the pillow. Daniel chuckled, reaching out to gently nudge him. “Seriously, you gotta get up.”

“Five more minutes,” Johnny muttered, his voice muffled by the pillow.

Daniel leaned over, brushing a strand of hair away from Johnny’s face. “You said that twenty minutes ago.”

Johnny cracked one eye open, squinting up at Daniel. “Didn’t know I married a human alarm clock.”

“You did,” Daniel shot back, his tone light but affectionate. “And I’m not letting you sleep through the weekend.”

Johnny groaned, but there was a small smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. He finally sat up, rubbing his eyes and glancing over at Daniel. “You’re lucky I love you.”

Daniel’s smile softened. “Yeah, I know.”

There was a comfortable silence between them for a moment, the kind that had taken years to build. They didn’t need words to communicate anymore, not really. Just a look, a small gesture, and they knew. That was what made all of this worth it—the ease they’d finally found in each other’s company after years of fighting it.

But there was something else lingering in the air today, something that Daniel couldn’t quite put his finger on. Maybe it was the stress of the dojo, or maybe it was just his own overthinking, but he needed to hear it. Needed to know that despite everything, Johnny still felt the same way he did.

“Hey,” Daniel said quietly, breaking the silence. “You… you happy?”

Johnny raised an eyebrow, clearly caught off guard by the question. “What kind of question is that?”

“I don’t know,” Daniel replied, shrugging a little. “I just… I’ve been thinking, you know, about us. About all of this.” He gestured vaguely around the room. “And sometimes I wonder if… if I’m enough. For you.”

Johnny blinked at him, his expression shifting from confusion to something more serious, more thoughtful. “Where’s this coming from?”

Daniel sighed, running a hand through his hair. “I don’t know. I just… I don’t want you to feel like you’re stuck. Like you settled for this, for us.”

Johnny was silent for a moment, staring at Daniel with an intensity that made his stomach flip. Then, without warning, Johnny leaned forward and grabbed Daniel’s face in his hands, pulling him into a kiss that was more than just a kiss. It was reassurance, it was affection, it was everything Daniel needed to hear but hadn’t been able to say out loud.

When Johnny pulled back, he kept his hands on Daniel’s face, his thumbs brushing lightly over his cheeks. “You really think I’d be here if I didn’t want this?”

Daniel looked down, feeling a little embarrassed. “I don’t know. Maybe.”

“Christ, LaRusso,” Johnny muttered, shaking his head with a smirk. “You’re such an idiot sometimes.” But there was no malice in his words, only warmth. “I’m exactly where I want to be. With you.”

Daniel’s heart swelled in his chest, and he let out a shaky breath. “You mean that?”

“Yeah, I mean it,” Johnny said firmly. “You think I’d put up with your annoying ass if I didn’t?”

Daniel laughed, the tension easing from his body as Johnny’s words sank in. He leaned into Johnny’s touch, letting his forehead rest against Johnny’s shoulder. “I love you, you know that?”

Johnny’s hand slid to the back of Daniel’s neck, holding him close. “Yeah. I know.”

They sat there for a while, wrapped up in each other, the morning sun continuing to stream through the window. This was their life now—quiet, simple, but full of love. And despite all the doubts that sometimes crept in, Daniel knew he wouldn’t trade it for anything.

After a while, Johnny pulled back, his eyes flicking to the clock. “You know what we need?”

Daniel raised an eyebrow. “What?”

“Pancakes,” Johnny said, grinning like he’d just had the greatest idea in the world. “I’m starving.”

Daniel chuckled, shaking his head. “You’re ridiculous.”

“Yeah, but you love me.”

Daniel stood up, offering Johnny a hand. “Come on, let’s go make some pancakes.”

Johnny took his hand, pulling himself up off the bed with a groan. “I better get extra syrup.”

“Anything for you, sweetheart,” Daniel teased, leading him toward the kitchen.

Johnny rolled his eyes but smiled, following Daniel with a content look on his face. Despite all their flaws, their stubbornness, their history, they had built something real. Something worth holding onto.

As they moved through the kitchen, laughing and bickering over how to make the perfect pancake, Daniel realized that the song that had been stuck in his head earlier was right.

Me and my husband, we’re doing better.

They weren’t perfect, and they never would be. But they didn’t have to be. Because at the end of the day, they had each other—and that was more than enough.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

The neon lights of the bar flickered against the fogged-up windows, casting a dim, almost haunting glow over the empty streets of Reseda. Daniel LaRusso sat hunched over the counter, nursing his third whiskey of the night, eyes glazed as he stared into the amber liquid. It was late, far later than he should have stayed out, but the familiar weight pressing against his chest had driven him out here again, trying to drown out the constant ache in his heart.

His phone buzzed on the counter, lighting up with a name that sent a shiver down his spine: Johnny Lawrence. Daniel stared at the screen, his heart rate picking up as the memories flooded in.

Why’s he calling me now?

It was close to 1 a.m., and Johnny’s calls around this time never meant anything good. Daniel hesitated, his thumb hovering over the decline button, but before he could make a decision, the call ended. The familiar silence of the bar returned, the hum of the jukebox playing some old rock tune barely reaching his ears.

Another buzz. A text.

Johnny: "You up?"

Daniel let out a bitter laugh. Why’d you only call me when you’re high? The thought echoed through his mind, lyrics from the Arctic Monkeys song that had played in his car earlier.

This wasn’t the first time Johnny had called him late, voice slurred, trying to reignite the twisted, complicated bond they shared. A bond forged through fists and rivalry, and later, through hesitant friendship, late-night confessions, and the occasional shared drink. But as much as they tried to navigate this strange connection, it always seemed to end with one of them messing it up—usually Johnny, drunk or high, reaching out when he couldn’t handle the silence.

Daniel took a long sip of his whiskey, debating whether to text back. He wasn’t in the mood for Johnny’s erratic, half-drunk ramblings tonight. Not again.

But then his phone buzzed again, and this time, Johnny’s words hit harder.

Johnny: "I need you."

Daniel’s heart twisted in his chest. Damn it, Lawrence. He tossed a few bills onto the counter, grabbed his jacket, and made his way out into the cool night air. His car was parked a few blocks away, but Daniel didn’t mind the walk. The cold bit at his skin, and the alcohol buzzed through his veins, dulling the sharper edges of his thoughts. But no amount of cold or whiskey could numb the feeling that had been growing between him and Johnny for months—something tangled and messy, something neither of them wanted to acknowledge fully.

As Daniel slid into the driver’s seat, he stared at his phone, another text flashing across the screen.

Johnny: "Come over."

He knew he shouldn’t. Every part of him screamed to just let it go, to let Johnny figure out his own problems for once. But something in that message pulled him in, just like it always did. Maybe it was the unresolved tension between them, the way their lives seemed to orbit around each other no matter how far they tried to pull apart. Or maybe it was something more—something Daniel wasn’t ready to face just yet.

With a heavy sigh, he started the car and headed toward Johnny’s apartment.

---

Johnny’s place was as expected: dim, cluttered, and reeking of stale beer and cigarette smoke. Daniel knocked once before letting himself in. The door wasn’t locked, as usual. Johnny wasn’t exactly cautious when he was in one of these moods.

Inside, Johnny was sprawled out on the couch, a half-empty bottle of whiskey in his hand and an ashtray overflowing with cigarette butts on the coffee table. His eyes were bloodshot, his face a mix of exhaustion and something else—something raw.

"About time you showed up," Johnny slurred, though there wasn’t much bite in his voice. He sat up slowly, his movements unsteady. "Thought you were gonna ignore me this time."

Daniel crossed his arms, leaning against the doorway. "I should’ve," he muttered, his frustration barely contained. "What the hell, Johnny? It’s late. You’re drunk—again."

Johnny shrugged, taking another swig of whiskey. "Maybe I am. But you came anyway, didn’t you?"

Daniel gritted his teeth. Of course, I came. That was the problem. He always came when Johnny called, no matter how much he tried to convince himself that he didn’t care, that he didn’t need this. But the truth was, he was as tangled up in Johnny as Johnny was in him.

"You said you needed me," Daniel said, his voice quieter now, more tired than angry. "So what is it this time, Lawrence? What do you want?"

Johnny’s eyes flickered up to meet his, and for a moment, Daniel saw something vulnerable there, something that made his breath catch. Johnny opened his mouth to speak, but no words came out. Instead, he just stared at Daniel, his expression unreadable.

Then, without warning, Johnny stood up—stumbling slightly—and closed the distance between them. Daniel tensed, not sure what Johnny was about to do, but before he could react, Johnny was in front of him, too close, his breath warm and smelling of whiskey.

"I keep thinking about you," Johnny said, his voice low, almost a growl. "I try to forget it. Try to push it down. But it won’t go away."

Daniel’s heart pounded in his chest. "Johnny—"

"Shut up," Johnny interrupted, his hand gripping Daniel’s arm, pulling him closer. "You think I don’t know what this is? You think I don’t see it every time we fight, every time we look at each other?"

Daniel’s breath hitched, his mind racing. This wasn’t where he thought the night would go—not again. But he couldn’t deny it. The pull between them had always been there, simmering under the surface of every punch, every insult, every stolen glance when they thought no one else was watching.

"You’re drunk," Daniel said, though his voice lacked conviction. "You don’t mean—"

"I do," Johnny cut him off again, his grip tightening. "I always do. But you’re never around when I’m sober enough to say it."

Daniel swallowed hard, his mind screaming at him to pull away, to leave before this spiraled out of control. But he couldn’t. His feet were glued to the floor, his body betraying him as Johnny’s words sank deeper.

The tension between them was electric, and before Daniel could stop himself, he grabbed Johnny by the collar and kissed him—hard, desperate, like he was trying to pour all the years of confusion and anger and lust into that one moment.

Johnny kissed him back just as fiercely, his hands fisting in Daniel’s shirt, pulling him closer. The taste of whiskey and cigarettes was overwhelming, but Daniel didn’t care. All that mattered was the feeling of Johnny against him, the way their bodies fit together like they’d been doing this all their lives, even though they’d spent so many years fighting it.

But the kiss didn’t last. Johnny pulled back first, his breathing heavy, his forehead resting against Daniel’s.

"This is why I call you," Johnny whispered, his voice rough. "Because when I’m high, or drunk, or whatever, I can’t pretend anymore. I can’t push it down. And I know... I know you feel it too."

Daniel closed his eyes, his heart racing. He did feel it. He had always felt it. But acknowledging it, letting it be real, was dangerous. It would change everything—everything they’d spent years building, everything they’d tried to bury.

"Johnny," Daniel started, but his voice broke.

"I’m not asking for anything," Johnny said quietly. "I just... I can’t be alone with it anymore."

Daniel opened his eyes, staring into Johnny’s. He wanted to say something, anything, that would make this easier. But there was nothing easy about this. Nothing easy about the way they were drawn to each other, even when they knew it would destroy them.

So instead, Daniel did the only thing he could. He kissed Johnny again—this time slower, softer, like he was trying to make up for all the times they’d let their pride and anger get in the way of what they really wanted.

And for a moment, it was enough.

---

The next morning, Daniel woke up in Johnny’s apartment, sunlight streaming through the window. He sat up slowly, his head pounding from the hangover and the weight of everything that had happened. Johnny was still asleep beside him, his face peaceful for once, free from the usual tension that seemed to define him.

Daniel slipped out of bed, careful not to wake him, and pulled on his clothes. As he reached for his phone, he saw a missed call from Amanda—his wife.

His stomach twisted with guilt, but he couldn’t bring himself to regret what had happened with Johnny. It was complicated, messy, but it was real.

Daniel left Johnny’s apartment quietly, slipping out into the morning light, knowing that this wouldn’t be the last time Johnny called him in the middle of the night, and that, despite everything, he would always answer.

Because no matter how hard they tried to fight it, no matter how high or drunk or lost they were, there was something between them that neither of them could ignore.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

Anthony LaRusso sat at the far end of the cafeteria, absently picking at the sandwich in front of him. The dull murmur of conversation and clattering trays filled the room, but his focus was elsewhere. His eyes flicked across the crowded space, landing on Kenny Payne, who was laughing with a few of his Cobra Kai friends at another table.

Kenny always seemed to draw attention wherever he went. It wasn’t just that he had become popular after joining Cobra Kai; there was something magnetic about him. He was confident, always flashing that easy smile, and Anthony couldn’t help but feel a pang of something he couldn’t quite name whenever he saw him.

It was strange. There had been a time when Anthony couldn't stand Kenny. They had a rough past, with Anthony being part of the group that bullied Kenny back in middle school, and things had gotten worse when Kenny joined Cobra Kai and learned how to fight back. The dynamic had flipped in a way Anthony wasn’t proud of, and their encounters since then had been tense, often hostile.

But now, in their junior year of high school, things felt... different. Maybe it was because Anthony had grown up a bit and realized how wrong he had been. Maybe it was because Kenny wasn’t just the quiet kid he used to know; he had changed, and Anthony had noticed.

And it wasn’t just noticing in the way you observe someone from a distance, like you might with an acquaintance. Anthony had been watching Kenny more closely, almost unconsciously. He knew Kenny’s favorite spot in the cafeteria, the way he laughed with his friends, and how his eyes lit up when he was excited about something. These weren’t details Anthony would have cared about a year ago, but now, they stuck with him in a way that left him feeling unsettled—and something else.

Warm.

A loud laugh from Kenny’s table snapped Anthony out of his thoughts. He blinked and realized he had been staring—again. He quickly averted his gaze, cheeks flushing slightly. He needed to get a grip. This was ridiculous. Kenny was the last person Anthony should be thinking about like this, but no matter how much he tried to push it away, it kept creeping back in.

“Earth to Anthony,” a voice interrupted, and Anthony glanced up to see Demetri plop down next to him with a tray full of food. “You’ve been zoning out for like ten minutes. What’s going on?”

“Nothing,” Anthony mumbled, taking a half-hearted bite of his sandwich. He wasn’t about to admit what—or who—he had been thinking about.

Demetri followed Anthony’s line of sight and raised an eyebrow when he saw Kenny’s table in the distance. “Ooooh, I get it. You’ve been watching him, haven’t you?”

Anthony’s heart stuttered, and he whipped his head around to glare at Demetri. “What are you talking about?”

Demetri grinned, clearly enjoying Anthony’s discomfort. “Don’t try to deny it. You’ve been watching Kenny Payne like he’s the star of some rom-com, and you’re the conflicted protagonist who doesn’t realize he’s falling in love.”

Anthony’s face heated up even more. “I am not falling in love with Kenny,” he said, his voice coming out more defensive than he intended.

“Uh-huh. Sure, buddy.” Demetri leaned back in his chair, arms crossed, with a knowing smirk. “Look, I don’t blame you. The guy’s good-looking, and let’s be honest, he’s got that whole ‘bad boy with a heart of gold’ vibe going on. It’s a classic trope.”

Anthony groaned and buried his face in his hands. “This is ridiculous.”

“It’s not ridiculous,” Demetri said, his tone softening. “You like him. It’s okay to admit it.”

Anthony lifted his head just enough to shoot Demetri a skeptical look. “How can I like him? We’ve been at each other’s throats for years.”

“Yeah, but that was before, right? People change. You’ve changed. Maybe he’s changed too.” Demetri shrugged. “Besides, enemies to lovers is the best kind of love story.”

Anthony wanted to argue, to say that it wasn’t like that, but the truth was, he didn’t know what it was anymore. Somewhere along the line, his feelings toward Kenny had shifted, and now he was left trying to figure out what that meant.

Demetri gave Anthony a sympathetic look. “Look, if you really don’t want to admit it, that’s fine. But maybe you should at least try talking to him.”

Anthony snorted. “Talking to him? Have you met Kenny? He’d probably kick my ass before I got two words out.”

“Or,” Demetri said, wagging a finger, “he might actually talk to you. You know, like normal people do. It’s worth a shot.”

Anthony sighed, glancing over at Kenny’s table again. The idea of talking to him—really talking—seemed impossible. But there was a part of him that couldn’t stop thinking about it.

Maybe Demetri was right. Maybe it was worth a shot.

---

A few days later, Anthony found himself loitering near the gym after school, his heart racing. He had spent the whole day mentally preparing himself for this moment, but now that he was actually here, waiting for Kenny to finish his karate practice, his resolve was crumbling.

What was he even going to say? How was he supposed to start a conversation with someone he had spent years being at odds with? Anthony’s palms were sweaty, and he wiped them on his jeans, trying to calm his nerves.

The door to the gym swung open, and Kenny emerged, towel slung over his shoulder, his Cobra Kai gi still on. He hadn’t noticed Anthony yet, his focus on his phone as he walked down the hallway.

Anthony’s stomach did a somersault. This was it. Now or never.

He stepped forward, clearing his throat. “Hey, Kenny.”

Kenny looked up, surprised to see Anthony standing there. His expression immediately shifted into something guarded, his eyes narrowing slightly. “What do you want, LaRusso?”

Anthony swallowed, suddenly feeling incredibly self-conscious. “I, uh... I wanted to talk.”

Kenny raised an eyebrow, clearly skeptical. “About what?”

Anthony shuffled his feet, trying to find the right words. “About... us. I guess.”

Kenny crossed his arms, leaning against the wall. “There is no ‘us,’ LaRusso. We’ve got nothing to talk about.”

“Okay, fair,” Anthony said quickly, holding up his hands in a gesture of peace. “But I was thinking maybe we could... I don’t know, start over?”

Kenny’s eyes flickered with something Anthony couldn’t quite place—surprise, maybe, or curiosity. “Start over? Why?”

“Because,” Anthony said, struggling to find the right words, “I’ve been a jerk, okay? And I don’t want to be that guy anymore. I just... I thought maybe we could try being, you know, not enemies.”

Kenny didn’t respond right away, his expression unreadable. Anthony’s heart was pounding in his chest, the silence stretching on long enough that he wondered if this had been a huge mistake.

But then Kenny sighed, dropping his arms to his sides. “Fine. I’ll bite. What’s your angle, LaRusso?”

“No angle,” Anthony said, shaking his head. “I swear. I just... I guess I’m tired of fighting all the time.”

Kenny stared at him for a long moment, like he was trying to figure out if Anthony was being serious or if this was some kind of trick. Finally, he shrugged. “Alright. I’ll give you a chance. But if this is some kind of Cobra Kai versus Miyagi-Do thing, it’s not gonna end well.”

Anthony smiled, relief flooding through him. “No dojo wars. I promise.”

Kenny gave him a small, wary nod. “Okay. But don’t expect me to go easy on you if you piss me off.”

“I wouldn’t dream of it,” Anthony said, his smile widening just a little.

---

What started as a cautious truce slowly evolved into something more over the next few weeks. Anthony had no idea how it happened, but one day, he found himself walking with Kenny after school, chatting about random things like movies and video games, like they were normal friends who had known each other for years.

It was... nice. Surprisingly so.

Kenny was a lot easier to talk to than Anthony had expected. Beneath the tough exterior, there was someone who actually had a good sense of humor, who was quick with a sarcastic comment but also willing to listen. Anthony found himself looking forward to their conversations, and that strange warmth he had felt before kept creeping back in.

One afternoon, they were sitting on the bleachers at the park, watching a group of kids play soccer. It had become a kind of routine for them to hang out there after school, especially when the weather was nice. The sun was setting, casting a golden glow over the field, and for the first time in a while, Anthony felt completely at ease.

“I never thought we’d end up here,” Kenny said suddenly, breaking the comfortable silence between them.

Anthony turned to look at him, eyebrows raised. “What do you mean?”

Kenny shrugged, his gaze still on the soccer game. “I mean, I used to hate you. I never thought we’d be... friends.”

The word “friends” hung in the air between them, and Anthony felt his heart skip a beat. Friends. That’s what they were now, wasn’t it? It was a strange thought, considering how much they had disliked each other just a year ago. But now, sitting here with Kenny, Anthony realized how much things had changed. And it wasn’t just that they had stopped fighting. There was something else—something deeper, more confusing—that had been growing between them.

“Yeah,” Anthony said softly, turning his gaze back to the field. “It’s weird. But… I’m glad.”

Kenny glanced at him, a small smile tugging at the corner of his mouth. “Glad? What happened to the LaRusso who always wanted to one-up me?”

Anthony chuckled, shaking his head. “That guy’s still around. But… I don’t know, things are different now. You’re different.”

“Yeah, well, you’re not the only one who’s changed,” Kenny said, leaning back on the bleachers. “I’m not that kid you used to mess with in middle school anymore.”

“I know,” Anthony said quickly, feeling a flicker of guilt. “And I’m sorry. I was a jerk back then.”

Kenny was silent for a moment before shrugging. “We were both different people. I was angry, you were… well, kind of a jerk. But we’re past that now, right?”

Anthony nodded, grateful for Kenny’s willingness to leave the past where it belonged. “Yeah, we are.”

The conversation lulled again, but this time, the silence felt comfortable. The setting sun bathed the park in a warm glow, and the distant sounds of laughter and shouts from the kids playing soccer filled the air. Anthony felt his heart settle into a peaceful rhythm, but at the same time, there was something fluttering in his chest—something he couldn’t quite ignore.

He stole a glance at Kenny, watching the way the light softened his features. It was weird how much his feelings had shifted in such a short time. Kenny wasn’t just the guy he used to butt heads with anymore. He was someone Anthony genuinely liked being around, someone who made him laugh, made him think, made him feel… different.

Maybe Demetri had been right all along. Maybe Anthony’s feelings had evolved into something more than friendship. But what was he supposed to do with that?

Kenny must have sensed Anthony’s gaze because he turned his head slightly, catching Anthony looking at him. For a moment, neither of them said anything, and Anthony’s heart jumped into his throat. Kenny’s expression was unreadable, but his eyes were soft, searching, like he was trying to figure something out too.

Anthony swallowed hard, suddenly nervous. “What?” he asked, his voice a little shakier than he intended.

Kenny didn’t look away. “You’ve been different lately. More than just not being a jerk.”

Anthony’s heart sped up. “Different how?”

Kenny shifted, turning to face Anthony fully. “I don’t know. It’s like… we’re not just friends, are we?”

Anthony’s breath caught in his throat. He wasn’t sure if Kenny was asking him a question or making a statement, but either way, it felt like the moment they’d both been skirting around for weeks had finally come crashing down on them.

“I—” Anthony started, but he couldn’t find the words. His mind was racing, but at the same time, everything felt crystal clear. He liked Kenny. More than liked him. And now that they were sitting here, so close, with the weight of unspoken feelings hanging between them, Anthony couldn’t pretend otherwise.

Kenny’s expression softened, and he leaned in slightly, his voice quieter now, more tentative. “Look, if I’m wrong, just say so. But… if I’m right…”

Anthony’s breath hitched as Kenny’s words trailed off, leaving the rest of the sentence hanging in the air. His heart was pounding in his chest, and every part of him was screaming to do something, to say something, to—

Screw it.

Before he could second-guess himself, Anthony leaned forward, closing the gap between them. The kiss was quick, almost hesitant, but the moment their lips touched, Anthony felt something click into place—something that had been building between them for weeks, maybe even months.

When he pulled back, his heart was racing, and his cheeks were burning, but the look on Kenny’s face made every bit of nervousness worth it. Kenny’s eyes were wide with surprise, but there was a softness there too, something warm and real that made Anthony’s chest tighten in the best possible way.

Kenny blinked, clearly taken aback for a moment, before a slow smile spread across his face. “Well, that answers my question.”

Anthony let out a breath he hadn’t realized he was holding, laughing a little nervously. “Yeah, I guess it does.”

Kenny chuckled, shaking his head in disbelief. “You know, I never thought in a million years that this is where we’d end up.”

“Me neither,” Anthony admitted, smiling shyly. “But… I’m glad we did.”

Kenny’s smile softened, and he reached out, brushing a strand of hair away from Anthony’s forehead. The touch was so gentle, so unlike anything Anthony had expected, that it sent a shiver down his spine.

“I’m glad too,” Kenny said quietly.

For a moment, they just sat there, the weight of what had just happened sinking in. The sun had dipped lower in the sky, casting long shadows across the park, but the world around them felt distant—like it didn’t really matter. All that mattered was the boy sitting next to Anthony, the warmth of his hand still lingering on Anthony’s skin, and the realization that everything had changed between them.

It was scary, sure. But it also felt right.

“So… where do we go from here?” Anthony asked, his voice barely above a whisper.

Kenny shrugged, a playful glint in his eyes. “I don’t know. But I guess we’ll figure it out together.”

Anthony smiled, feeling a weight lift off his shoulders. Whatever came next, they would face it together, just like Kenny said. They weren’t just rivals anymore, and they weren’t just friends either. They were something new, something better. Something worth exploring.

And for the first time in a long time, Anthony felt like he was exactly where he was supposed to be.

---

The weeks that followed were filled with a warmth Anthony had never really experienced before. He and Kenny didn’t talk much about the kiss right away, but things between them were undeniably different. They still bickered from time to time, still made sarcastic comments and playful jabs, but underneath it all, there was a softness now—a tenderness that had never been there before.

They spent more time together after school, sometimes hanging out at the park or at one of their houses, and the more they talked, the more Anthony realized how easy it was to be around Kenny. There was no pressure, no need to prove anything. It was just... nice. Being with Kenny felt like coming home after a long, exhausting day.

One afternoon, as they were walking through the neighborhood after school, Kenny nudged Anthony with his shoulder. “So, you wanna keep pretending like we’re just friends, or are you ready to admit that we’re something more?”

Anthony grinned, his heart doing that now-familiar fluttering thing it always did when Kenny was around. “I think we’re way past ‘just friends’ at this point.”

Kenny smirked, wrapping an arm around Anthony’s shoulders and pulling him close. “Good. Because I was starting to think I’d have to spell it out for you.”

Anthony laughed, feeling a warmth spread through him at the simple gesture. He leaned into Kenny’s side, savoring the comfortable silence that had settled between them. They didn’t need to say anything more. Everything they felt—everything they were—was already clear.

As they reached Anthony’s house, Kenny stopped and turned to face him, his expression softening. “Hey, thanks for giving this a chance. I mean... us.”

Anthony smiled, feeling a swell of affection rise in his chest. “I’m glad I did.”

Kenny’s eyes sparkled with something playful, but there was a seriousness underneath it too. “Good, because I’m not going anywhere.”

Anthony’s heart skipped a beat, and before he could overthink it, he leaned in, pressing a soft, lingering kiss to Kenny’s lips. It was slow and sweet, the kind of kiss that said more than words ever could.

When they finally pulled apart, Kenny’s smile was so bright it made Anthony’s heart do a little flip.

“See you tomorrow?” Kenny asked, his voice soft, almost hopeful.

Anthony nodded, his own smile matching Kenny’s. “Definitely.”

As Kenny walked away, Anthony stood on his front porch, watching him until he disappeared around the corner. His heart was full, and for the first time in a long time, he felt like everything was falling into place. Whatever challenges lay ahead, he knew they could face them together.

Because, in the end, it wasn’t about rivalry or competition. It was about finding something real, something good.

And as far as Anthony was concerned, Kenny Payne was the best thing to ever happen to him.

The End.

Chapter Text

The sound of the old bar door creaking shut behind him felt like the final nail in the coffin of Daniel’s night. It wasn’t even that late—barely midnight—but the weight of everything he’d been carrying for weeks had made every hour feel like a year. He let out a sigh, running a hand through his hair, glancing around the dimly lit room.

He wasn’t sure why he’d come here, of all places. Maybe it was the lingering memory of Johnny’s voice telling him he’d found this dive a few years back and started coming by to drink when he needed to clear his head. Maybe it was the fact that, over the past year, his life had somehow become increasingly tied to Johnny Lawrence’s, and every path seemed to lead back to him.

Daniel didn’t even bother ordering a drink. He just wanted the quiet. Wanted to sit in a dark corner and let the low hum of the bar lull him into numbness for a while. His mind was too loud lately, his thoughts circling in a way that felt like torture.

He sat down in a booth by the wall, his back to the door. He didn’t want anyone to see him. He didn’t want to run into anyone. Especially not Johnny.

And yet, as fate would have it, the moment the door opened, Daniel felt it. The familiar presence before he even turned around. A chill ran down his spine, and his heart picked up speed like it always did when Johnny was near. He hated that his body betrayed him like that. Hated that he was hyperaware of Johnny in a way that didn’t make sense—at least, not for the kind of relationship they were supposed to have.

He wasn’t surprised when Johnny slid into the booth across from him, his sharp blue eyes already scanning Daniel’s face like he could see right through him. There was a beat of silence, filled only by the low rumble of the bar’s jukebox playing some old rock song Daniel couldn’t place.

Johnny tilted his head, his voice low and gruff when he finally spoke. “LaRusso, what the hell are you doing here?”

Daniel shrugged, trying to play it cool, but his pulse was racing. “Just needed to get out of my head for a while. What about you?”

Johnny leaned back, crossing his arms. He looked as calm as ever, but Daniel had known him long enough now to see the cracks beneath the surface. “Same,” Johnny muttered. “Though I’m guessing your head’s more messed up than usual.”

Daniel let out a humourless laugh, shaking his head. “You could say that.”

They fell into an uneasy silence. It had always been like this between them—an odd mix of tension, history, and something neither of them had ever dared to name. They were supposed to be friends now, supposed to be on the same team, but the truth was that neither of them had ever really settled into that role comfortably.

There were too many layers to what they were, and sometimes, Daniel wondered if they were even friends at all—or if they were just two people who couldn’t seem to stop orbiting around each other, constantly drawn back together, no matter how much they tried to pull away.

Johnny studied him for a moment, then leaned in, his voice lowering as if he didn’t want anyone else to hear. “You gonna tell me what’s really going on, or are you just gonna sit there pretending everything’s fine?”

Daniel’s breath hitched. He hadn’t wanted to talk about it, especially not with Johnny. But now that Johnny was here, his piercing gaze focused on him, Daniel felt the words bubbling up to the surface.

“I…” Daniel started, then hesitated, biting his lip. “I can’t stop thinking about things. About us. About…everything.”

Johnny’s eyes flickered with something unreadable, and his body tensed ever so slightly. “What about us?” His voice was casual, but Daniel could hear the underlying edge, the same tension that had been simmering between them for months.

Daniel shook his head, frustrated, unsure how to say what he needed to say. “I don’t know. I just… I feel like I’m losing my mind, Johnny. Every time we’re together, it’s like there’s something I’m not saying. Something I’m not letting myself feel.”

Johnny’s jaw clenched, and for a moment, Daniel thought he might get up and walk away. But instead, Johnny stayed where he was, his eyes darkening. “You think I don’t know that?” he said quietly, his voice low and dangerous. “You think I haven’t felt it too?”

Daniel’s heart stopped. He hadn’t expected that. He hadn’t expected Johnny to admit that he felt it too—that invisible pull that kept drawing them together, the tension that was always there, lurking beneath the surface of their every interaction.

“Then why…” Daniel’s voice cracked, and he tried to steady himself. “Why don’t we talk about it?”

Johnny gave him a bitter smile. “What’s the point, LaRusso? What the hell would we even say? That we’ve both been too scared to admit we feel something? That we’ve spent all these years pretending like there’s nothing between us when there’s clearly something?”

Daniel felt his chest tighten. Hearing Johnny say it out loud made it real, made it impossible to ignore. He wanted to ask, Do I wanna know? Did he really want to dive into this mess? Into whatever this was between them? It felt dangerous, but he couldn’t deny that it was what he had been wanting. Maybe for longer than he was willing to admit.

“I just…” Daniel took a deep breath, his voice soft and almost pleading. “I don’t know what to do, Johnny.”

Johnny stared at him, his expression unreadable. For a long moment, neither of them said anything. The weight of everything unsaid, everything they’d kept buried, hung between them like a thick fog. Then, slowly, Johnny leaned forward, his elbows resting on the table, his eyes locking onto Daniel’s with an intensity that made Daniel’s stomach flip.

“You wanna know what I think?” Johnny said, his voice dropping to a whisper. “I think we’ve been running from this for so long, we don’t even know how to stop. I think you’re scared, and I’m scared, and we’ve both been lying to ourselves for years.”

Daniel swallowed hard. Johnny’s words hit him like a punch to the gut because they were true. He had been running, had been lying to himself. And now, sitting here across from Johnny, he couldn’t run anymore.

Johnny’s eyes softened, and for the first time in what felt like forever, Daniel saw a vulnerability there that Johnny rarely let anyone see. “But the truth is, LaRusso, I don’t wanna keep pretending.”

The words hung in the air between them, charged with something electric, something Daniel had been too afraid to name for so long. He felt his heart hammering in his chest, his pulse quickening as he realized what Johnny was saying.

“I don’t either,” Daniel whispered, his voice barely audible. His eyes searched Johnny’s, and he could see it there—the same fear, the same want, the same longing that had been gnawing at him for so long.

Before Daniel could say anything else, Johnny leaned across the table, closing the distance between them. His hand found Daniel’s, their fingers brushing in a way that sent a jolt of electricity up Daniel’s spine. It was such a simple gesture, but it felt like a declaration, like the final step in a dance they’d been circling for years.

Daniel’s breath hitched as Johnny’s thumb grazed his knuckles, and for a moment, everything else fell away. There was no dojo, no rivalry, no years of history weighing them down. There was just this—just the two of them, finally acknowledging the truth they’d both been too afraid to admit.

“Do you want this?” Johnny asked softly, his voice barely a whisper.

Daniel met Johnny’s gaze, his heart pounding in his chest. “Yeah,” he breathed, his voice shaky but certain. “I want this.”

Without another word, Johnny leaned in, closing the distance between them until their lips met in a soft, tentative kiss. It wasn’t the heated, passionate moment Daniel had imagined a thousand times in the back of his mind. It was gentle, slow, filled with the weight of everything they hadn’t said, everything they had been running from.

And in that moment, Daniel knew that this was what he had been searching for, what he had wanted all along. The truth had been staring him in the face for so long, and now, finally, he wasn’t afraid to reach for it.

When they finally pulled back, their foreheads resting against each other, Johnny let out a shaky breath. “So, what now?”

Daniel smiled softly, his heart feeling lighter than it had in years. “Now?” he said, his voice filled with hope. “Now we stop running.”

And for the first time in a longtime, Daniel felt like he wasn’t running from himself anymore.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

The night air was cool as Daniel stood at the edge of the cliff, looking out over the city lights below. The twinkling skyline of the Valley stretched out in front of him, casting a reflection against the darkened horizon. It had been years since he had been up here—this secluded spot where he used to come to clear his head, back when everything felt like too much. Back when life was simpler but also far more complicated in a different way.

And tonight, everything was too much again.

His hands shook slightly as he pulled his jacket tighter around him, the chill of the air a welcome distraction from the weight in his chest. He hadn't meant to come here. His feet had carried him on autopilot, his mind too clouded to argue with the instinct that had brought him back to this familiar place.

But now that he was here, he couldn’t shake the memories. Every step he’d taken in his life, every choice that led him here, seemed to come crashing down around him, all at once.

"Reflections," he murmured to himself, the word feeling both too heavy and too light as it escaped his lips. It was like staring into a mirror he didn’t recognize, one that showed him all the parts of himself he had tried to forget.

Behind him, he heard the sound of a car pulling up, tires crunching against the gravel. He didn’t need to turn around to know who it was. The weight of Johnny’s presence pressed against him before the man even spoke.

"Should’ve figured I’d find you here," Johnny said, his voice cutting through the stillness of the night, tinged with both familiarity and exasperation.

Daniel didn’t respond right away. Instead, he just kept staring out at the lights, his thoughts too jumbled to even make sense of his own emotions. He wasn’t surprised that Johnny had come after him. They were too connected now, too deeply entwined to ever truly separate. But the storm brewing inside of Daniel made it hard to speak, hard to confront what was between them.

“What are you doing here, Johnny?” Daniel finally asked, his voice low and rough, like he’d been holding it in for too long.

“I could ask you the same thing,” Johnny replied, stepping closer until he was standing right beside Daniel, their shoulders almost brushing. “One minute we’re at the dojo, and the next, you take off like something’s chasing you.”

Daniel let out a dry laugh, the sound hollow. “Maybe something is.”

Johnny raised an eyebrow, glancing over at him. “Yeah? And what’s that?”

Daniel was silent for a moment, the wind tugging at his jacket, rustling the leaves of the nearby trees. He didn’t want to say it. Didn’t want to admit that the thing chasing him wasn’t some external force—it was him. It was his own reflection, the part of himself that he had kept buried, locked away for so long.

“I can’t… I can’t stop thinking about everything,” Daniel said quietly, his voice barely audible. “About us. About what we are, and what we’re not. And what we could’ve been if we hadn’t spent so many years hating each other.”

Johnny’s expression softened, and he let out a long sigh, his breath misting in the cold air. He ran a hand through his hair, looking out at the city below. “You really wanna dig all that up now?”

Daniel shook his head. “No. But it’s been digging me up, whether I want it to or not.”

Johnny was quiet, his gaze distant. He was no stranger to the ghosts of their past. They haunted him too, in different ways. Their history was messy—full of sharp edges, bruised egos, and moments they could never take back. And now, even though they had found some semblance of peace, there were still cracks. Cracks that Daniel couldn’t ignore, no matter how hard he tried.

“I’ve been thinking about it a lot lately,” Daniel continued, his voice strained with emotion. “How much time we wasted. All those years we spent fighting each other, when we could’ve been…” He trailed off, the words too difficult to finish.

Johnny’s jaw tightened, and he looked down at his feet. “What? We could’ve been what, Daniel?”

Daniel turned to face him, his heart pounding in his chest. “We could’ve been something more. We could’ve had this… whatever this is between us, instead of pretending it didn’t exist. Instead of pushing each other away.”

Johnny looked at him, his eyes narrowing as the weight of Daniel’s words settled between them. “You think I don’t know that?” he asked, his voice thick with frustration. “You think I haven’t thought about that every damn day?”

Daniel stared at him, surprised by the rawness in Johnny’s voice. He hadn’t expected this kind of honesty, this kind of vulnerability. He hadn’t expected Johnny to admit that he’d been thinking the same thing.

“Then why didn’t you say anything?” Daniel asked, his voice trembling. “Why didn’t we ever say anything?”

Johnny’s gaze faltered for a moment, and he looked away. “Because we’re idiots, Daniel. We were too stubborn, too angry. Too wrapped up in our own bullshit to realize what was right in front of us.”

Daniel swallowed hard, the weight of Johnny’s words hitting him like a punch to the gut. He nodded slowly, tears stinging at the corners of his eyes. “Yeah,” he whispered. “We were.”

They stood there for a long time, the silence between them heavy and charged with everything they’d never said. The wind picked up, biting at their skin, but neither of them moved.

Finally, Johnny turned to face him fully, his expression serious. “Do you regret it?”

Daniel blinked, startled by the question. “What?”

“Do you regret where we are now?” Johnny asked, his voice quiet but insistent. “Do you wish we could go back and change it all?”

Daniel’s throat tightened, and he shook his head slowly. “No,” he said, his voice hoarse. “I don’t regret where we are now. I just… I just wish we’d gotten here sooner.”

Johnny nodded, his face softening, though there was still a sadness in his eyes. “Yeah. Me too.”

For a moment, neither of them spoke, the gravity of what they were admitting settling in. They had wasted so much time—so many years spent tearing each other apart instead of being there for each other. And yet, here they were, standing together on the edge of something neither of them could fully define.

Daniel took a deep breath, trying to steady himself. “We can’t go back and change what happened,” he said quietly. “But we can… we can try to move forward.”

Johnny gave him a small, hesitant smile. “What does that look like, huh? Moving forward?”

Daniel met his gaze, his heart thudding in his chest. “I don’t know. But I think… I think it looks a lot like this. Like us, standing here, not running away from it anymore.”

Johnny stared at him for a moment, then nodded slowly, as if he was finally allowing himself to believe it. “Yeah. I think you’re right.”

Without another word, Johnny stepped closer, closing the gap between them. His hand found Daniel’s, their fingers lacing together like they had been waiting for this moment all along. The warmth of Johnny’s touch sent a shiver down Daniel’s spine, but this time, it wasn’t from fear or uncertainty. This time, it felt like coming home.

Daniel squeezed Johnny’s hand, his breath catching in his throat as they stood side by side, staring out at the city below. The reflections of the lights shimmered in the distance, flickering like memories of the past they could never quite escape.

But in this moment, none of that mattered.

Because they were here, together.

And that was all that mattered now.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

The low hum of the engine filled the silence inside the car, but it did nothing to drown out the noise in Daniel’s head. His fingers tightened around the steering wheel as he sped down the highway, his heart pounding in his chest, echoing the words of a song that had been looping in his mind for days.

Johnny Lawrence.

It always came back to Johnny.

Daniel had been driving for hours, the city lights fading into the distant horizon as he made his way out of town. He wasn’t even sure why he was doing this—why he’d decided to drop everything and get into his car, only to make his way toward the one person he swore he’d never let get under his skin again.

But he knew, deep down, that he wasn’t driving away from something. He was driving to someone.

The number “505” burned in his mind like a beacon, pulling him closer, pulling him back. That old, rundown motel where he and Johnny had met in secret more times than he cared to admit. It was a place filled with unspoken words, heated arguments, and passion that had both terrified and excited him.

He told himself he wasn’t going back to Johnny because of how things ended between them last time. He’d sworn he’d never make the same mistake again. But even as the miles flew by, he knew he was lying to himself.

Because with Johnny, it wasn’t that simple. It never had been.

The neon sign for the Desert Star Motel flickered in the distance, casting a faint glow over the empty parking lot. It wasn’t much, but it was theirs. The same room—number 505. Every time they had slipped away from their lives, from the complicated mess of who they were, they’d always found themselves back here. Together.

Daniel pulled into the lot and cut the engine, sitting in silence for a moment. The weight of everything he’d been avoiding hit him all at once. His breath caught in his throat as he leaned back against the seat, staring up at the dark sky.

He shouldn’t be here.

But he couldn’t stay away.

With a deep breath, he climbed out of the car and made his way toward the door. His heart was in his throat, beating erratically as he raised his hand to knock. It felt like hours before the door finally creaked open, revealing the last person Daniel thought he’d ever let back into his life.

Johnny stood there, disheveled and raw, his eyes widening in surprise at the sight of Daniel. He looked like he hadn’t slept in days, his hair tousled and his clothes rumpled. For a moment, neither of them said anything, the air between them thick with unspoken tension.

Daniel swallowed hard, his voice low and rough when he finally spoke. “I didn’t think you’d be here.”

Johnny’s mouth twitched, a flicker of something—regret, relief, or maybe even hope—crossing his features. “I wasn’t sure you’d come.”

Daniel clenched his jaw, trying to ignore the rush of emotions that flooded him just standing in front of Johnny. “Yeah, well… here I am.”

Johnny stepped aside, letting him in without a word. The room was exactly as Daniel remembered it—small, bare, and just as suffocating as it had always felt. But at the same time, it was comforting. It was the only place that had ever really felt like theirs.

He heard the door click shut behind him, the sound reverberating through the empty space. He could feel Johnny’s presence like a fire at his back, heating his skin, sending a tremor through his body. It had always been like this between them—intense, electric, and always on the verge of something explosive.

“I didn’t think you’d come back,” Johnny said quietly, his voice thick with something Daniel couldn’t place. Regret? Anger? Fear?

Daniel turned around slowly, his eyes locking onto Johnny’s. “Neither did I.”

Johnny let out a shaky breath, raking a hand through his hair. “So, why are you here?”

Daniel wished he had an answer, but the truth was, he didn’t know. Not really. All he knew was that ever since he and Johnny had fallen apart—ever since that last night, that last argument, the one that had ripped them both to shreds—he hadn’t been able to think of anything else. He hadn’t been able to get Johnny out of his mind.

“I don’t know,” Daniel admitted, his voice barely above a whisper. “I just… I couldn’t stay away.”

Johnny’s expression softened, and for a moment, Daniel saw the vulnerability in his eyes—the same vulnerability he had always tried to hide behind a wall of bravado and anger. It was the same look Johnny had given him the first time they’d kissed, the first time they’d crossed that line from rivalry into something deeper, something that had scared the hell out of both of them.

“You should have stayed away,” Johnny muttered, but there was no conviction in his voice. It was more like he was trying to convince himself.

Daniel took a step closer, his pulse quickening. “I couldn’t.”

The silence stretched between them, thick and heavy. Daniel could feel the weight of everything they hadn’t said pressing down on him, suffocating him. But he didn’t know how to break it, didn’t know how to fix what had been broken between them.

“Why now?” Johnny asked, his voice breaking the silence. “Why come back after all this time?”

Daniel hesitated, his throat tightening. The answer was on the tip of his tongue, but he didn’t know if he had the courage to say it.

“Because I missed you,” he finally admitted, the words tumbling out before he could stop them. “I haven’t been able to stop thinking about you, Johnny. About us.”

Johnny’s eyes widened, and for a moment, Daniel thought he might laugh or brush it off like he always did. But instead, Johnny just stared at him, his gaze piercing through the layers of anger and regret that had been building between them for so long.

“I missed you too,” Johnny said softly, and the raw honesty in his voice sent a jolt through Daniel’s chest.

The distance between them seemed to shrink, and before Daniel knew what he was doing, he was closing the space between them, his hand reaching out to grab Johnny’s. The moment their fingers touched, it was like a spark igniting in the darkness.

“Johnny, I—” Daniel started, but the words caught in his throat as Johnny’s hand tightened around his.

“Don’t,” Johnny whispered, stepping closer until there was barely an inch between them. “Don’t say anything. Just… stay.”

Daniel’s breath hitched, and he felt his heart racing in his chest. He knew he should turn around and walk away, that nothing good had ever come from this room, from their time together. But he couldn’t. Not now.

Not when everything he had ever wanted was standing right in front of him.

Without thinking, Daniel closed the gap between them, his lips crashing against Johnny’s in a kiss that was filled with every emotion they had been too afraid to say. It was messy, desperate, and filled with the kind of intensity that had always simmered between them.

Johnny responded instantly, his hands grabbing onto Daniel’s shirt, pulling him closer as if he was afraid to let go. The kiss deepened, filled with years of frustration, of wanting, of needing something they had both been too scared to admit.

When they finally pulled apart, both of them were breathing heavily, their foreheads resting against each other. Johnny’s hands were still tangled in Daniel’s shirt, and Daniel’s fingers were wrapped around Johnny’s wrist, holding on as if letting go would mean losing him all over again.

“Is this real?” Johnny whispered, his voice raw and shaky. “Are we really doing this?”

Daniel nodded, his chest tightening as he looked into Johnny’s eyes. “Yeah. We’re doing this.”

Johnny's lips quirked into a small, hesitant smile. “Good,” he whispered, his breath still heavy from their kiss, “because I don’t think I can keep doing this if it’s not real.”

Daniel’s chest clenched at the vulnerability in Johnny’s voice, the kind of openness he never allowed himself. In that moment, Daniel realized how much he had missed this — not just the heated kisses and stolen moments, but the depth of the connection they shared. The way Johnny could disarm him with a single look, or silence all of the doubts and fears that had been swirling in his head for so long.

Johnny had always been a force in his life. From their rivalry to whatever this was, the intensity between them was undeniable. But now, in the dim light of room 505, Daniel could see past Johnny’s bravado. He could see the man who had been there all along, hidden beneath years of anger and pride.

Daniel’s fingers lingered on Johnny’s cheek, feeling the warmth of his skin beneath his touch. “I don’t know where we go from here,” he admitted softly, his thumb brushing lightly over Johnny’s lips. “But I know I don’t want to keep pretending that none of this matters. That you don’t matter.”

Johnny’s blue eyes darkened, his expression serious as he leaned into Daniel’s touch. “You’re not the only one who’s been pretending,” he said, his voice barely above a whisper. “I’ve been doing it for years. Hell, I’ve been doing it my whole damn life.”

Daniel’s heart ached at the confession. He knew Johnny had been through hell — with his abusive stepfather, with the fallout of his failed relationships, and the weight of all the mistakes he felt he had made. But hearing it from Johnny’s own lips, seeing the pain etched on his face, made Daniel realize just how much Johnny had been carrying all alone.

“You don’t have to do that anymore,” Daniel murmured, his voice steady as he held Johnny’s gaze. “Not with me.”

Johnny’s lips parted as if to say something, but instead, he kissed Daniel again. This kiss was slower, softer — not fueled by the same desperation as before but by a shared understanding. An unspoken agreement that they both wanted this, even if they didn’t know how to define it.

When they pulled apart, Johnny rested his forehead against Daniel’s, their breaths mingling in the small space between them. “What happens now?” Johnny asked, his voice vulnerable in a way Daniel had never heard before.

Daniel let out a shaky breath, his mind racing with the weight of Johnny’s question. He didn’t have all the answers, but he knew one thing for certain — he wasn’t ready to let Johnny go. Not again.

“We figure it out,” Daniel said, his voice steady as he pulled Johnny closer, their bodies fitting together like two pieces of a puzzle. “One day at a time. We just… figure it out.”

Johnny nodded slowly, his hands sliding down to rest on Daniel’s hips, grounding them both. For the first time in a long time, they weren’t fighting or pushing each other away. They weren’t pretending that what they had was something they could walk away from. They were just there — together, in the stillness of the night, in the middle of a room that had held so many of their secrets.

Daniel pressed a kiss to Johnny’s temple, letting the weight of the moment sink in. This wasn’t the reunion he had planned, but it felt right. More right than anything had felt in a long time.

Johnny let out a quiet laugh, breaking the silence that had settled between them. “God, I’m such a mess,” he muttered, running a hand through his disheveled hair.

Daniel smiled softly, his fingers tracing patterns on Johnny’s back. “We both are,” he replied, his voice filled with affection. “But we’ll get through it.”

Johnny tilted his head, his gaze searching Daniel’s face. “You really think we can do this?”

Daniel nodded, his conviction unwavering. “Yeah. I do.”

For the first time since Daniel had stepped into room 505, Johnny’s face softened into something that looked like hope. It wasn’t a big smile or a grand gesture, but it was enough. Enough for Daniel to know that they were on the same page, that Johnny wanted this just as much as he did.

They stood there for a while longer, holding each other in the quiet of the room, letting the weight of the world fall away. For the first time in a long time, Daniel didn’t feel the need to run or hide. He didn’t feel the need to fix everything or figure out all the answers.

He just felt… at peace.

---

The morning light filtered through the thin curtains of the motel room, casting soft shadows on the bed where Daniel and Johnny lay together. The sheets were tangled between them, their bodies still intertwined from the night before.

It wasn’t perfect. There was still so much left unsaid, so much they had to figure out. But as Daniel watched Johnny’s chest rise and fall with each breath, he felt a sense of calm settle over him.

For the first time in years, they weren’t running. They weren’t fighting against what they felt or pretending it didn’t matter. They had stopped lying to themselves and each other.

Johnny stirred beside him, blinking groggily as he woke up to find Daniel watching him. A small smile tugged at the corner of his lips. “Morning.”

“Morning,” Daniel replied, his voice soft as he reached out to brush a strand of hair away from Johnny’s face.

Johnny’s eyes flickered with something Daniel couldn’t quite place — something tender and raw. “You’re still here.”

Daniel’s heart clenched at the vulnerability in Johnny’s voice. “Of course I am.”

Johnny let out a breath, his smile widening just a fraction. “Good.”

They stayed like that for a while, lying in the quiet of the morning, letting the weight of everything they’d been through settle around them. It wasn’t perfect, but it was theirs.

And for the first time in a long time, that was enough.

As the day began to break outside, Daniel knew they still had a long road ahead of them. There would be more fights, more moments of doubt, more times when it felt like they were back at square one. But they had made it through the worst of it.

They had found each other again.

And this time, Daniel wasn’t going to let Johnny slip away.

Not now. Not ever.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

The late afternoon sun bathed the living room of the LaRusso-Lawrence household in a soft golden glow. Daniel and Johnny sat together on the couch, their kids sprawled out on the floor in front of them—Robby, Sam, and Anthony. The kids were in one of their playful moods, teasing each other and throwing pillows, but today, they had one thing on their minds.

“Come on, tell us how you two met!” Sam demanded, her eyes bright with excitement. “The real story, not the bits and pieces we always hear.”

Anthony nodded eagerly, while Robby leaned back against the couch, smirking. “Yeah, Dad. You’re always talking about how much you hated each other, but then… somehow, we’re here, and you’re all happy and in love. We need details.”

Daniel chuckled, glancing at Johnny. “They’re not going to let it go, are they?”

Johnny smirked. “Nah, looks like we’re stuck with story time.” He leaned forward, looking at the kids with a mock-serious expression. “Alright, you punks. Get comfortable. It’s not exactly a fairy tale.”

Sam raised an eyebrow, intrigued. “Was it really that bad?”

Johnny let out a small laugh. “Worse. You’ve heard about the fights, right? Well, it was even worse than what you’re imagining. Your dad and I? We were mortal enemies.”

Daniel nodded, shifting slightly on the couch as he prepared to dive into their past. “Yeah, back in high school, it was intense. Johnny and I were on completely opposite sides of the karate world—Cobra Kai versus Miyagi-Do. I was the new kid, and your dad... well, he wasn't exactly welcoming.”

Johnny huffed, smirking again. “Not my finest moment. But hey, I was a different guy back then. My whole life was about winning, being the best. Then this guy,” Johnny nudged Daniel, “comes along and flips everything upside down.”

Robby chimed in with a knowing smile. “And then there was that tournament.”

“The All Valley,” Daniel said with a nostalgic grin. “I’m sure you guys know the story—Johnny and I faced off, and I pulled off the crane kick to win. That’s where everything seemed to end between us… at least, that’s what we thought at the time.”

“But it didn’t end there, did it?” Anthony asked, fully engaged now. “You two still fought later, right?”

Johnny leaned back on the couch, nodding. “Yeah, years went by, but when we ran into each other again, we picked up right where we left off. More fights, more grudges.”

“Yup, and not just between us,” Daniel added, looking pointedly at Robby and Sam. “You two had your own rivalries brewing. It was like the whole thing was starting all over again. Cobra Kai versus Miyagi-Do. Except this time, it wasn’t just about us—it was about you guys, too.”

Sam frowned, remembering those tough times. “I hated it back then. Everything was about fighting.”

“Me too,” Robby said quietly, glancing at his dads. “I didn’t think you’d ever stop hating each other.”

Johnny and Daniel exchanged a look, a silent understanding passing between them.

“Well,” Daniel said softly, “we almost didn’t. But something changed. We started to realize that all the fighting was tearing us—and everyone around us—apart. It wasn’t helping anyone. And then, one day, we just… talked.”

Johnny laughed lightly, shaking his head. “Yeah, after one last massive fight, if I remember right. We finally stopped punching each other long enough to have an actual conversation.”

Robby raised an eyebrow. “What made you change? What was the moment?”

Johnny’s eyes softened as he looked at Daniel. “You know, I don’t know if there was just one moment. But there was a point when I realized I was tired of holding onto all that hate. I’d spent so many years being angry—at Daniel, at life, at myself. But then I looked at everything we were losing because of it—our kids, our peace, our own happiness.”

Daniel smiled at Johnny, his hand subtly brushing his as he spoke. “And I realized the same thing. The grudges weren’t worth it anymore. We’d spent so much time fighting that we hadn’t even considered what we could build if we just… let go.”

Johnny grinned. “It didn’t happen overnight. But one day, I think we just stopped seeing each other as enemies and started seeing each other as… well, people.”

“People who had more in common than we thought,” Daniel added. “We both loved karate, we both wanted to be good fathers, and deep down, we both wanted a second chance at something better.”

Sam smiled. “So you started dating after that?”

Johnny rubbed the back of his neck, a playful grin on his face. “Yeah, kind of weird, huh? I don’t think either of us expected it, but the more time we spent together, the more we realized we actually liked each other. Really liked each other.”

Daniel chuckled, shaking his head. “It was a surprise for both of us, but once we figured it out, things just… clicked. It was like everything finally made sense.”

“And then?” Anthony asked, leaning forward eagerly. “When did you guys get married?”

Daniel smiled fondly. “It didn’t take long after that. We knew what we wanted. We wanted to build something new, something strong—not just for us, but for all of you.”

Johnny reached over and squeezed Daniel’s hand, his voice softer now. “We’ve been through a lot—more than most people. But we found our way through it. Together.”

The room fell quiet for a moment, the weight of Johnny’s words sinking in. Robby, Sam, and Anthony exchanged glances, clearly moved by the story. The path that had brought their parents together wasn’t easy—it was filled with pain, rivalry, and more than a few scars. But it had also brought them to this moment, where they were all together, a family in the truest sense.

Sam smiled, breaking the silence. “It’s kind of romantic, you know? How you went from hating each other to being in love.”

Johnny chuckled. “Yeah, ‘romantic’ isn’t exactly how I’d describe getting kicked in the face, but I’ll take it.”

Daniel laughed, turning to Johnny with a soft look in his eyes. “It’s been a wild ride, but I wouldn’t change a thing.”

Johnny leaned in and pressed a gentle kiss to Daniel’s lips, their fingers still intertwined. The kiss was brief but filled with warmth, a reminder of everything they had built together—the life, the love, the family they had created out of the ashes of their old rivalry.

“Gross,” Anthony muttered, though he was smiling.

Sam nudged him. “Oh, come on. It’s sweet.”

Robby, his expression thoughtful, nodded. “Yeah. I’m glad you two figured it out.”

Johnny ruffled Robby’s hair affectionately. “So are we, kid. So are we.”

As the sun continued to set outside, casting a golden glow over the room, the LaRusso-Lawrence family sat together, surrounded by the love and understanding that had brought them this far. It wasn’t a perfect story, but it was theirs—a story of enemies who became partners, of rivals who became lovers, and of two people who, despite everything, had found their way home.

Chapter Text

Hank McCoy had always preferred the quiet corners of the library to the bustling social scene of the Xavier College campus. His books, his research, his scientific pursuits—they were safe. They were predictable. And, more importantly, they were his. No one bothered him. No one cared. And, in return, Hank found contentment in the comfortable isolation of his own brilliance.

Which made it all the more surprising when Alex Summers, the campus bad boy and notorious rule-breaker, entered his life with all the subtlety of a tornado.

It started, like most disasters, with an explosion. Well, a metaphorical one.

Hank had been working on a particularly delicate chemistry experiment in one of the college labs, his nose buried deep in his notebook as he scribbled down notes, utterly lost in thought. He didn’t hear the door creak open behind him. Nor did he hear the muffled laughter of a group of students entering.

“What do you think, Summers?” one of them asked.

Hank’s ears pricked up, his pen freezing mid-sentence. Summers? Alex Summers? Why would someone like Alex be in the science building?

Before Hank could piece together the answer, a hand slapped down on the edge of his workstation, jolting him out of his thoughts. His beakers rattled dangerously.

“Hey, McCoy,” came a voice dripping with mockery.

Hank slowly turned his head, eyes narrowing as he adjusted his glasses. Alex Summers stood over him, his trademark smirk plastered on his annoyingly handsome face. He wore a leather jacket over a black T-shirt, looking every bit the rebel without a cause that Hank had always assumed him to be. The group of equally reckless friends loitered behind him, watching with thinly veiled amusement.

“Summers,” Hank replied curtly, hoping his disinterest would be enough to deter whatever this was.

“So, I hear you’re the smartest guy on campus. Thought I’d drop by and get some tutoring,” Alex said, leaning in far too close for comfort.

Hank could smell the faint scent of cigarette smoke clinging to his jacket and the sharp tang of aftershave. He wrinkled his nose and leaned back slightly, trying to put some distance between them.

“I’m busy,” Hank replied, returning his attention to his notes, hoping Alex would take the hint and leave.

“Busy, huh?” Alex straightened, looking around at the equipment. “With what? Your nerdy little science projects? Come on, McCoy, live a little. Life isn’t all about test tubes and equations.”

Hank ignored him. The experiment required precision, and Alex Summers was exactly the sort of variable that could derail everything. But Alex wasn’t finished.

“Or maybe you’re too scared to have a little fun?” Alex prodded.

That did it. Hank’s patience snapped. He glared up at Alex, his frustration spilling over.

“Fun? You think this is fun? Harassing me while I’m trying to work?” Hank spat, his voice uncharacteristically harsh. “Unlike you, some of us actually care about what we’re doing here.”

Alex’s smirk faltered for a moment, replaced by something Hank couldn’t quite place. But then, just as quickly, it was back.

“Lighten up, McCoy,” Alex said, his voice dripping with condescension. “It’s just a joke.”

Hank stood abruptly, shoving his chair back as he gathered his notes. He didn’t have time for this.

Unfortunately, his sudden movement knocked one of the beakers over, sending a cascade of liquid onto the workstation. The reaction was immediate—a small explosion of smoke and sparks that had everyone in the room coughing and scrambling for cover.

When the smoke cleared, Hank was glaring daggers at Alex, who was laughing so hard he was doubled over.

---

Two weeks of detention.

That’s what Hank McCoy got for “careless handling of dangerous chemicals,” as the dean had put it. Hank, furious, had tried to explain that it had been Alex and his friends who had caused the disturbance, but of course, Alex hadn’t been punished. He never was. His charming grin and carefree attitude had gotten him out of trouble yet again, leaving Hank to suffer the consequences.

And so, every day for the next two weeks, Hank found himself sitting in the small, dusty detention room, seething quietly as the minutes ticked by. To make matters worse, Alex Summers, in some cruel twist of fate, had also been assigned detention. Not for the lab incident, of course, but for some other rule-breaking escapade that Hank didn’t care to know about.

At first, they sat on opposite sides of the room, not speaking. Hank kept his head down, burying himself in his books, while Alex doodled lazily on a piece of paper or tossed a ball up in the air, catching it repeatedly.

But as the days passed, the silence became unbearable.

“So,” Alex finally said one day, breaking the tension. “You’re still mad, huh?”

Hank didn’t even look up from his book. “What gave it away?”

Alex chuckled. “Look, McCoy, it was just a prank. I didn’t mean for you to get in trouble.”

Hank closed his book with a snap, glaring at Alex. “A prank? You think ruining my experiment and getting me stuck in here is just a prank?”

Alex raised his hands defensively. “Okay, okay, maybe it wasn’t the best idea. But seriously, you need to relax.”

“Relax?” Hank repeated incredulously. “You’ve been nothing but a menace since you showed up here. You’re constantly breaking rules, and you think everything’s a joke. Well, some of us don’t have the luxury of coasting through life without consequences.”

Alex’s expression changed, and for a brief moment, Hank thought he saw a flicker of something—guilt, maybe? But it was gone as quickly as it had appeared, replaced once again by that infuriating smirk.

“You’re wound too tight, McCoy,” Alex said, leaning back in his chair. “Maybe that’s why you’re so miserable all the time.”

Hank scoffed. “I’m not miserable. I’m focused. There’s a difference.”

“Yeah? Well, from where I’m sitting, it sure looks like misery.”

Hank clenched his fists, trying to keep his temper in check. He didn’t know why Alex’s words were getting under his skin so much, but they were.

“Why do you even care?” Hank asked, his voice low. “Why do you care what I do or don’t do?”

Alex hesitated, his eyes flickering with something Hank couldn’t quite read. For a long moment, he didn’t answer. And then, unexpectedly, he leaned forward, resting his elbows on his knees as he looked directly at Hank.

“Maybe I care more than you think,” Alex said softly, the teasing edge gone from his voice.

Hank blinked, taken aback. He didn’t know what to say. Was Alex… being serious?

But before Hank could respond, the detention monitor called time, and Alex stood up, shoving his hands into his pockets as he walked out of the room without another word.

---

After that, things shifted between them.

Alex still teased Hank, but the edge was gone. The biting sarcasm had softened into something more playful, and Hank found himself responding in kind, despite his better judgment. He couldn’t explain it, but something about Alex’s easy confidence was starting to wear down his defenses.

And, to his surprise, Hank found himself enjoying their banter. Alex was sharp, much sharper than Hank had originally given him credit for, and their conversations, while often laced with teasing, had a depth that Hank hadn’t expected.

One afternoon, near the end of their detention sentence, Hank was sitting at his usual desk, scribbling down notes for a paper he was working on, when Alex slid into the chair beside him.

“Still working on that?” Alex asked, leaning in to peer at Hank’s notebook.

“Always,” Hank replied, his tone only half-irritated.

Alex smirked, but this time there was a warmth to it that made Hank’s stomach flip unexpectedly.

“You’re kind of amazing, you know that?” Alex said, his voice low.

Hank’s hand froze mid-sentence. He glanced over at Alex, eyebrows raised in disbelief.

“What?”

“I mean it,” Alex said, his eyes serious for once. “You’re crazy smart. And… I don’t know. You just… you do your own thing, and you don’t let anyone mess with that. It’s kinda cool.”

Hank’s heart thudded in his chest. He didn’t know how to respond to that. No one had ever complimented him like that before. Especially not someone like Alex.

“Thanks,” Hank muttered, feeling his cheeks heat up.

Alex smiled softly, and for a moment, the world seemed to still around them. Hank’s breath caught in his throat as he realized how close Alex was, their knees almost touching under the table.

And then, before Hank could second-guess himself, Alex reached out, his hand brushing Hank’s in the briefest of touches.

“I like you, McCoy,” Alex said quietly, his voice barely above a whisper.

Hank swallowed hard, his heart racing. He didn’t know what to say, didn’t know how to process the emotions swirling inside him. But when Alex leaned in, his lips brushing Hank’s in a soft, tentative kiss, Hank didn’t pull away.

Instead, he kissed him back.

---

The detention room became their refuge after that. Even after their sentence was over, they found themselves returning to it, stealing quiet moments together away from the eyes of the rest of the campus. The room, once a place of frustration and resentment, had turned into a sanctuary for something neither of them had expected: a connection that was as electric as it was unexpected.

Hank had never imagined that Alex Summers—the wild, rebellious rule-breaker—could be anything more than a nuisance. But with every stolen kiss, every whispered conversation, Hank was learning that there was more to Alex than met the eye.

It wasn’t always easy. They were from two different worlds, after all. Alex still had his friends, his parties, and his reputation to maintain. Hank still had his studies, his goals, and a reputation of his own to uphold. There were moments when Hank doubted whether this thing between them could ever truly last. They were too different. But then Alex would smile at him in that disarming way, or he’d brush Hank’s hand when no one was looking, and all the doubts would melt away.

One evening, long after the rest of the campus had gone quiet, they found themselves once again in the empty detention room. The only light came from the small desk lamp Hank had dragged over to his workspace. He was working on a new experiment, his fingers deftly moving through complex calculations, but his attention was divided. Alex was lounging in the chair next to him, absentmindedly flipping through one of Hank’s textbooks.

“I don’t know how you make sense of any of this,” Alex muttered, holding the book upside down.

“It’s really not that complicated once you understand the fundamentals,” Hank replied absentmindedly, his eyes scanning the notes in front of him.

Alex snorted, closing the book with a thud and tossing it onto the desk. He watched Hank for a moment, his gaze softening. There was something about the way Hank’s brow furrowed in concentration that Alex found oddly endearing.

“So,” Alex said after a long pause, “are we ever going to talk about this?”

Hank looked up, blinking in confusion. “Talk about what?”

“This,” Alex gestured between them, a faint smile tugging at the corner of his lips. “Whatever it is we’re doing.”

Hank set his pen down, leaning back in his chair as he studied Alex. It was a question Hank had been asking himself for weeks now. What were they doing? It had started with tension, with arguments and irritation, but somehow it had evolved into… this. This thing that was starting to feel dangerously close to something real.

“I don’t know,” Hank admitted, his voice quieter than he intended. “But I know I don’t want it to stop.”

Alex’s smile grew wider, the usual cockiness tempered with a softness that Hank was still getting used to. “Good, because I don’t want it to stop either.”

There was a vulnerability in Alex’s voice that Hank hadn’t heard before, and it sent a wave of warmth through him. He had always seen Alex as confident, untouchable, but here, in this quiet moment, there was something raw about him. Something real.

Alex stood up, moving closer until he was standing right in front of Hank. He placed his hands on the arms of Hank’s chair, leaning down until their faces were inches apart. Hank’s breath hitched, the familiar rush of nerves and excitement surging through him.

“I know we’re different,” Alex murmured, his eyes flicking down to Hank’s lips before meeting his gaze again. “But I like different.”

Hank’s lips parted, but before he could say anything, Alex kissed him again. It was slow, deliberate, and full of a tenderness that made Hank’s head spin. He reached up, his fingers tangling in Alex’s shirt, pulling him closer as the kiss deepened.

For the first time in a long time, Hank felt like he didn’t have to overthink anything. It didn’t matter that they came from different worlds or that they had started off on the wrong foot. All that mattered was this—this feeling of being wanted, of being seen.

When they finally pulled apart, Alex rested his forehead against Hank’s, their breaths mingling in the quiet space between them.

“I didn’t mean to get you in trouble,” Alex whispered, his voice laced with sincerity. “But I’m glad I did.”

Hank chuckled softly, the tension between them dissipating as he shook his head. “You’re impossible.”

“And you love it,” Alex teased, pressing a quick kiss to Hank’s temple.

Hank sighed, but there was a smile on his face as he leaned back in his chair, watching Alex settle into the seat next to him once again.

“Yeah,” Hank admitted, his voice soft. “I think I do.”

They sat in comfortable silence for a while after that, the quiet hum of the campus beyond the walls of their little sanctuary fading into the background. For the first time in weeks, Hank wasn’t thinking about the next assignment, the next project, or the next paper. All he could think about was the boy sitting beside him, the warmth of his presence, and the strange, wonderful way that life had of surprising him.

Hank McCoy had always been a man of logic, of facts and reason. But with Alex Summers, he was starting to realize that maybe, just maybe, some things didn’t need to be figured out. Some things were meant to be felt.

And in this moment, Hank was content to simply feel.

Chapter Text

The moment Johnny stepped into the hospital, he felt his heart drop. The sterile smell of disinfectant hit him hard, and the fluorescent lights seemed harsher than usual, making the whole situation feel surreal. Daniel had called him in a panic, his voice barely coherent, telling Johnny to come to the hospital. There had been an accident—a fight. Robby had kicked Miguel off the balcony at school. Sam was hurt.

It was a nightmare. Johnny’s hands shook as he rushed down the hallway, his mind swirling with guilt and anger. Robby... his own son. How could this have happened? How did everything spiral out of control so fast?

As Johnny rounded the corner, he spotted Daniel standing outside a hospital room, pacing anxiously. His face was pale, eyes red from crying, but as soon as he saw Johnny, his expression shifted—relief mixed with tension.

“Johnny,” Daniel breathed, walking toward him but stopping short. “I—I don’t know what to say. Robby… Miguel… Sam… everything’s—”

“I know,” Johnny cut in, his voice tight. “Where’s Robby? Where’s Miguel? Sam?”

Daniel gestured toward the room. “Sam’s in there. She’s… she’s hurt, but she’ll be okay. Miguel, though… they’re saying he might not walk again.” His voice cracked at the last sentence, and he ran a hand through his hair in frustration. “And Robby… he ran.”

Johnny’s stomach twisted. His son had done this. His son had put Miguel in the hospital, and Sam… Johnny clenched his fists, trying to keep himself from losing it completely.

“He ran?” Johnny echoed, his voice barely above a whisper. “Where? How could you let him run, Daniel?”

Daniel’s eyes flared with anger at that. “You think I let him run? You think I wasn’t trying to find him? I was busy trying to get Sam to the hospital, Johnny!”

“Well, maybe if you’d been keeping a better eye on him, none of this would’ve happened!” Johnny snapped, the tension between them boiling over.

Daniel’s face darkened, his fists clenching. “Oh, so now this is my fault? This is your son, Johnny! Your son kicked Miguel off that balcony! My daughter is lying in that hospital room right now because of all this!”

“That’s not fair, Daniel!” Johnny shot back. “You act like I wanted this to happen! You think I don’t care that Robby’s out there somewhere, probably scared out of his mind? You think I don’t care that Miguel is—” Johnny’s voice cracked, the weight of it all crashing down on him. He slumped back against the wall, burying his face in his hands. “This is all my fault.”

Daniel softened slightly at seeing Johnny break down, but his anger still simmered under the surface. “Johnny, this isn’t just about blame. Our kids are falling apart, and we’re supposed to be the ones keeping them together. But look at us—fighting while they’re all suffering.”

Just then, the door to Sam’s room creaked open, and there she was, standing in the doorway, looking far more fragile than either of them had ever seen her. Bandages covered her arm, and her face was bruised. Her eyes were red from crying, but more than that, there was a deep sadness in her gaze.

“Please stop,” Sam said, her voice barely above a whisper. “Please… I can’t take it.”

Johnny and Daniel both turned toward her, the guilt hitting them like a wave. They had been so caught up in their argument that they hadn’t even realized she was listening.

“Sam,” Daniel said softly, stepping forward, his heart breaking at the sight of her. “I’m sorry. We’re sorry.”

She shook her head, tears spilling down her cheeks. “I don’t care who’s at fault. I don’t care about any of that right now. Miguel is in the ICU. Robby is missing. And I’m hurt. But what hurts the most is watching you two fight like this when we need you.” Her voice trembled as she spoke, but she stood her ground, her words cutting deep. “We need you both. Please, just… stop fighting. We need you to be there for us.”

Johnny felt like the wind had been knocked out of him. He turned to Daniel, their earlier anger dissolving in the face of their daughter’s pain. Sam was right. This wasn’t about them. It was about their kids—about their family.

Daniel looked back at Johnny, his expression softening. “We’ll stop, Sam. I promise,” he said gently, stepping toward her and pulling her into a hug. Johnny moved closer, wrapping his arms around them both, feeling the tension between them start to melt away. This wasn’t about blame anymore. This was about healing, about being the parents their kids needed.

As they stood there, holding onto Sam, Anthony appeared down the hallway, his face pale, his small frame tense. He looked between his fathers, his expression a mixture of fear and confusion. “Is everyone… okay?”

Johnny broke away from the hug, motioning for Anthony to join them. “Come here, kid,” he said softly, pulling him into their circle. “We’re going to be okay. We’ll get through this. All of us.”

As the four of them stood there in the hospital hallway, holding onto each other, Johnny knew that they had a long road ahead. There was so much to fix—so much to heal—but for now, they had each other.

Later that night, after the kids had settled down, Johnny and Daniel found themselves sitting outside on a bench just outside the hospital, the weight of everything still hanging in the air. The cool night breeze ruffled their hair, and for the first time since the fight, they sat in silence, reflecting on the damage that had been done.

“I shouldn’t have said those things,” Johnny finally admitted, his voice quiet, almost hesitant. “I was just… angry, scared. I didn’t know how to handle it.”

Daniel sighed, running a hand through his hair. “I was angry too. We both said things we didn’t mean. But what Sam said… she’s right. We need to be a team right now, Johnny. They need us. All of them.”

Johnny nodded, his heart heavy. “I know. I just… I don’t know how to fix this. Miguel, Robby, Sam… they’re all hurting, and it feels like we’re losing control.”

“We can’t lose control,” Daniel said, his voice firm. “We have to be strong for them. We’ll find Robby. We’ll help Miguel heal. And we’ll be there for Sam. But we have to do it together.”

Johnny glanced over at him, and for the first time that night, he felt a sense of peace settle over him. Daniel was right. They couldn’t do this alone, but together… together they could face anything.

Without thinking, Johnny reached out and took Daniel’s hand, lacing their fingers together. It was a simple gesture, but in that moment, it spoke volumes. They were in this together, no matter what.

Daniel turned to him, a soft smile tugging at his lips despite the exhaustion written all over his face. “We’ll get through this,” he whispered.

Johnny nodded, leaning in closer. “Yeah. We will.”

And then, as if drawn together by some invisible force, their lips met in a gentle kiss. It wasn’t rushed or desperate, but rather a quiet reassurance—a promise that no matter how hard things got, they would face it together.

When they pulled back, Johnny rested his forehead against Daniel’s, their breaths mingling in the cool night air.

“I love you,” Johnny whispered, his voice thick with emotion. “And I’m not going anywhere.”

“I love you too,” Daniel replied, squeezing Johnny’s hand. “We’re going to be okay. All of us.”

And in that moment, sitting outside the hospital with the weight of the world on their shoulders, they both knew that as long as they had each other, they could face anything. Together.

Chapter Text

The sun dipped below the horizon, casting a warm golden light over the small colonial town of Willow Creek. The air was thick with the scent of blooming lilacs and freshly baked bread. It was a peaceful evening, yet for Daniel LaRusso, peace felt like a distant memory. He stood at the window of his modest home, watching the shadows stretch across the street as he contemplated his choices.

Daniel was married to Amanda, a woman of grace and beauty, but his heart ached for someone else. The memory of Johnny Lawrence lingered in his mind like an unshakeable ghost. They had known each other since childhood, their families intertwined in the tapestry of their lives. Johnny was everything Daniel wanted to be: bold, confident, and unafraid to take risks. But there was a dark undercurrent to their relationship, one that Daniel had ignored for too long.

The two had spent countless nights together, their laughter echoing through the empty streets. But those innocent moments had evolved into something more intoxicating. The first time they kissed, it had felt like the world around them had disappeared. And with each passing day, Daniel found it harder to resist the pull of his feelings for Johnny.

The weight of his marriage hung heavy on him, but the thrill of being with Johnny was intoxicating. They had been meeting secretly, their trysts fueled by the adrenaline of being caught. Daniel knew it was wrong, but the passion between them ignited something within him he had long since buried.

---

One fateful evening, Daniel and Johnny met at a secluded cabin in the woods, far from prying eyes. The moon hung high in the sky, casting a silver glow that illuminated their surroundings. Inside, the air was charged with tension as they faced each other, the weight of their decisions pressing down on them.

“I shouldn’t be here,” Daniel murmured, his voice barely above a whisper.

“Why not? We’ve wanted this for so long,” Johnny replied, stepping closer. The heat radiating from Johnny’s body sent shivers down Daniel’s spine.

“I have a wife, Johnny. I can’t just abandon that,” Daniel said, though the conviction in his voice wavered.

“Can you really call it living if you’re not happy?” Johnny challenged, his blue eyes piercing through Daniel’s defenses.

As if on cue, their lips crashed together in a heated kiss, the world outside fading away. They lost themselves in each other, the guilt and shame momentarily forgotten. But as the night wore on, reality began to seep back in, tainting their bliss.

Daniel pulled away, panting, a mix of exhilaration and fear swirling within him. “What if someone finds out? What if Amanda—”

“Let her find out!” Johnny interjected, his frustration bubbling to the surface. “You can’t keep living a lie, Daniel!”

“I’m not living a lie! I love my wife,” Daniel protested, though the words felt hollow.

“Then why are you here with me?” Johnny asked, his voice lowering to a softer tone. “You know how this feels. You know it’s real.”

As Daniel looked into Johnny’s eyes, he felt the truth hit him like a wave. The connection they shared was undeniable, and he found himself swept up in the moment again.

“I shouldn’t…” he murmured, but Johnny kissed him again, silencing his objections. The night turned into a whirlwind of passion, and for a few blissful hours, Daniel forgot the world outside.

---

Days turned into weeks, and the secret affair continued. Daniel lived in a constant state of anxiety, torn between his love for Johnny and his obligation to Amanda. He found himself lying to his wife, crafting elaborate excuses to cover his absences. The guilt gnawed at him, but the thrill of being with Johnny outweighed his fears.

But secrets have a way of surfacing.

One afternoon, as Daniel left the market, he bumped into Shannon, Johnny’s girlfriend. She was a sharp-witted woman with a knack for getting what she wanted. Daniel had always seen her as an obstacle, a reminder of the life he had chosen.

“Daniel,” she greeted him with a sly smile, her eyes narrowing as she took in his nervous demeanour. “Fancy running into you here.”

“Shannon,” he replied, forcing a smile. “How are you?”

“Better now that I’ve found you,” she said, stepping closer. “I’ve heard some interesting rumours about you and Johnny.”

Daniel’s heart raced as he felt the ground beneath him shift. “What do you mean?”

“Oh, come now. You know how small this town is,” she said, her tone dripping with false sweetness. “People talk. And I’ve heard that you two have been getting a bit… close.”

Panic flooded Daniel’s veins. “That’s not true,” he lied, but the tremor in his voice betrayed him.

“Isn’t it?” Shannon continued, her smile turning sinister. “Because if it were true, it would be a shame if Amanda found out, wouldn’t it?”

“Are you threatening me?” Daniel demanded, though the tremor in his voice revealed his fear.

“Consider it a friendly warning,” she said, tilting her head slightly. “I could go to her, tell her everything. But I’m willing to keep this quiet. For a price.”

“What do you want?” he asked, his voice barely above a whisper.

“Let’s just say I could use a little extra cash. A hundred dollars should do. And I’ll keep my mouth shut.”

Daniel felt the walls closing in around him. He had never intended for any of this to happen, and now the very thing he feared most was within reach. “I can’t… I can’t give you that.”

Shannon stepped closer, her eyes glinting with satisfaction. “You have two choices, Daniel. Pay me, or watch your entire life crumble. Think about it.”

As she walked away, Daniel felt the weight of the world settle on his shoulders. He couldn’t let Amanda find out. He couldn’t let the love he shared with Johnny be destroyed. But the price for that secrecy was steep.

---

Daniel returned home that evening, his heart heavy with guilt and fear. Amanda was in the kitchen, humming to herself as she prepared dinner. The aroma of herbs and spices filled the air, a stark contrast to the turmoil inside him.

“Hey, honey! How was your day?” Amanda asked, her eyes sparkling with warmth.

“Um, it was fine,” he replied, forcing a smile as he joined her at the counter. “Just the usual market run.”

“Good! I was thinking we could have a nice dinner tonight. Maybe invite some friends over?” she suggested, her voice brightening.

“Sounds great,” Daniel said, though his mind was racing with thoughts of Shannon’s threat. How could he keep this from Amanda? How could he protect the life they had built together?

As dinner progressed, Daniel forced himself to engage in light conversation, but he couldn’t shake the feeling of dread gnawing at him. The laughter that once filled their home now felt hollow, a facade hiding the truth that threatened to shatter everything.

Later that night, after Amanda had gone to bed, Daniel sat alone in the dark, his mind racing. He knew he had to pay Shannon, but the thought of handing over money felt like a betrayal. He couldn’t bear the idea of living a lie any longer.

He grabbed a quill and parchment, his heart pounding as he began to write. It was a letter to Johnny, an explanation of everything that had happened. But just as he was finishing, a knock echoed through the silence.

“Daniel?” Amanda’s voice broke through the night. “Is everything okay?”

Panic surged through him as he quickly hid the letter, shoving it into the desk drawer. “Yeah, everything’s fine!” he called back, forcing his voice to remain steady.

The door creaked open, and Amanda stepped inside, her brow furrowed with concern. “You’ve been acting strange lately. Are you sure you’re alright?”

“I’m just tired,” he replied, avoiding her gaze. “Long day, that’s all.”

She nodded, but he could see the doubt in her eyes. “If you ever need to talk, you know I’m here for you.”

“I know,” he said softly, his heart aching as he thought of the secrets he was keeping.

As she left, Daniel felt the weight of his choices crushing him. He had to pay Shannon, or everything would come crashing down.

---

The following day, Daniel met Shannon at a small inn on the edge of town, his heart racing with anxiety. The inn was dimly lit, and the atmosphere felt oppressive, the walls closing in around him. He found her seated in a corner, her expression smug as he approached.

“Daniel,” she greeted, her voice laced with amusement. “I was wondering if you’d come through.”

He slid the money across the table, his stomach churning as he did so. “Just promise me you won’t tell Amanda.”

“Of course not,” Shannon replied, her smile widening as she pocketed the cash. “You know I’m a woman of my word.”

Daniel felt a wave of relief wash over him, but it was short-lived. The knowledge that he had just paid to keep his secret made him feel dirty. He turned to leave, but Shannon’s voice stopped him.

“By the way, I heard some interesting news about Johnny,” she said casually.

“What do you mean?” Daniel asked, his heart sinking.

“I saw him with another woman. Looks like he’s moved on,” she said casually, her eyes sparkling with mischief.

Daniel felt the world tilt beneath him. “What? Who?”

“Some blonde at the market. I didn’t catch her name, but they looked rather cosy together,” Shannon teased, clearly enjoying his discomfort.

Daniel's heart raced, a rush of anger and betrayal coursing through him. “That can’t be true,” he said, though doubt crept into his mind. Was Johnny truly moving on?

“Can’t blame him, can you?” Shannon said, leaning back in her chair. “With how you’ve been treating him, I doubt he’s just waiting around for you to figure yourself out.”

Daniel clenched his fists, the pressure of the situation rising within him. “This isn’t about him,” he snapped. “This is about you blackmailing me.”

“Touchy subject, huh?” Shannon replied with a smirk, unfazed. “I’m just stating the facts, Daniel. You’ve chosen your wife, and Johnny will find someone who appreciates him. Just like I’ve chosen my path.”

With that, Shannon waved him off, leaving Daniel standing there, seething with rage and heartbreak. He stormed out of the inn, feeling as if he were suffocating in the weight of his choices. The thought of Johnny being with someone else twisted the knife in his heart. Had he really let things go that far?

---

The following days were agonizing for Daniel. He couldn’t shake the image of Johnny with another woman from his mind. The tension between him and Amanda grew as Daniel withdrew further into himself, barely able to mask his despair.

One evening, he returned home later than usual. Amanda noticed his distant demeanor, her concern palpable. “Daniel, please talk to me,” she urged. “You’re not yourself lately.”

“I’m fine,” he lied, avoiding her gaze as he moved past her toward their bedroom.

“Fine isn’t how you usually are. This isn’t like you,” Amanda pressed, her eyes searching his face for answers. “If something’s wrong, you need to tell me.”

Daniel’s heart sank. How could he explain what was really going on? “I just need some time,” he replied, hoping she would let it go. But the unease in the air only intensified.

That night, unable to sleep, Daniel slipped out of bed and decided to confront Johnny. He needed answers. He found Johnny at their usual meeting place—the cabin in the woods, their sanctuary that had turned into a place of turmoil.

As he approached, he felt a mixture of hope and dread. The moonlight filtered through the trees, illuminating Johnny’s figure as he leaned against the wall of the cabin, lost in thought.

“Daniel,” Johnny said, straightening up as Daniel stepped closer. “I was starting to think you weren’t coming.”

Daniel paused, the hurt he felt boiling to the surface. “I had to see you. I heard… I heard you were with someone else,” he said, trying to keep his voice steady.

Johnny’s expression shifted, confusion flickering across his face. “What? That’s ridiculous. Who told you that?”

“Shannon,” Daniel spat, his anger bubbling over. “She said she saw you with another woman. Is it true?”

“Daniel, I would never—” Johnny began, but Daniel interrupted.

“Are you still in love with her?” he demanded, his heart racing.

Johnny’s eyes widened, hurt flashing across his features. “No! It’s over between us. I thought you understood that.”

Daniel stepped back, the weight of his actions crashing down on him. “I don’t understand anything anymore! I thought we had something real, but now it feels like it’s all slipping away.”

“I don’t want to lose you, Daniel,” Johnny said, his voice low and pleading. “But this—this situation is tearing us apart. You have to make a choice.”

“Choice? You think this is easy for me?” Daniel shot back, his emotions spilling over. “I’m married! I can’t just walk away from that.”

“Then why did you come here?” Johnny asked, frustration creeping into his tone. “Why are we even doing this if you can’t be honest with yourself?”

“I was trying to be honest!” Daniel retorted, his heart pounding. “I’ve been caught in a lie ever since I started this with you. And now Shannon is blackmailing me! I can’t lose everything over this… this sin!”

Johnny stepped forward, anger flaring in his eyes. “It’s not a sin to love someone, Daniel! You need to decide if you want to be with me or not.”

“You don’t understand!” Daniel yelled, tears spilling down his cheeks. “This isn’t just about us anymore!”

As the tension hung thick in the air, Daniel’s voice cracked under the weight of his emotions. “I can’t… I can’t do this,” he whispered, turning away from Johnny, the pain of the moment cutting deeper than he could have imagined.

---

Daniel spent the following days in turmoil, his heart a battleground of guilt and longing. Amanda sensed his distress, her concern deepening, but Daniel found himself unable to confide in her. The thought of losing everything he had built with her weighed heavily on his conscience, yet the void left by Johnny was unbearable.

One evening, after a particularly tense dinner, Daniel was seated alone in the parlor, staring into the fireplace. The flames flickered like his emotions, dancing between love and regret. Just then, Amanda entered, her expression softening as she approached him.

“Daniel,” she began gently, “I know something’s bothering you. Please let me in.”

He hesitated, the words forming in his throat but refusing to come out. “I… I’m just overwhelmed,” he finally admitted, his heart pounding.

“Overwhelmed by what? Is it something at work?” she asked, her voice filled with concern.

“Something like that,” he replied evasively, not ready to shatter her world with the truth.

Amanda sat beside him, placing a comforting hand on his. “You know you can trust me with anything, right? I love you.”

The sincerity in her words made his heart ache further. How could he betray the love they had built? But the memories of Johnny’s kisses, of their stolen moments together, haunted him.

“Daniel, please,” she urged, squeezing his hand gently. “I want to help you. You don’t have to go through this alone.”

Torn between his love for Amanda and his undeniable connection with Johnny, Daniel felt the weight of his choices crashing down around him. He wanted to be honest, but fear held him captive. Instead, he pulled away, unable to meet her gaze.

“I just need some time to think,” he said, his voice barely above a whisper.

---

Days turned into an agonizing blur, and the shadows of secrets loomed larger than ever. Daniel’s heart ached with the knowledge that he was about to lose both Amanda and Johnny. The guilt consumed him, and every interaction with Amanda felt like a betrayal.

Finally, Daniel decided he could no longer let the situation fester. He had to confront Johnny one last time. As he made his way to the cabin, his heart raced with a mix of anticipation and dread.

When he arrived, Johnny was already there, waiting. He looked up, his expression hardening as their eyes met.

“Daniel,” Johnny said, his voice tinged with irritation. “I thought you weren’t coming back.”

“I couldn’t stay away,” Daniel admitted, his heart pounding in his chest. “We need to talk.”

“Talk about what? About how you can’t decide if you want to be with me or your wife?” Johnny’s frustration spilled over. “I’m tired of being your secret!”

“I’m tired too!” Daniel yelled back, the weight of their predicament crashing down on him. “I didn’t ask for this! I didn’t want to hurt anyone, but I can’t keep lying to myself.”

Johnny stepped closer, anger and desperation mingling in his gaze. “Then what do you want, Daniel? Tell me. What do you want?”

“I want you!” Daniel shouted, the truth bursting forth with a fury he hadn’t expected. “But I can’t throw my life away. I can’t just abandon Amanda!”

“So what? You’d rather stay in a loveless marriage than face what we have?” Johnny shot back, his voice raw. “You’re breaking my heart, Daniel.”

“I didn’t want this to happen!” Daniel cried, his emotions spiraling out of control. “I love you, but I have responsibilities! I can’t just walk away from everything.”

Johnny’s expression softened, hurt flashing across his features. “You think this is easy for me? You think I wanted to fall for someone who’s already tied down?”

“No, I didn’t mean it like that,” Daniel said, his voice faltering as he stepped back, conflicted. “But I can’t be the reason you get hurt, Johnny.”

“Then what do we do?” Johnny asked, his voice barely above a whisper. “Because I can’t keep living in this limbo.”

Daniel hesitated, feeling the weight of his heart’s desire clash with his reality. “I don’t know,” he finally admitted, tears spilling down his cheeks.

Johnny’s gaze hardened again, pain evident in his eyes. “Then maybe you should go back to your wife and pretend this never happened.”

“Don’t say that!” Daniel pleaded, desperation creeping into his voice. “You know it’s not that simple. I care about you too much to just walk away.”

Johnny shook his head, anguish etched across his features. “Caring isn’t enough, Daniel! You’re not living for yourself. You’re living for everyone else but you.” His voice cracked with emotion, and Daniel felt his heart break at the sight of Johnny’s pain.

“I never wanted to hurt you,” Daniel whispered, stepping closer in an attempt to bridge the distance between them. “But I can’t bear the thought of destroying Amanda’s life. She deserves better than this.”

“Then what about me?” Johnny shot back, his voice rising. “What do I deserve? To be someone’s dirty little secret? You’ve been hiding me like I’m something to be ashamed of. I’m not ashamed of you, Daniel!”

Daniel opened his mouth to respond, but no words came. He felt trapped between the two worlds he had built—the life with Amanda that offered stability and the passionate connection with Johnny that made him feel alive.

“I don’t want to be second best,” Johnny continued, his voice low but filled with intensity. “If you can’t choose me, then maybe it’s time to let me go.”

“No!” Daniel exclaimed, reaching out to grab Johnny’s arm. “I don’t want to lose you. I love you!”

“But you love her too!” Johnny replied bitterly, shaking off Daniel’s grasp. “You can’t have both, Daniel. I won’t be the reason your entire life falls apart. If you can’t commit to me, then I’m done.”

“No, don’t say that! Please,” Daniel pleaded, desperation flooding his voice. “I need time to figure this out. I didn’t mean for any of this to happen.”

“I can’t wait forever,” Johnny said, his tone somber, retreating from Daniel’s grasp. “I deserve someone who chooses me.”

As the weight of Johnny’s words settled in the air between them, Daniel felt as if the ground had shifted beneath his feet. Johnny was right; he had to make a choice. But could he truly let go of the love he felt for Johnny?

“What do you want me to say?” Daniel asked, anguish twisting in his gut. “That I’ll leave my wife? That I’ll abandon everything I’ve built?”

“I want you to say what you mean. If you want me, then fight for me!” Johnny’s voice rose with a mixture of anger and frustration. “Show me you want this. Don’t let fear dictate your life!”

“Fight for you?” Daniel echoed, his heart racing. “I’m terrified, Johnny! What if I choose wrong?”

“Then at least you’ll have made a choice, instead of running from it,” Johnny replied, his tone softening. “I can’t keep waiting for you to come to terms with your feelings. You have to decide who you want to be.”

Tears streamed down Daniel’s face as he faced the reality of their situation. “I don’t want to hurt you, but I can’t stand the thought of losing my family either.”

Johnny’s expression softened as he took a step closer. “Then you need to make a choice. But if you choose her, don’t come back to me. I won’t be your second option.”

Daniel’s heart ached at the truth of those words. He had been living a lie, trying to balance his love for Johnny and his obligations to Amanda. But the time for indecision was over.

“Johnny,” he said, voice trembling with emotion. “I can’t imagine my life without you, but I can’t just throw everything away without knowing what I truly want.”

“Then you need to figure it out,” Johnny replied, his voice soft but firm. “I can’t do this anymore, Daniel. Not like this.”

With those words, Johnny turned and walked away, leaving Daniel standing alone in the moonlight. The silence of the night enveloped him as the weight of his choices settled heavy on his shoulders.

---

Days turned into weeks, and the distance between Daniel and Johnny became a chasm too wide to bridge. The pain of their separation gnawed at Daniel, but the guilt of his marriage held him captive. Amanda remained blissfully unaware, her love for him unwavering, but Daniel’s heart was torn in two.

The rift between him and Amanda grew, her concern evident in the way she looked at him. “Daniel, please talk to me,” she urged one evening, her voice thick with worry. “You’ve been so distant lately. I just want to know what’s going on in your heart.”

Daniel felt suffocated by the weight of her expectations. He wanted to confide in her, to explain everything, but the fear of losing her paralyzed him. Instead, he gave her the same old excuses, telling her it was work-related stress.

As he lay in bed next to her, he felt more alone than ever. He had made his choice, but the heartache of being without Johnny tormented him day and night. The memory of their kisses haunted him, each one a reminder of what he had sacrificed.

But the truth was that Daniel could no longer deny what was at stake. The love he felt for Johnny was a force he couldn’t ignore, no matter how hard he tried. Yet, he couldn’t bring himself to confront Amanda about the reality of his heart.

One night, as he stared at the ceiling, he received a knock on the door. Amanda entered, her expression serious. “Daniel, I need you to be honest with me. Are you seeing someone else?”

The question hit him like a punch to the gut. “No, of course not!” he lied, though the words tasted bitter in his mouth.

“Daniel, I can see it in your eyes. You’re hiding something,” she insisted, stepping closer. “You can’t keep shutting me out. I love you too much for that.”

“Nothing is happening,” he repeated, his voice shaky. “I swear.”

She looked at him, disappointment etched in her features. “I just want you to be happy. If there’s something you need to tell me, please do.”

Daniel’s heart raced, the weight of his secret threatening to crush him. But the thought of Amanda’s heartbreak was too much to bear. Instead, he pulled her into an embrace, hiding his pain behind a mask of comfort.

“I’m fine, I promise,” he whispered, though he knew it was a lie.

---

As the days passed, the chasm between Daniel and Johnny only widened. The tension grew unbearable, and Daniel felt the walls closing in around him. He missed Johnny’s laughter, the warmth of his presence, and the passion they shared.

It was during this time that he received a letter from Johnny, delivered by a mutual friend. As he opened it, he felt a mix of dread and longing.

Daniel, it read,

I can’t keep doing this. I can’t pretend that everything is fine between us when it’s clearly not. I need to move on with my life, and I hope you can find happiness, whatever that looks like for you. If you want to reach out, I’ll be at the old cabin for one last time.

Daniel’s heart shattered at the thought of losing Johnny for good. He knew he had to confront his feelings, but fear held him back. The thought of stepping away from Amanda and everything they had built felt impossible.

As the sun began to set, Daniel made his way to the cabin, every step heavy with the weight of his decision. When he arrived, Johnny was already there, leaning against the wall, looking lost in thought.

“Daniel,” Johnny said, his voice strained as their eyes met. “I didn’t think you’d come.”

“I had to,” Daniel replied, his heart racing. “I can’t lose you, Johnny.”

“Then why have you?” Johnny challenged, his tone sharp. “You’ve kept me at arm’s length for too long. If you really wanted to be with me, you would have made a choice by now.”

Daniel took a deep breath, the reality of the moment crashing over him. “I know. I’ve been scared. Scared of hurting Amanda, scared of what people will say… but I can’t keep pretending.”

Johnny stepped closer, his expression softening. “You need to choose. But I can’t wait for you forever.”

“I want you, Johnny. I do,” Daniel admitted, tears welling in his eyes. “But I can’t bear the thought of destroying Amanda’s life. She deserves better than this.”

“And what do you deserve, Daniel?” Johnny asked, hurt flashing across his face. “You think sacrificing your happiness is what she wants? You think living a lie is any better?”

“No,” Daniel said, feeling the weight of those words settle heavily on his heart. “But I don’t know how to tell her. I don’t want to break her heart.”

“Then you need to figure it out,” Johnny replied, his voice firm but filled with pain. “I can’t be your second choice. You have to decide what you want.”

“I know,” Daniel whispered, the realization crashing over him. “I love you, but I can’t keep living this way.”

“Then you need to tell her,” Johnny urged, his expression serious. “You owe it to both of you to be honest. If you can’t be with me openly, then it’s time for us to say goodbye.”

Daniel’s heart shattered at the thought. “Johnny…”

“Please,” Johnny said, his voice breaking. “I want you to be happy, Daniel. But I can’t keep waiting in the shadows while you live a lie.”

Daniel’s heart raced, each beat echoing the pain of their situation. “You don’t understand,” he said, his voice thick with emotion. “I can’t just throw away my life. Amanda and I have built something together.”

“Built something or just maintained an illusion?” Johnny shot back, his frustration evident. “You’re wasting both of your lives pretending everything is okay when it’s not.”

“I don’t want to hurt her,” Daniel whispered, his voice faltering as he felt tears well in his eyes.

“Then you’re going to hurt yourself,” Johnny replied, his expression softening. “Look, I know it’s hard. I didn’t want to fall in love with you knowing you were married. But this isn’t just a fling for me, Daniel. I love you. I always have.”

Daniel felt a rush of warmth at Johnny’s confession, but it was quickly overshadowed by the guilt weighing on his shoulders. “I love you too, but what do I do? I can’t just walk away from everything I’ve ever known.”

“Then you need to make a choice,” Johnny said firmly. “You can either stay with her and live a life that’s not really yours, or you can come to me and start living for yourself. But you can’t keep dragging me along.”

Daniel’s heart twisted in agony. He felt trapped between two worlds—one of obligation and one of passion. “What if I choose wrong?” he asked, the fear of regret gripping him.

“Then you’ll know you chose for yourself,” Johnny replied softly. “You’ll never know what could have been if you don’t take the chance.”

Daniel looked into Johnny’s eyes, searching for answers, and found only the reflection of his own turmoil. He could feel the gravity of the decision ahead, and it terrified him. What if he lost everything?

“Johnny…” Daniel began, his voice barely above a whisper. “I don’t want to lose you.”

“Then fight for me,” Johnny said, his eyes pleading. “Tell me you want to be with me. I’m tired of being your secret. You’re not the only one who’s scared.”

Daniel felt the tears spill over, his heart aching at Johnny’s vulnerability. “I do want to be with you,” he confessed, his voice breaking. “I just don’t know how to make that happen without destroying everything else.”

“Maybe it’s time to be brave, Daniel,” Johnny urged, taking a step closer. “You deserve happiness too. You don’t have to bear this burden alone.”

“But how?” Daniel asked, desperation creeping into his voice. “How do I tell her that I don’t love her the way I used to? That I’m in love with you?”

“By being honest,” Johnny replied. “You owe it to her to tell her the truth. It will hurt, but it’s better than living a lie.”

Daniel’s heart raced as the weight of those words sank in. “I know you’re right, but I’m scared.”

“I am too,” Johnny admitted, his voice trembling. “But we can’t live in the shadows forever. You need to choose who you want to be, Daniel. For yourself. Not for anyone else.”

The silence stretched between them, filled with the tension of unspoken truths. Finally, Daniel nodded, determination rising within him. “You’re right. I’ll tell her. I’ll do it.”

Johnny’s expression softened, a flicker of hope igniting in his eyes. “You won’t regret it, Daniel. I promise.”

“Just… give me some time,” Daniel said, his heart racing. “I need to prepare myself for what I have to say.”

“Take all the time you need,” Johnny replied gently. “Just don’t wait too long. I can’t stand the thought of losing you, but I also can’t wait forever.”

With that, they shared a bittersweet embrace, both knowing that change was coming. Daniel stepped back, his heart heavy but resolute. As he walked away from the cabin, he felt a mix of fear and determination coursing through him.

---

The following days were torturous for Daniel. He could barely focus on anything other than the looming confrontation with Amanda. Each moment felt like an eternity, the weight of his secret heavy on his heart.

Finally, the day came. Daniel could feel the tension in the air as he sat across from Amanda at their dinner table. The usual comfort of their shared meals felt foreign, and his heart raced with anticipation and dread.

“Daniel,” Amanda began, her voice trembling slightly. “You’ve been so distant lately. Is there something you’re not telling me?”

Daniel took a deep breath, his heart pounding as he searched for the right words. “Amanda, there’s something I need to talk to you about.”

She looked at him with concern, her eyes searching his face. “What is it? You can tell me anything.”

He felt the weight of her expectations pressing down on him, and for a moment, he hesitated. How could he do this? How could he break her heart?

“Amanda,” he said finally, his voice shaking. “I love you, but I haven’t been honest with you. I’ve been seeing someone else.”

Her expression shifted from concern to shock, her eyes widening. “What? Who? How long has this been going on?”

Daniel felt the tears well in his eyes. “It’s Johnny. I didn’t mean for it to happen, but I fell in love with him.”

The silence that followed was deafening. Amanda’s face fell, a mixture of hurt and disbelief etched across her features. “You… fell in love with him?” she echoed, her voice trembling.

“I never wanted to hurt you,” Daniel pleaded, feeling the weight of his betrayal crush him. “I’m so sorry. I didn’t plan for this to happen. I’ve been torn between my feelings for you and him, and I can’t keep living a lie.”

“You love him?” Amanda repeated, her voice choked with emotion. “And you’ve been lying to me this entire time?”

“Yes,” he admitted, his heart aching as he watched her face crumple in pain. “I never wanted to betray you, but I can’t deny my feelings anymore.”

“I can’t believe this,” she said, tears streaming down her cheeks. “After everything we’ve built together… you throw it all away for him?”

Daniel’s heart shattered at the sight of her pain. “I never wanted to throw anything away. I just… I can’t pretend anymore.”

Amanda looked at him, her eyes filled with a mix of betrayal and sadness. “So, what happens now? You’re just going to walk away from our life together?”

“I don’t want to walk away, but I can’t keep living in a marriage that isn’t real,” he said, his voice breaking. “You deserve someone who can love you fully, and I can’t be that person anymore.”

The hurt in her eyes cut deeper than any physical wound. “So this is it? You choose him over me?”

“No! It’s not that simple!” Daniel cried, desperate to explain. “I didn’t mean for any of this to happen, but I can’t ignore my feelings. I need to be honest with myself and with you.”

Amanda shook her head, disbelief etched on her face. “I trusted you, Daniel. I thought we had a real marriage, but you’ve been lying to me the entire time.”

“I'm so sorry,” he said, tears spilling down his cheeks. “I never wanted to hurt you. You have to know that.”

But as he watched her crumble before him, he realized that it was too late. The damage was done, and there was no way to undo the hurt he had caused.

“I need time,” Amanda said, her voice shaking as she stood up from the table. “I can’t… I can’t do this right now.”

“Please don’t go,” Daniel pleaded, reaching for her hand, but she pulled away.

“I can’t look at you right now,” she said, her voice breaking. “Just leave me alone.”

With that, she stormed out of the room, leaving Daniel standing alone in the silence, the weight of his choices crashing down around him.

---

The days that followed were filled with an unbearable heaviness. Daniel felt the weight of his decision settle over him, pressing down with the realization that he had chosen to be honest at a devastating cost.

Amanda had distanced herself, their home filled with an uncomfortable silence. Daniel moved through the motions of life, but each day felt like a battle against the guilt and heartache he carried.

He tried to reach out to Johnny, but every message felt inadequate. How could he explain the pain he was causing Amanda while still longing for Johnny’s presence? He missed the warmth of their connection, the laughter and intimacy they had shared.

Finally, he found himself at the old cabin once more, hoping to find solace in the memories they had created together. As he approached, he saw Johnny sitting outside, staring into the distance.

“Daniel,” Johnny said, his voice flat as Daniel approached.

“Hey,” Daniel replied, his heart racing. “I wanted to talk.”

Johnny looked up, his eyes betraying a mixture of hurt and longing. “How did it go?”

“I told her,” Daniel said, his voice trembling. “I told her everything.”

“And?” Johnny asked, his expression serious.

“She’s hurt, Johnny. I never wanted to cause her pain, but I couldn’t keep lying to myself or her any longer.” Daniel’s voice broke, the weight of his guilt pressing down on him.

Johnny looked at him with a mix of sympathy and sorrow. “What did she say?”

“She… she was devastated. I don’t think she ever saw it coming. I can’t blame her; I deceived her. I didn’t just lose you, I lost everything. Our marriage, our life…” Daniel’s voice faltered as tears spilled from his eyes. “I hurt her, and now I feel like I’ve lost a part of myself in the process.”

Johnny reached out, placing a comforting hand on Daniel’s shoulder. “You did the right thing by being honest. It might not feel that way now, but you’ll never be free if you continue to live a lie. And you deserve to live your truth.”

Daniel nodded, but the guilt was suffocating. “I keep thinking about everything we built together. She trusted me. I don’t know how to move forward from this.”

Johnny’s eyes softened, the hurt still lingering beneath his concern. “You’ve chosen a difficult path, Daniel. But you’ve also chosen love, and that’s a powerful thing. We can figure this out together, but you have to be willing to let go of the past.”

“I want to be with you, Johnny. I do,” Daniel admitted, the words spilling out in a rush. “But everything feels so broken right now. I don’t want to come to you with all this baggage.”

“I want you as you are,” Johnny said firmly. “Not as someone who has to be perfect or have it all figured out. Just be honest with me. Be honest with yourself.”

Daniel inhaled deeply, feeling a flicker of hope amidst the darkness. “You’re right. I need to let go of the guilt, of the past. But it’s so hard.”

“Let it be hard,” Johnny replied softly. “You’re allowed to feel all of this. But don’t let it stop you from pursuing what you truly want.”

As Daniel looked into Johnny’s eyes, he felt the familiar warmth that had drawn him to him in the first place. The love they shared still flickered, waiting for the chance to reignite fully. “I want that,” Daniel whispered. “I want us.”

With the heaviness still lingering in his heart, he stepped closer to Johnny, who reached out and pulled him into a tight embrace. They stood together in the silence, letting the weight of their emotions wash over them, both knowing that they had a long road ahead.

---

Days turned into weeks, and as Daniel tried to navigate the aftermath of his confession, he felt the boundaries of his old life slowly eroding. Amanda had moved in with a friend, leaving Daniel in the quiet house they once shared. The absence of her presence felt like an echo of his guilt, a constant reminder of the pain he had caused.

He spent more time with Johnny, but the shadow of his broken marriage loomed large. They would share stolen moments of laughter and intimacy, yet there was always an unspoken weight in the air.

“Are you okay?” Johnny asked one night as they sat by the fire, the flames casting flickering shadows across their faces. Daniel was lost in thought, staring into the flames, the memories of his life with Amanda haunting him.

“I don’t know,” he admitted, the words tasting bitter on his tongue. “I feel like I’m in limbo. I’m trying to move forward, but the guilt won’t let me.”

Johnny took a deep breath, his expression serious. “You have to find a way to forgive yourself, Daniel. You made a choice to follow your heart, and that’s not something to feel ashamed of.”

“But it hurt her,” Daniel replied, guilt gnawing at him. “I keep thinking about her pain, and it makes me question everything.”

“Her pain is valid, but it’s not yours to carry alone,” Johnny said gently. “You can’t help her heal if you’re still stuck in the past. You deserve to be happy too.”

Daniel nodded slowly, contemplating Johnny’s words. “I know. I just wish things could have turned out differently.”

“Things rarely go as we plan,” Johnny replied with a sad smile. “But what matters is how we move forward. It’s time for you to reclaim your life.”

Daniel felt a wave of emotion wash over him. He wanted to reclaim his life, to live authentically and without regret. “I’m ready,” he said finally, determination growing within him. “I need to speak to Amanda. I need to let her know I understand her pain, and I want to help her heal. I don’t want to leave her in the dark.”

“Then do it,” Johnny urged, his eyes filled with encouragement. “You owe it to both of you to have that conversation.”

---

The next day, Daniel found himself standing outside Amanda’s temporary home, his heart pounding in his chest. He had rehearsed this conversation in his mind a thousand times, but nothing could prepare him for the reality of facing her again.

Taking a deep breath, he knocked on the door, and after a moment, Amanda opened it, her eyes widening in surprise. “Daniel,” she said, her voice barely above a whisper. “What are you doing here?”

“I wanted to talk,” he said, his voice trembling. “Can I come in?”

She hesitated for a moment, but then stepped aside, allowing him entry. The air was thick with tension, memories of happier times flooding back as he stepped into the small living room.

“I’m… I’m sorry for everything,” he began, struggling to find the right words. “I know I’ve hurt you deeply, and I never wanted to betray your trust.”

Amanda crossed her arms, her expression guarded. “You hurt me in a way I didn’t think was possible, Daniel. I thought we were happy.”

“We were,” he said, feeling the weight of her words. “But I wasn’t being honest with myself or with you. I fell in love with Johnny, and I didn’t know how to deal with those feelings.”

Her eyes flashed with anger, but beneath it lay a deep sadness. “So, you just threw away everything we had for him?”

“No! I didn’t throw it away,” Daniel pleaded. “I was terrified of losing you. I didn’t know how to navigate my feelings, and instead of facing them, I hid behind lies. I realize now that was selfish.”

Amanda looked away, tears brimming in her eyes. “Do you love him?”

“I do,” Daniel admitted, the truth spilling from his lips. “But that doesn’t mean I don’t care about you. You deserve to know how I feel, and I want to help you heal from this. I don’t want to abandon you in your pain.”

The silence hung heavy between them as she processed his words. “What do you want from me?” she finally asked, her voice trembling.

“I want to support you,” Daniel said earnestly. “I know I can’t change what’s happened, but I want to help you move forward. You deserve happiness, Amanda, even if it’s not with me.”

Amanda shook her head, her expression conflicted. “It’s hard to imagine a life without you. We had plans, dreams… and now they’re shattered.”

“I know,” Daniel said, his heart breaking for her. “But you’re strong, Amanda. You’ll find your way. You deserve someone who can love you fully, without hesitation. I want you to find that.”

Her tears flowed freely now, and Daniel felt a surge of sorrow for the pain he had caused. “You think I can just move on?” she asked, her voice cracking. “After everything we’ve been through?”

“No, I don’t think it’s easy,” Daniel said gently. “But you have to take the time to heal. You deserve that. I want you to be happy, even if it’s not with me.”

“I don’t know if I can forgive you,” she said, her voice filled with hurt. “You’ve broken my heart.”

“I understand,” Daniel replied, tears brimming in his eyes. “I don’t expect forgiveness right away. I just wanted you to know the truth. You deserved that much.”

Amanda wiped her tears, taking a deep breath. “It’s going to take time, Daniel. I need to process all of this.”

“I know,” he said, feeling a mix of relief and heartache. “I’ll give you space. I just wanted you to know that I’ll always care about you.”

With that, he stepped back, the air between them thick with unresolved emotions. Amanda nodded, her expression filled with sadness. “I need time to think.”

Daniel turned to leave, but a part of him felt like he was leaving a piece of his heart behind. He knew their relationship would never be the same, but he hoped Amanda could find happiness again.

---

In the weeks that followed, Amanda and Daniel began to navigate their new reality. They spoke less frequently, but there was an unspoken understanding that hung in the air. Each conversation felt like a tentative step toward healing.

Daniel spent more time with Johnny, but their relationship was also fraught with uncertainty. There were moments of joy, but there was also the lingering pain of his past decisions. They would share intimate evenings, but the shadow of guilt always lingered.

“Have you spoken to Amanda?” Johnny asked one night as they sat by the fire, the warmth of the flames contrasting the chill in the air.

“Yeah,” Daniel replied, his voice heavy with emotion. “We talked. It was hard, but I think it was necessary. She’s hurting, but I told her I want her to find happiness, even if it’s not with me.”

Johnny nodded, his expression a mix of concern and admiration. “That took a lot of courage, Daniel. I’m proud of you for being honest.”

“I just wish I could take back the pain I caused,” Daniel said, staring into the flickering flames. “It’s like I’ve shattered a beautiful vase, and no matter how much I try to put it back together, it will never be the same.”

“Maybe not the same,” Johnny replied, reaching out to take Daniel’s hand, “but it can still be beautiful in its own way. You can’t erase the past, but you can learn from it and grow.”

Daniel felt a swell of emotion at Johnny’s words. “You always know what to say to make me feel better,” he said softly.

“Because I care about you, Daniel. I want you to be okay. I want us to be okay,” Johnny replied, squeezing his hand.

Daniel looked into Johnny’s eyes, feeling a deep connection that transcended the chaos of their lives. “I want that too,” he admitted. “I want to build something real with you.”

“But you also need to give yourself the grace to heal,” Johnny said gently. “It’s okay to feel conflicted. You’re navigating a lot right now.”

“Sometimes I wonder if I made the right choice,” Daniel confessed, his heart heavy with doubt. “What if I could have worked things out with Amanda?”

“Only you can answer that,” Johnny said thoughtfully. “But remember, staying in a situation that doesn’t make you happy isn’t fair to either of you. You chose to be honest, and that’s a powerful step toward finding your truth.”

Daniel felt a flicker of hope amidst his uncertainty. “You’re right. I need to focus on what I want and how to rebuild my life.”

“That’s it,” Johnny encouraged. “And you don’t have to do it alone. I’m here for you, every step of the way.”

With that, Daniel leaned in, capturing Johnny’s lips in a soft kiss that spoke of the love and longing that had built between them. The kiss deepened, igniting a warmth that felt both comforting and exhilarating. In that moment, all the pain and confusion faded away, leaving only the promise of new beginnings.

---

As the weeks turned into months, Daniel began to reclaim his life. He focused on his work and the passion that had initially driven him—his auto dealership, and his love for cars. He immersed himself in projects, pouring his heart into his work, using it as a therapeutic outlet to distract himself from the chaos.

He and Johnny grew closer, their relationship blossoming amidst the remnants of his past. They spent weekends exploring the countryside, taking long drives along winding roads, laughing and sharing their dreams for the future. Johnny’s presence was a balm to Daniel’s soul, and with each passing day, he felt a sense of hope returning to his life.

One evening, as they sat under the stars on Johnny’s porch, Daniel turned to Johnny, a serious expression on his face. “I want to talk about us.”

Johnny’s brow furrowed, concern flashing in his eyes. “What’s on your mind?”

“I know we’ve been taking it slow, and I appreciate that. But I want you to know that I’m ready for more. I want to build a future with you,” Daniel said, his heart racing.

A smile broke across Johnny’s face, relief flooding his features. “You have no idea how much that means to me. I’ve wanted the same thing, but I didn’t want to rush you.”

Daniel took a deep breath, his heart swelling with affection. “I don’t want to rush it either, but I don’t want to hide anymore. I want to be open about our relationship.”

“Then let’s take that step together,” Johnny said, his voice steady. “We’ll figure it out as we go.”

Daniel felt a sense of weight lift from his shoulders, a spark of excitement igniting within him. “I want to tell the world about us, to stop hiding in the shadows.”

“Then let’s do it,” Johnny replied, his eyes sparkling with determination. “We’ll face whatever comes our way, together.”

As they shared another kiss, Daniel felt an overwhelming sense of peace wash over him. For the first time in a long time, he felt free, ready to embrace a future filled with love and possibilities.

---

But despite the hope blooming in his heart, Daniel knew he couldn’t ignore his past entirely. He needed to have one more conversation—this time with Amanda.

After a few weeks of quiet reflection, Daniel finally decided to reach out. He called Amanda and asked if they could meet, knowing it was time to properly address their unresolved feelings.

They agreed to meet at a café, a neutral ground where they could talk without the weight of their shared home looming over them. When Daniel arrived, he found Amanda seated at a small table, her expression cautious yet curious.

“Hey,” he said softly, taking a seat across from her.

“Hi,” she replied, her tone guarded. “Thanks for meeting me.”

“Of course. I wanted to check in on you,” Daniel said, his heart racing. “I know things have been difficult.”

“They have,” Amanda admitted, her eyes darting away for a moment before returning to him. “But I’ve been trying to process everything. It’s been hard to see you with him.”

Daniel nodded, understanding the pain that lingered. “I can’t imagine how difficult that must be. I’ve felt so guilty about it.”

“You should,” Amanda replied, her voice firm but not unkind. “You hurt me, Daniel. I thought I knew you. I thought you loved me.”

“I do love you, Amanda,” he said earnestly. “You were my partner for so long, and I will always care about you. But I wasn’t being honest with myself or with you. I was living in fear of my feelings, and it wasn’t fair to either of us.”

She sighed, her expression softening slightly. “It’s just hard to let go of what we had. We had plans, dreams. I thought we were happy.”

“I know,” Daniel said, feeling the sting of her words. “I thought we were too. But the truth is, I was only pretending. I needed to be honest, and I needed to face what I was feeling.”

Amanda looked down at her hands, her expression conflicted. “It feels like everything I thought I knew about our marriage was a lie.”

“It wasn’t a lie at the start,” Daniel said, his voice thick with emotion. “We had something beautiful, but I lost myself along the way. And for that, I’m deeply sorry.”

She met his gaze, her eyes filled with hurt and understanding. “I don’t know how to move on from this, Daniel. It’s going to take time.”

“I understand,” he replied, his heart aching for her. “And I want to help you however I can. You deserve to heal from this. I never wanted to hurt you.”

“Maybe we just need to take a step back,” Amanda said thoughtfully. “Maybe we need to focus on ourselves for a while before we can really figure out what this means.”

“Yeah, I think that’s a good idea,” Daniel agreed. “I want you to find happiness again, Amanda. I truly do.”

As their conversation continued, Daniel felt a sense of closure beginning to wash over him. It was painful, but necessary. They both had to acknowledge the hurt and the love they once shared before they could truly move on.

---

In the weeks following his conversation with Amanda, Daniel found himself in a state of renewal. He focused on his work, threw himself into his passions, and continued to grow closer to Johnny.

They went on small adventures together, exploring the vibrant world around them. Each outing brought them closer, building a foundation of trust and love that felt like a lifeline for both of them.

One night, as they lay beneath the stars, Daniel turned to Johnny, his heart full. “You’ve changed my life in ways I can’t express.”

Johnny smiled, brushing his fingers over Daniel’s cheek. “You’ve changed mine too. I never imagined I could find love like this after everything.”

“I was scared,” Daniel admitted. “I thought I’d lose everything by following my heart. But now, I see that it’s possible to rebuild and grow.”

“Of course, it is,” Johnny said softly. “And you did it with strength. You faced your fears and chose love, and that takes incredible courage.”

Daniel took a deep breath, looking up at the stars. “I want to be the best version of myself for you, for us.”

“And you are,” Johnny replied, his eyes shining with sincerity. “We’ll keep working on this together. It’s all about progress, not perfection.”

As they lay together under the vast sky, Daniel felt a sense of peace settle within him. He was no longer trapped in the shadows of his past but moving forward toward a bright and hopeful future.

---

As the seasons changed, so did Daniel’s life. He found himself in a better place, having worked through the heartache and guilt of his past. He and Amanda had maintained a respectful distance, but they also checked in occasionally, sharing small moments of kindness and understanding.

In time, Amanda found a new path, discovering new interests and hobbies that brought her joy. She even started dating again, slowly learning to navigate the complexities of her own heart. Though their relationship had changed irreparably, Daniel felt a sense of relief knowing she was moving forward.

Daniel and Johnny’s bond deepened as well. They embraced the complexities of their relationship, allowing their love to flourish without the weight of secrecy. Together, they ventured into their shared passions, including classic cars and exploring the beauty of the countryside.

One sunny afternoon, as they stood in the garage surrounded by a few vintage cars, Daniel looked at Johnny, a grin spreading across his face. “Can you believe how far we’ve come?”

Johnny chuckled, wiping his hands on a rag. “Honestly? It feels like a dream sometimes. You took a leap of faith, and it’s paid off.”

“Thanks for sticking by me through all of it,” Daniel said, sincerity lacing his words. “I couldn’t have done it without you.”

“I meant what I said,” Johnny replied, stepping closer, his expression earnest. “I’m not going anywhere. You and I, we’re in this together.”

Daniel felt a warmth swell in his chest. “I really love you, Johnny. I want to keep building this life together.”

Johnny smiled, a glimmer of hope in his eyes. “Then let’s make it happen. We’ll face whatever comes our way.”

They embraced, and Daniel felt a rush of happiness envelop him. The darkness of his past seemed to fade into the background as he leaned into the warmth of Johnny’s arms. With every passing day, he was reminded of the strength that love could bring.

---

A few months later, Daniel invited Johnny to join him for a special event: a charity auction showcasing classic cars. It was the perfect opportunity to celebrate their love and introduce Johnny to the community, all while doing something meaningful.

As they arrived at the venue, Daniel felt a mix of excitement and nerves. He had spent weeks preparing for this moment, hoping to create a space where he and Johnny could openly celebrate their relationship.

“Are you ready?” Johnny asked, sensing Daniel’s apprehension.

“I think so,” Daniel replied, taking a deep breath. “It’s just… this is a big step for us.”

“Just be yourself. They’ll see how incredible you are,” Johnny encouraged, giving Daniel’s hand a reassuring squeeze.

As they entered the bustling venue, Daniel could feel eyes on them. The atmosphere was filled with laughter and chatter, but Daniel’s heart raced with anticipation. He spotted familiar faces, friends and acquaintances who had supported him through his journey.

Once they settled at a table, Daniel spotted Amanda across the room. She was laughing with a group of friends, her smile radiant and genuine. A wave of pride surged within him as he saw how she had begun to thrive in her own right.

“Hey, there’s Amanda,” Daniel said, nodding in her direction.

Johnny followed his gaze and smiled. “She looks happy.”

“She really does,” Daniel replied, feeling a warmth spread through him. “I’m glad she’s finding her footing again.”

As the auction began, Daniel and Johnny shared in the excitement, bidding on a few items and enjoying the festivities. With each passing moment, Daniel felt the weight of his past lifting, replaced by a sense of belonging.

Midway through the event, Daniel excused himself to grab a drink. As he maneuvered through the crowd, he spotted Amanda standing alone, a contemplative look on her face. Gathering his courage, he approached her.

“Hey, Amanda,” he said, his voice friendly.

“Daniel,” she replied, her expression softening. “I didn’t expect to see you here.”

“I wanted to support the charity,” he said, glancing around. “It’s a good cause. Plus, it felt like a good opportunity to introduce Johnny to everyone.”

Amanda nodded, her gaze thoughtful. “I’m glad you’re doing well. You seem… happy.”

“I am,” he admitted. “Johnny’s been incredible. I really appreciate how you’ve been handling everything too.”

“Thank you,” she said, her smile genuine. “It’s taken time, but I’m starting to find my way again. I’m seeing someone, actually.”

Daniel’s heart lifted at her words. “That’s great to hear! You deserve happiness, Amanda.”

“I hope you both find what you’re looking for,” she said, her voice sincere. “It’s good to see you embracing your truth.”

“Thanks, Amanda. I really appreciate that,” Daniel replied, feeling a wave of gratitude. “We’ve both been through so much, but I believe we’re both on the right paths.”

With that, they shared a moment of understanding, a quiet acknowledgment of their shared history and the choices they had made. They had both suffered, but they were also healing and growing.

---

Returning to Johnny’s side, Daniel felt a renewed sense of purpose. They shared the rest of the evening together, laughing and enjoying each other’s company. The crowd swirled around them, but in each other’s presence, they found a sense of safety and belonging.

As the night wore on, the auction culminated in excitement, and Daniel found himself drawn to a beautiful vintage car—a classic Mustang that reminded him of carefree days spent with friends. He raised his paddle, feeling a surge of adrenaline as he bid alongside others, and to his delight, he won the bid.

“That’s quite the car,” Johnny said, his eyes sparkling with admiration. “It suits you perfectly.”

“Thanks!” Daniel beamed. “I can’t wait to take you for a ride in it.”

As the event came to a close, Daniel stood by the car, feeling a sense of accomplishment wash over him. He had faced his past, embraced his truth, and built a new life filled with love and joy.

Johnny stepped up beside him, wrapping an arm around Daniel’s waist. “What’s next for us?” he asked, a playful glint in his eye.

“I was thinking we should plan a road trip,” Daniel said, his excitement bubbling over. “Just the two of us. No destination, just open roads and adventure.”

“I love that idea,” Johnny replied, his smile infectious. “Let’s make it happen.”

As they stood together, gazing at the stars above, Daniel felt a sense of peace settle within him. He had been through heartache and confusion, but he had also found love in the most unexpected place.

With Johnny by his side, Daniel knew he could face anything that life threw at them. They would continue to navigate the complexities of their relationship together, and he was ready for whatever the future held.

“Here’s to new beginnings,” Daniel said, raising an imaginary toast.

“To new beginnings,” Johnny echoed, pulling Daniel close for a kiss.

As they embraced under the starlit sky, Daniel felt the weight of the past finally lift. He was free to love, to dream, and to build a future—one filled with love, adventure, and the promise of endless possibilities. And for the first time in a long time, he felt truly at peace.

---

Months passed, and Daniel and Johnny continued to explore life together, taking that road trip and visiting places that filled their souls with joy. They traveled to mountains and beaches, creating memories that would last a lifetime.

Daniel eventually reached a place of forgiveness regarding his past with Amanda, and while they didn’t communicate frequently, they had reached a cordial understanding. She had found happiness and a new sense of self, and Daniel was grateful to have her in his life, even from a distance.

In a quiet moment one evening, Daniel looked over at Johnny as they watched the sunset. “I never thought I could be this happy again,” he said softly, his heart full.

Johnny smiled, his expression tender. “You deserve all the happiness in the world. And I’m so glad I get to be part of your journey.”

As the sun dipped below the horizon, casting a warm glow around them, Daniel leaned in to kiss Johnny, their hearts intertwined in a dance of love and renewal. They had both faced their demons, but together, they had forged a path filled with hope and endless possibilities.

In the end, it wasn’t just about the choices they had made, but the love they had nurtured amidst the chaos. Together, they had found a way to embrace their truth, and that truth was beautiful.

And as they stood side by side, the world around them filled with laughter and love, Daniel knew that this was just the beginning of their adventure—one filled with promise, resilience, and an unwavering bond that would stand the test of time.

Chapter Text

The bar was dimly lit, the smell of stale beer and cigarette smoke lingering in the air as Johnny Lawrence nursed his drink at the counter. It was a Thursday night, one of those midweek stretches where the bar wasn’t too crowded, but the regulars were there—people looking to forget about life for a few hours. Johnny fit right in, drowning out his frustrations with a whiskey in hand, his mind running on autopilot.

He had lost count of how many times he had come to this bar since Cobra Kai had disbanded, and since his life had taken a downward spiral. It was familiar, at least. He liked familiar. No surprises, just whiskey, and time to forget.

But tonight, the universe had other plans.

The door to the bar creaked open, and Johnny felt the change in the air before he even turned to look. He didn’t need to. The voice that reached his ears sent an immediate surge of irritation through him, a voice he hadn’t heard in years, but would recognize anywhere.

“Larusso?” Johnny muttered under his breath, setting his drink down harder than he meant to.

Sure enough, Daniel LaRusso stepped inside, his eyes scanning the room, oblivious to Johnny’s presence at first. He looked older, sharper, his signature cocky attitude still lingering in the way he walked. The guy had moved on—made something of himself after high school. Meanwhile, Johnny was stuck, trapped in the wreckage of what used to be his life.

Johnny thought about ignoring him, about slipping out before Daniel noticed. But fate had a funny way of throwing people together.

Daniel’s gaze landed on Johnny, and his face immediately soured. “You’ve got to be kidding me,” Daniel said as he walked closer, eyes narrowing. “Johnny Lawrence. Of all the bars in L.A., you pick this one?”

Johnny scoffed, sitting up straighter on his barstool. “What? You own this place now too, LaRusso?”

Daniel’s jaw tightened. “No, but I didn’t think I’d have to deal with you tonight.”

“Well, surprise. You’re not the only one who likes a drink after a long day.”

“Yeah, well, looks like you’ve had a few too many,” Daniel muttered, nodding toward Johnny’s half-empty glass. “Don’t you have somewhere else to be?”

Johnny bristled at the jab, but bit back the retort that was on the tip of his tongue. Instead, he turned back to his drink, choosing to ignore Daniel altogether.

But Daniel wasn’t done. He slid onto the barstool next to Johnny, much to Johnny’s annoyance. “What? No comeback? That’s not like you, Lawrence. You’ve always got something to say.”

“Yeah, well, maybe I’ve got better things to do than argue with you,” Johnny muttered, glaring at the glass in front of him.

Daniel scoffed. “Better things to do? Right. Like what? Sulk and drink until you forget about all the crap in your life?”

That did it. Johnny’s temper flared, and before he knew it, he had turned sharply in his seat, his eyes blazing as he faced Daniel. “You don’t know a damn thing about my life, LaRusso, so why don’t you shut the hell up?”

“Oh, I know enough,” Daniel shot back, his voice low but heated. “I know you’ve been living in the past ever since high school. I know you’re still angry about things that happened over ten years ago. And I know you’re blaming everyone else for how your life turned out instead of looking in the mirror.”

Johnny’s fists clenched, the urge to throw a punch so familiar, so tempting. But instead, he took a deep breath, trying to rein in his temper. “You’re a real piece of work, you know that?”

Daniel smirked, shaking his head. “Yeah, well, you’re not so great yourself.”

They sat there for a moment, the tension thick between them, their animosity bubbling to the surface like it always did. But something was different this time. Maybe it was the booze, maybe it was the years that had passed since they were teenagers, but Johnny felt something shift. He wasn’t a kid anymore, and neither was Daniel. They were two men, stuck in their own lives, and maybe—just maybe—the fights they used to have didn’t matter as much anymore.

Johnny glanced at Daniel, noticing the way the lines around his eyes crinkled when he smirked. He wasn’t that scrawny, arrogant kid anymore. He was… different. Confident in a way that didn’t grate on Johnny as much as it used to. It was strange.

Daniel caught Johnny’s glance, and for a moment, their eyes met. Something passed between them—something neither of them could quite name. A shared frustration, maybe. Or something else entirely.

“You know what?” Johnny muttered, grabbing his glass and downing the rest of his whiskey. “I’m too tired for this crap.”

Daniel chuckled, surprising Johnny. “Yeah, me too.” He signaled to the bartender for a drink of his own. “Look, I’m not here to pick a fight. I just… needed a break. Things have been rough lately.”

Johnny raised an eyebrow. “Rough? You? What could be rough about your perfect life, LaRusso?”

Daniel’s smile faltered, and for the first time, Johnny saw something real behind that cocky exterior. “It’s not as perfect as it looks.”

They sat in silence after that, sipping their drinks and staring at the bar’s muted TV. For once, neither of them felt the need to tear each other apart. Maybe it was because they were older, or maybe it was because they were just too damn tired to keep fighting.

---

The next time Johnny found himself at the bar, he wasn’t expecting to see Daniel there again. But there he was, sitting in the same seat as before, a beer in his hand and a look of mild surprise on his face when Johnny walked in.

“You again?” Daniel said, raising an eyebrow as Johnny sat down next to him.

“Yeah, me again,” Johnny replied, flagging down the bartender for his usual. “What, you thought I’d stop coming here just because you showed up?”

Daniel shrugged, taking a sip of his beer. “Figured I’d scare you off.”

Johnny chuckled. “You wish.”

And just like that, they fell into a strange routine. Week after week, they’d find themselves in the same bar, at the same time, making the same snarky remarks. But as the months passed, something shifted between them. The sharp edges of their rivalry started to soften, their conversations becoming less about jabs and more about… well, life.

They learned things about each other. Johnny learned that Daniel wasn’t as obnoxious as he had once thought, that beneath the flashy cars and confident grin, Daniel had his own struggles, his own insecurities. And Daniel learned that Johnny wasn’t just some washed-up bully—that there was more to him than Cobra Kai and high school grudges.

It was gradual, the way they went from enemies to something else. It wasn’t like they’d ever said it out loud, but over time, their meetings at the bar became less about trying to outdo each other and more about just… being there. Talking. Listening.

One night, after too many beers and a conversation that drifted into more personal territory than either of them expected, Johnny found himself looking at Daniel in a way he hadn’t before. They had laughed—really laughed—about something stupid from their past, and when the laughter died down, there was this… moment.

It hung in the air between them, heavy and charged. Johnny felt his heart race, and he knew Daniel felt it too. He could see it in the way Daniel’s eyes darted away, as if he was trying to ignore whatever this was.

But Johnny couldn’t ignore it.

“Hey,” Johnny said, his voice quieter than usual. “You ever think about… why we’re still here? Why we keep meeting up like this?”

Daniel glanced at him, his brow furrowing. “What do you mean?”

“I mean, after all this time… why haven’t we just gone back to hating each other? Why do we keep coming back here?”

Daniel’s gaze softened, and for a moment, he looked like he was trying to figure out the answer himself. “I don’t know,” he admitted, his voice low. “Maybe… maybe it’s because we’re not those kids anymore. Maybe we’ve changed.”

Johnny nodded slowly, his mind racing. He wasn’t sure what he was feeling—this pull, this connection—but he knew it was real. He knew it had been building for months.

Without thinking, Johnny leaned in, closing the distance between them. Daniel’s breath hitched, and for a split second, Johnny thought he might back away. But then Daniel leaned in too, his lips meeting Johnny’s in a kiss that was soft, tentative, and completely unexpected.

It was like everything finally made sense—the years of fighting, the tension, the pull they had always felt but never understood. This was what had been building between them all along.

When they pulled back, both of them were breathing a little harder, their foreheads almost touching as they stared at each other in the dim light of the bar.

“Well,” Daniel said, his voice shaky but laced with humor, “I guess that answers your question.”

Johnny chuckled, feeling lighter than he had in years. “Yeah, I guess it does.”

And as they sat there, side by side, a new understanding settled between them. What had started as a rivalry had become something else. They stayed in that intimate silence for a few moments longer, neither of them quite sure what to say after the kiss but not wanting to break the spell either. The noise of the bar buzzed around them, but it felt distant, like they were in their own world.

Johnny was the first to speak, his voice low and careful. “So… what now?”

Daniel leaned back, his fingers tapping nervously against his beer bottle, his face still flushed from the kiss. “I don’t know,” he admitted softly, glancing sideways at Johnny. “This… I didn’t expect this, you know? We’ve spent so much time hating each other.”

“Yeah,” Johnny said, rubbing the back of his neck, his own heart still racing. “But maybe that’s because there was something else under all that. You ever think about that?”

Daniel looked down at his drink, lips pressing together in thought. He didn’t need to answer; Johnny could see it in his eyes. They had spent so many years tangled in each other’s lives—fighting, competing, always at odds. But now, all that tension made sense in a way that neither of them had been willing to see before.

Daniel let out a small chuckle, a sound filled with both amusement and disbelief. “I mean, you’re Johnny Lawrence,” he said, shaking his head slightly, as if trying to wrap his mind around everything. “This is crazy.”

Johnny smirked at that, but there was a warmth in his eyes that hadn’t been there before. “Yeah, and you’re Daniel LaRusso. But maybe that doesn’t have to mean what it used to.”

For the first time that night, Daniel fully turned to face Johnny, their shoulders brushing against one another. He was serious now, his expression open, raw in a way Johnny hadn’t seen before. “Are we really doing this?” Daniel asked softly, as if saying it aloud might shatter the fragile thing they’d just discovered.

Johnny held his gaze, the smirk fading into something softer. “Yeah,” he said, a quiet certainty in his voice. “I think we are.”

Daniel’s eyes softened, and for a moment, they just stared at each other, everything unsaid between them lingering in the air. Slowly, Daniel leaned in again, closing the small distance between them, and this time when their lips met, the kiss was deeper, more certain.

It wasn’t just a kiss between old rivals—it was the start of something new. Something they both had been too blind or too stubborn to see before.

When they pulled apart, the weight of everything was still there, but it felt different now. Lighter. Like maybe, just maybe, they could figure this out together.

Daniel grinned, the tension between them melting away, replaced by something warmer. “I guess we should get out of here,” he said, nodding towards the bar around them. “Don’t want to cause a scene.”

Johnny chuckled, pulling back and standing up, tossing a few bills on the counter. “Yeah, let’s get outta here before anyone sees us.”

They left the bar together, stepping into the cool night air, their steps in sync as they walked toward the parking lot. It was strange, how natural it felt now, to be walking side by side without the weight of their old rivalry hanging over them.

As they reached Johnny’s car, Daniel paused, his hand resting on the door handle. He glanced at Johnny, a small smile tugging at the corner of his lips. “So… we’re really doing this?”

Johnny leaned against the car, arms crossed, his smirk back in full force. “What, you scared, LaRusso?”

Daniel rolled his eyes but smiled anyway. “Yeah, like I’d be scared of you.”

Johnny’s grin softened, his eyes flicking to Daniel’s. “Good,” he said quietly, the teasing edge gone. “Because I’m not letting you run away from this.”

Daniel’s smile faltered for just a moment, a flicker of vulnerability crossing his face, but then he nodded. “I’m not running,” he said, and Johnny believed him.

They got into the car, the night stretching out ahead of them, and for the first time in years, Johnny felt like maybe things were finally starting to go right.

---

Their meetings at the bar became something else after that night. No longer accidental or coincidental, but intentional. The tension between them had shifted into something more familiar, but also more intimate. Every time they met, every kiss they shared, it became less about their past and more about the future they were starting to build together.

Johnny had never pictured himself in a real relationship—not like this, anyway. Not with LaRusso. But here they were, months in, and it was starting to feel… real.

They had their rough patches—two strong-willed guys with complicated pasts, there was no avoiding that—but through every fight, every disagreement, they came out stronger on the other side. Somehow, the fighting felt different now. It wasn’t about proving something, or holding onto grudges. It was about figuring out how to navigate this new territory together.

One evening, they found themselves back at the bar where it had all started. It was quieter than usual, the kind of night where the jukebox was playing softly in the background and the world seemed to slow down for a bit.

Johnny looked at Daniel, who was talking about his day at the dealership, hands gesturing animatedly as he always did when he was passionate about something. And Johnny couldn’t help but smile. There was something about the way Daniel could talk about anything and everything, like he had this endless well of energy.

Johnny interrupted mid-sentence. “Hey, LaRusso.”

Daniel blinked, pausing. “Yeah?”

Johnny hesitated for just a moment, then leaned forward, his hand brushing against Daniel’s on the table. “I’m glad we’re here. You know… doing this.”

Daniel’s face softened, his earlier excitement fading into something quieter, more sincere. “Yeah,” he said after a beat. “Me too.”

Johnny leaned in, pressing a kiss to Daniel’s lips. It was soft, tender—nothing like the fiery, frustrated kisses they had shared before. This one was different. It was filled with the kind of certainty that only came after months of figuring each other out, of tearing down the walls they had built over the years.

When they pulled back, Johnny smirked, his thumb brushing over the back of Daniel’s hand. “Guess this means I won’t have to kick your ass anymore.”

Daniel chuckled, shaking his head. “You’re welcome to try, Lawrence.”

Johnny’s smirk turned into a full grin as he leaned in again, pulling Daniel close.

For the first time in a long time, Johnny felt like he was exactly where he was supposed to be. And as they sat there in the dim light of the bar, the world moving on around them, neither of them could deny that they had fought their way through hell to get here—together.

And it was worth every damn punch.

Chapter Text

The bar was buzzing with late-night energy, a mix of clinking glasses, low conversations, and the hum of music from the jukebox in the corner. It wasn’t a fancy place—just a small, hole-in-the-wall bar in the Valley. But it was familiar, and that’s what people liked about it. The regulars came in for a drink, sometimes to talk, sometimes to forget. And then there was Daniel LaRusso—the bartender who could serve drinks as smoothly as he could charm a crowd.

Daniel wiped down the bar with a practiced ease, flashing a smile at a group of customers who had just tipped generously. His hair was slightly tousled, his sleeves rolled up to his elbows, and the familiar black apron tied around his waist. It was late, almost closing time, but the bar was still full enough to keep him on his feet.

That’s when Johnny Lawrence walked in.

Johnny had been there a few times before, always late, always with a swagger that drew attention. He had that bad-boy charm that people couldn’t help but notice. But tonight, as he strolled up to the bar, there was a different kind of intensity in his eyes—like he had a mission.

Daniel glanced up as Johnny approached, raising an eyebrow as he set down a fresh pint for another customer. “Lawrence,” he greeted with a smirk, recognizing him immediately. “Back again, huh? You sure you don’t have somewhere else to be?”

Johnny grinned, sliding onto one of the stools at the bar. He was wearing his usual leather jacket, which he peeled off and tossed onto the seat next to him. “Nah,” he drawled, leaning in a little closer. “Figured I’d come by and see how my favorite bartender was doing.”

Daniel chuckled, shaking his head. “You’ve got a funny way of showing it. Last time you were here, I had to cut you off.”

Johnny raised his hands in mock surrender, his grin widening. “Yeah, yeah. I was a little… enthusiastic, maybe.”

Daniel rolled his eyes but couldn’t hide the smile tugging at his lips. “A little? You were practically dancing on the bar.”

Johnny’s eyes gleamed with mischief. “What can I say? You bring out the best in me.”

There it was. That look. Daniel had noticed it before, but tonight, it felt like Johnny was turning it up a notch. The way he leaned on the bar, the way his gaze lingered just a bit too long—it was impossible not to notice that Johnny was flirting with him. And hard.

Daniel wasn’t oblivious. He’d been a bartender long enough to recognize when someone was trying to get his attention. But with Johnny, it was different. The history between them—the fights, the rivalry, the complicated mess of their past—it all made this feel like more than just harmless banter.

Still, Daniel wasn’t about to let Johnny win so easily.

“So, what’ll it be tonight?” Daniel asked, wiping his hands on a towel and reaching for the row of bottles behind the bar. “Another whiskey?”

Johnny shook his head, his grin softening into something a little more serious, a little more focused. “Nah, I’m good for now. I didn’t come here just for a drink.”

Daniel paused, narrowing his eyes slightly. “Then why are you here?”

Johnny leaned forward, his elbows resting on the bar as he locked eyes with Daniel. “You really gotta ask, LaRusso? I think you know why.”

Daniel felt his pulse quicken, but he kept his expression neutral, raising an eyebrow. “Enlighten me.”

Johnny’s voice dropped, low and smooth. “I came here for you.”

The words hung in the air between them, and for the first time, Daniel felt the tension in the room shift. It wasn’t playful anymore. There was something else—something dangerous in the way Johnny was looking at him, like he was daring Daniel to make a move, to push back.

Daniel swallowed, trying to keep his cool. “Is that right?”

Johnny’s lips curled into a slow, confident smile. “Yeah. That’s right.” He glanced around the bar, then back at Daniel, lowering his voice even further. “You’re a hard guy to figure out, LaRusso. But I like a challenge.”

Daniel crossed his arms, leaning back slightly as he studied Johnny’s face. There was no mistaking it now. Johnny was trying to seduce him, and the worst part? It was kind of working. There was something magnetic about Johnny’s boldness, his unwavering confidence. Daniel had never been one to back down from a challenge, and Johnny was definitely challenging him.

“You’re not as smooth as you think you are,” Daniel said, his voice tinged with amusement.

Johnny laughed softly, his eyes never leaving Daniel’s. “Maybe. But you haven’t walked away yet, so I must be doing something right.”

Daniel shook his head, unable to stop the smile from spreading across his face. “You really don’t give up, do you?”

“Not when it’s something I want,” Johnny replied, his tone softer now, more sincere.

For a moment, Daniel didn’t know what to say. The room felt smaller, the noise of the bar fading into the background as they stared at each other. He hadn’t expected this—hadn’t expected Johnny to come in and throw him off balance like this. But here he was, leaning in closer, his heart pounding in his chest.

Johnny’s hand slid across the bar, his fingers brushing lightly against Daniel’s. The touch was barely there, but it sent a jolt of electricity through Daniel’s body, making him freeze for just a second.

“You’re full of surprises, Lawrence,” Daniel said quietly, his eyes flicking down to where their hands almost touched.

Johnny’s smirk softened into something more genuine. “Maybe I am. But I think you like it.”

Daniel swallowed hard, his mind racing. He had two options: push Johnny away and pretend this wasn’t happening, or lean into it and see where it went.

He chose the latter.

Before he could second-guess himself, Daniel leaned forward, closing the distance between them, and pressed his lips against Johnny’s in a kiss that was sudden but electric. The world around them seemed to disappear, the noise of the bar, the clinking of glasses, all fading away as their lips met.

Johnny responded immediately, his hand sliding up to cup the back of Daniel’s neck, pulling him in closer as the kiss deepened. It wasn’t rushed or aggressive—it was slow, intense, and filled with all the tension they had been holding onto for years.

When they finally pulled apart, both of them were breathing heavily, their foreheads almost touching as they tried to catch their breath.

Johnny grinned, his thumb brushing against Daniel’s jawline. “Told you it’d work.”

Daniel chuckled, shaking his head in disbelief. “Yeah, well, don’t get cocky. This doesn’t mean I’m letting you win.”

Johnny laughed, his eyes lighting up with mischief. “Oh, I don’t think anyone’s winning here, LaRusso. Except maybe both of us.”

Daniel smirked, unable to argue with that.

They stayed like that for a moment longer, the air between them still crackling with energy. Daniel knew that whatever had just happened, it wasn’t a one-time thing. This—whatever this was between them—was just the beginning.

And maybe, just maybe, he was okay with that.

Chapter Text

In the months that followed, Johnny Lawrence and Daniel LaRusso settled into a rhythm that neither of them could have predicted. What started as an electric kiss in a dimly lit bar became something deeper, something both of them realized they had been chasing for years without ever knowing it. Their connection, though rooted in their complicated history, blossomed into a relationship that defied the odds—and their own expectations.

It wasn’t long before they started spending more and more time together. At first, it was casual meet-ups after Daniel’s shifts, sharing a late-night drink or heading back to Johnny’s place to avoid the prying eyes of the Valley’s regulars. But eventually, it became more than that. Soon, Johnny was crashing at Daniel’s more often than not, and Daniel found himself anticipating those nights more than he cared to admit.

But as they grew closer, so did the challenges. Their old rivalries and competitive streaks would bubble up now and again, particularly when it came to their respective karate dojos. Johnny still ran Eagle Fang with his ragtag group of misfits, while Daniel’s more traditional Miyagi-Do focused on the philosophical and spiritual side of the martial art. Their ideologies clashed—sometimes spectacularly—but as time passed, they learned to appreciate what the other brought to the table. They argued, sure, but their arguments had a different edge now, laced with affection and the knowledge that neither of them was walking away.

---

The night Johnny proposed was as unexpected as the rest of their relationship. They were lounging on Daniel’s couch, legs tangled together, watching an old action movie that Johnny insisted was a classic. The banter had been easy that night, the usual jabs about Daniel’s ‘rich boy’ life and Johnny’s rebellious past, but there was a softness beneath the teasing that neither of them acknowledged out loud. They had grown comfortable with each other in a way that felt terrifying and exhilarating at the same time.

As the movie credits rolled, Daniel yawned and stretched, his head resting against Johnny’s shoulder. “You know,” he murmured, his voice sleepy but content, “I used to think we’d never even be able to stand in the same room without trying to kill each other.”

Johnny smirked, running a hand through Daniel’s hair. “Yeah, well, I guess you bring out the best in me now. Or maybe I just gave up on trying to kick your ass.”

Daniel snorted, turning his head to look at Johnny. “Gave up? You’re getting soft, Lawrence.”

Johnny’s grin faded into something more serious, his hand stilling in Daniel’s hair. “Nah,” he said quietly. “I’m just finally figuring out what I really want.”

Daniel frowned, sitting up slightly. “What do you mean?”

For a moment, Johnny didn’t say anything. He just looked at Daniel, his expression unreadable, but then he leaned forward, his eyes locking onto Daniel’s with an intensity that made Daniel’s stomach flip. “I mean…” Johnny reached into the pocket of his leather jacket, which was slung over the back of the couch. He pulled out a small, weathered box. Daniel’s heart stopped. “I think it’s time we made this official.”

Daniel’s eyes widened as Johnny popped open the box, revealing a simple silver band. It wasn’t flashy, but it was perfect. It was real. His breath caught in his throat.

“Johnny…” Daniel started, his voice barely above a whisper.

Johnny shifted nervously, a rare sight that made Daniel’s chest tighten. “I know we’re a mess sometimes. I know we don’t always get it right. But, LaRusso, you’re the best thing that’s ever happened to me. And I want to make sure you know that.” He swallowed, his voice rough around the edges. “So… marry me?”

For a long moment, Daniel couldn’t find his words. His heart was pounding, and for the first time in years, he didn’t know what to say. But then the smile broke across his face, wide and full of warmth, and he leaned forward, pressing his forehead against Johnny’s.

“You idiot,” Daniel murmured, his voice shaky but filled with affection. “Of course, I’ll marry you.”

The kiss that followed was soft, tender, filled with all the unspoken promises of their future. And just like that, the next chapter of their lives began.

---

Their wedding was small but meaningful. They didn’t want a big, flashy ceremony—just a close gathering of friends and family who had supported them along the way. The Valley buzzed with the gossip, of course—Johnny Lawrence and Daniel LaRusso, two former karate rivals, now tying the knot? It was the kind of headline that practically wrote itself. But for once, neither of them cared about the outside noise.

Sam and Anthony stood beside Daniel, both grinning with pride as they watched their father say his vows. Johnny’s friends, Bobby and Dutch, were equally supportive, though Dutch never let up on his teasing, claiming he never thought Johnny would be the one to settle down. Even Robby, Johnny’s estranged son, had shown up, a little awkward but undeniably happy for his dad.

After the ceremony, Johnny caught Daniel’s hand and pulled him aside, away from the small crowd of guests. “I still can’t believe we actually did this,” Johnny said, his voice low and slightly awestruck.

Daniel laughed softly, resting his forehead against Johnny’s. “Me neither,” he admitted. “But I wouldn’t change a thing.”

Johnny grinned, his hand tightening around Daniel’s. “Good. ‘Cause we’ve got a lot of life ahead of us.”

---

And life did move forward, faster than they expected. After the honeymoon—an impromptu road trip along the California coast that felt more like an adventure than a vacation—they settled into a routine. Daniel still ran his auto dealerships, and Johnny spent his days training the next generation of fighters at Eagle Fang. But they also carved out time for each other, making their partnership work in a way that felt almost effortless after everything they had been through.

But one day, as they sat in their now-shared home, Johnny brought up something that caught Daniel off guard.

“You ever think about having more kids?” Johnny asked, glancing at Daniel over his beer.

Daniel blinked, lowering his drink. “More kids?”

“Yeah,” Johnny said casually, though his tone was careful. “I mean, I know we’ve got Sam, Anthony, and Robby, but… I don’t know. I’ve been thinking.”

Daniel was quiet for a moment, turning the idea over in his mind. “You mean adopting?”

Johnny shrugged. “Yeah. Maybe. There are a lot of kids out there who could use a second chance.”

Daniel looked at Johnny for a long moment, seeing the sincerity in his eyes. It wasn’t something they had talked about before, but now that it was out in the open, it didn’t feel strange. In fact, it felt… right.

“You really want to do this?” Daniel asked softly.

Johnny nodded. “Yeah. I think I do.”

---

And so, they began the process of adopting. It wasn’t easy, but Johnny and Daniel were nothing if not determined. They met with case workers, went through interviews, and eventually, after months of waiting, they were introduced to three kids who would soon become the newest members of their unconventional family: Tory, a quiet but fierce teenager who reminded Daniel of himself at that age; Miguel, a bright and mischievous boy who Johnny took an immediate liking to; and Eli, a shy but resilient boy with a tough exterior, who Johnny immediately bonded with.

The adjustment period was rough at first. Tory and Eli were still figuring out their place in the world, and Miguel, having had his own troubled past, was wary of trusting anyone again. But Johnny and Daniel were patient. They gave the kids time and space to settle in, slowly building trust and creating a home where everyone felt safe.

Their house became filled with laughter and noise, with the chaos that comes with raising kids, and neither Johnny nor Daniel would have had it any other way.

---

Years passed, and Johnny and Daniel watched their family grow. Tory excelled in school and eventually followed in her father’s footsteps, opening her own karate dojo. Eli, with Johnny’s guidance, found a passion for mechanics and started his own repair shop. And Miguel, after some bumps in the road, found his way, too, becoming a counselor for troubled teens, using his own experiences to help others.

Through it all, Johnny and Daniel remained a constant. They had their ups and downs, as all couples do, but their love for each other only deepened with time. They had fought so hard for their happiness, and they weren’t about to let anything tear them apart.

And in the quiet moments, when the house was still and the weight of the world seemed to fade away, Johnny would look at Daniel and marvel at how far they had come—from rivals to lovers, from two men at odds to partners in every sense of the word.

“You know,” Johnny would say, his voice soft as they lay in bed, “we did alright, LaRusso.”

Daniel would smile, pulling Johnny close. “Yeah, we did.”

And for the first time in his life, Daniel LaRusso knew that he was exactly where he was meant to be.

Chapter Text

Daniel paced back and forth across the living room of their shared apartment, his mind spinning with worry and doubt. He had tried to shake the feeling off for weeks, telling himself he was just being paranoid, but Johnny’s recent behaviour had only made the gnawing suspicion grow. Something wasn’t right.

It wasn’t like Johnny to keep secrets. He was a lot of things—blunt, rough around the edges, and not always great with expressing his feelings—but he wasn’t sneaky. And yet, in the past month, Johnny had been acting strange. Late-night outings, cryptic phone calls, and vague answers whenever Daniel asked him where he was going.

The pit in Daniel’s stomach had turned into a full-blown ache. What if Johnny was seeing someone else? What if everything they’d built together was about to come crashing down?

Daniel glanced at the clock. Johnny was supposed to be home an hour ago, but once again, he was late, with no text or call explaining why. His heart pounded in his chest as he imagined all the worst-case scenarios playing out in his head.

He tried to calm himself down, leaning against the kitchen counter and running a hand through his hair. “There’s probably a simple explanation,” he muttered to himself. But no matter how much he tried to rationalise it, the doubt lingered.

The sound of keys jingling at the front door snapped Daniel out of his thoughts. Johnny stepped inside, looking disheveled but cheerful, like he had just come back from a workout or something. He kicked the door shut behind him and tossed his jacket onto the couch without a second thought.

“Hey,” Johnny greeted casually, running a hand through his hair. “Sorry I’m late. Traffic was a nightmare.”

Daniel’s eyes narrowed, the suspicion boiling over. He couldn’t hold it in any longer. “Where were you?”

Johnny frowned, turning to face him. “I told you, I was out. What’s with the third degree?”

“Out? That’s all you’re going to say?” Daniel’s voice rose with frustration. “You’ve been ‘out’ a lot lately, Johnny. And you’re always vague about it.”

Johnny raised an eyebrow, his confusion apparent. “What’s going on with you?”

Daniel clenched his fists, taking a step closer. He couldn’t stand the idea of being lied to—of being made a fool. “I need to know the truth. Are you seeing someone else?”

Johnny’s expression changed in an instant, his eyes widening in shock. “What?” His voice was laced with disbelief. “Daniel, what the hell are you talking about?”

“You’ve been sneaking around, acting all suspicious, and you’re never around anymore!” Daniel’s voice cracked with emotion as the hurt bubbled up inside him. “Just tell me, Johnny. If you’re cheating on me, I deserve to know.”

Johnny stared at him, stunned into silence. For a moment, neither of them spoke, the air between them heavy with tension. And then, to Daniel’s surprise, Johnny let out a short, breathless laugh—not out of amusement, but disbelief.

“You think I’m cheating on you?” Johnny asked, his voice low, as if he couldn’t believe what he was hearing.

Daniel’s throat tightened, the accusation hanging between them. “What else am I supposed to think? You’ve been so distant. I don’t know what’s going on anymore.”

Johnny ran a hand down his face, exhaling sharply. “Daniel, I’m not cheating on you. Jesus, I would never do that.”

“Then what is it?” Daniel pressed, his voice softening but still filled with uncertainty. “What’s going on, Johnny? Why are you acting so weird?”

Johnny stared at Daniel for a long moment, his blue eyes searching Daniel’s face for something. Slowly, he reached into the pocket of his jeans, pulling something out. He held his hand out in front of him, and Daniel’s breath caught in his throat when he saw it.

It was a small velvet box.

Daniel’s heart stopped. “Johnny, what—”

“I’ve been acting weird because of this,” Johnny interrupted, his voice quiet but steady as he held up the box. “I’ve been trying to figure out the right time, the right way, to do this. And every time I thought I had a plan, I chickened out.”

Daniel stood frozen, his mind racing to catch up with what was happening. He blinked, his gaze shifting from Johnny’s face to the box in his hand.

Johnny sighed, rubbing the back of his neck. “I didn’t want to screw this up, alright? I’ve been sneaking around because I’ve been trying to get everything together. I wasn’t cheating on you, Daniel. I was planning to do this.”

He took a deep breath, then got down on one knee, looking up at Daniel with a nervous smile. “Daniel LaRusso, will you marry me?”

For a moment, Daniel couldn’t breathe. His heart raced as he stared down at Johnny, the man who had driven him absolutely crazy for most of his life, and now, here he was—on one knee, asking him the one question Daniel had never expected.

“I… I thought…” Daniel stammered, his mind still spinning.

Johnny smiled softly, his voice gentle. “You thought I was leaving you. But I was trying to figure out how to tell you I want to spend the rest of my life with you.”

Daniel’s chest tightened, emotion welling up inside him. He felt like an idiot—how had he let his insecurities cloud everything? Johnny wasn’t cheating, wasn’t pulling away. He was preparing to take the biggest step of their relationship.

Daniel’s throat tightened as tears pricked the corners of his eyes. “Johnny, I… I’m such an idiot. I thought…”

Johnny shook his head, standing up and reaching for Daniel’s hands. “You’re not an idiot. I get it, okay? I’ve been acting like a weirdo, and you had every right to be suspicious. But I swear, Daniel, it’s always been you.”

Daniel swallowed hard, his voice thick with emotion. “You really want to marry me?”

Johnny’s smile softened, his hands squeezing Daniel’s. “More than anything.”

Tears spilled over Daniel’s lashes as he let out a shaky laugh. “Of course I’ll marry you.”

Johnny grinned, his relief palpable as he pulled Daniel into a tight embrace. Daniel melted into him, wrapping his arms around Johnny’s waist and burying his face in his shoulder. The tension that had been building between them for weeks seemed to dissolve in that moment, leaving only warmth and love in its place.

When they finally pulled apart, Johnny reached for the velvet box again, opening it to reveal a simple but elegant silver band. He slipped it onto Daniel’s finger, his hands slightly trembling.

Daniel stared down at the ring, a smile breaking through the tears on his face. “I can’t believe I thought you were cheating on me.”

Johnny chuckled, his forehead resting against Daniel’s. “Yeah, well, I can’t believe you put up with me long enough to let me propose.”

Daniel laughed, his heart feeling lighter than it had in weeks. “I’m still getting used to it.”

Johnny leaned in, his lips brushing against Daniel’s in a soft, tender kiss. It wasn’t rushed or heated—it was gentle, full of promise and affection. It was a kiss that said, I’m here, and I’m not going anywhere.

When they pulled away, Daniel smiled, his fingers tracing the edges of the ring on his hand. “So, Mr. Lawrence… I guess we’ve got a wedding to plan.”

Johnny grinned, his eyes sparkling with a mixture of love and mischief. “Yeah, LaRusso. We do.”

And for the first time in weeks, Daniel felt completely at ease. The doubt was gone, replaced by a sense of certainty that had always been there, even if he hadn’t realized it. Johnny wasn’t leaving. He was staying.

Forever.

Chapter Text

The cool night air swept through the city streets, wrapping itself around Daniel as he stood perched on a rooftop, his eyes locked on the building across from him. From his vantage point, he had a clear view of Johnny’s penthouse, the man who had become his target. Daniel’s heart thudded steadily in his chest, a rhythm he was used to—the calm before the storm.

He had done this countless times before. He was one of the most skilled assassins in the world, hired to take out high-profile targets with precision and no questions asked. It was business, nothing personal. And when he had been handed the file on Johnny Lawrence, he had approached it like he always did—with cold, calculated efficiency.

Johnny Lawrence. Former high school karate champion turned successful businessman. He owned a chain of luxury gyms that catered to the elite, and his influence in the city had grown exponentially in recent years. That, apparently, had earned him a few enemies. And those enemies had turned to Daniel.

Daniel had done his homework. He had followed Johnny for weeks, tracking his every move, learning his routines, and familiarizing himself with every detail of his life. And yet, the longer Daniel watched, the more something started to shift inside him. There was something about Johnny that was different from his other targets.

He wasn’t a faceless villain. He wasn’t some corrupt politician or greedy businessman whose life would go unnoticed. No, Johnny Lawrence was charismatic, full of life and energy, with a swagger that could charm just about anyone. He had a sense of honor about him, something Daniel hadn’t expected. He was brash and rough around the edges, but he wasn’t evil. In fact, the more Daniel watched him, the more he realized that Johnny was… good.

That was the problem.

Daniel shook his head, trying to clear his thoughts. He couldn’t afford to get distracted. He had a job to do, and if he hesitated now, it could cost him everything. He had never failed a mission before, and he wasn’t about to start now.

He crouched lower on the rooftop, adjusting the scope on his rifle as he peered through the crosshairs. Johnny was inside the penthouse, moving around his living room with a beer in hand, completely unaware that his life hung in the balance. One pull of the trigger, and it would all be over.

So why couldn’t Daniel do it?

His finger hovered over the trigger, but his chest tightened. This was wrong. It wasn’t just that Johnny was his target—it was that, over the past few weeks, Daniel had found himself drawn to him. Something about Johnny’s fierce independence, his unfiltered confidence, and even his vulnerability had gotten under Daniel’s skin. The idea of killing him now felt… unbearable.

Daniel exhaled slowly, lowering the rifle and pulling back from the edge of the roof. He couldn’t do it. Not tonight. Maybe not ever.

---

The next night, Daniel found himself sitting at a bar, staring into the bottom of a glass of whiskey he hadn’t even touched. He had been sitting there for an hour, trying to sort out the mess in his head. This wasn’t like him. He didn’t get attached to targets. He didn’t feel anything about them. It was part of the job. So why was Johnny different?

A voice broke through his thoughts. “Mind if I sit?”

Daniel looked up, startled, and his heart nearly stopped in his chest. Johnny Lawrence stood in front of him, a casual smile on his face as he gestured to the stool next to Daniel.

For a split second, Daniel’s training kicked in—his hand twitched, ready to reach for the knife hidden under his jacket. But he stopped himself. Johnny wasn’t here as a threat. He was here… because he had no idea who Daniel really was.

“Sure,” Daniel said, his voice steady even though his pulse was racing.

Johnny slid onto the stool, glancing at Daniel before signaling the bartender for another beer. “You look like you’ve had a long night.”

Daniel forced a chuckle, hoping to seem relaxed. “Something like that.”

Johnny took a swig of his beer, his eyes studying Daniel for a moment. “You from around here?”

Daniel shrugged, his guard up. “You could say that.”

Johnny nodded, seeming to accept the vague answer. He leaned back against the bar, looking out at the room with a casual ease. “This place isn’t bad. I come here when I need to clear my head.”

Daniel glanced at him, curious. “Why’s that?”

Johnny shrugged, taking another sip of his beer. “Life, you know? Sometimes it gets heavy. A guy needs a place to think.”

The irony of Johnny seeking peace while Daniel had been sent to take him out wasn’t lost on him. But Daniel couldn’t help but feel a pang of something close to guilt. Johnny was sitting here, completely unaware of the danger he was in, and yet he seemed so… normal. Like any other guy dealing with life’s ups and downs.

“Yeah,” Daniel said quietly. “I get that.”

They sat in silence for a few minutes, the sound of clinking glasses and soft conversations filling the space around them. Daniel found himself stealing glances at Johnny, trying to reconcile the man sitting next to him with the target he was supposed to eliminate.

Johnny turned to him again, his expression more serious this time. “You seem like you’ve got something on your mind.”

Daniel stiffened. “What makes you say that?”

Johnny raised an eyebrow, smirking slightly. “You’ve barely touched your drink, and you’ve been staring at the same spot for the past ten minutes. Something’s eating at you.”

Daniel swallowed hard, trying to shake the unease. He wasn’t used to being read like this. But something about Johnny’s directness disarmed him.

“It’s complicated,” Daniel admitted, his voice quieter than before.

Johnny nodded as if he understood. “Yeah, complicated has a way of creeping up on you.”

Daniel looked down at his hands, wondering if Johnny had any idea just how complicated things really were.

Johnny drained the rest of his beer and set the empty bottle down on the bar with a satisfied sigh. He turned to Daniel, flashing him that signature grin. “You wanna get out of here? I know a place with a better view.”

Daniel hesitated. He should say no. He should walk away and never see Johnny again. But his curiosity—and something deeper—won out. “Sure.”

---

The rooftop of Johnny’s building offered a panoramic view of the city. The lights of the valley stretched out beneath them, a sea of glowing dots in the distance. The air was cooler up here, but Daniel barely noticed as he leaned against the railing next to Johnny.

They stood in silence for a while, the weight of the world below them and the sky above. Daniel couldn’t believe he was here—on the roof of the man he was supposed to kill, standing so close that he could feel the warmth of Johnny’s body next to his.

“I come up here a lot,” Johnny said softly, breaking the silence. “Helps me think.”

Daniel glanced at him, his pulse quickening again. “What are you thinking about?”

Johnny smirked, but his expression quickly turned more serious. “Life. Choices. How things don’t always turn out the way you think they will.”

Daniel’s heart ached at the words. It felt like Johnny was speaking directly to his soul. If only he knew how true those words were for Daniel.

“You ever feel like you’re on a path you can’t get off of?” Daniel asked, his voice barely above a whisper.

Johnny nodded, his eyes never leaving the city below them. “All the time.”

The words hung in the air between them, thick with meaning that neither of them could fully articulate. Daniel felt the weight of his own choices pressing down on him—his profession, his mission, the fact that he was standing next to the man he was supposed to kill.

But he couldn’t do it. Not anymore.

Without thinking, Daniel turned to face Johnny, his hand reaching out to brush against Johnny’s arm. Johnny looked at him, surprised at the sudden contact, but he didn’t pull away.

“I shouldn’t be here,” Daniel said softly, his voice heavy with regret.

Johnny frowned, confusion flickering in his eyes. “What do you mean?”

Daniel’s throat tightened. “I came here with a purpose, but… it’s not what I thought it would be.”

Johnny’s gaze softened, and he stepped closer, his hand gently resting on Daniel’s shoulder. “You don’t have to explain anything. I get it.”

Daniel’s heart raced, his mind screaming at him to pull away, to run before he made things worse. But his body wouldn’t listen. Instead, he found himself leaning in, his breath hitching as Johnny’s face came closer.

And then, without warning, their lips met.

It wasn’t planned, it wasn’t rehearsed—it just happened. The kiss was slow, tentative at first, but as the seconds passed, it deepened. Johnny’s hand slid up to cup the back of Daniel’s neck, pulling him closer, while Daniel’s hands found their way to Johnny’s waist, gripping tightly as if afraid to let go.

The world around them seemed to disappear, the noise of the city fading into nothing as they kissed under the blanket of stars above. There was no mission, no target, no danger—just the two of them, lost in the moment.

When they finally pulled apart, both of them were breathing heavily, their foreheads resting against each other as they tried to catch their breath.

Johnny’s voice was barely a whisper. “What are you running from, Daniel?”

Daniel’s eyes fluttered open, heart pounding as he stared into Johnny’s eyes. The raw intensity between them was undeniable, but so was the weight of everything Daniel had been holding back.

He stepped back slightly, breaking the physical closeness but still feeling the magnetic pull between them. “I… I don’t know how to explain it,” Daniel admitted, his voice shaky. “I was hired to—” His voice caught in his throat, the confession threatening to spill out. But how could he say it? How could he tell Johnny that he had been hired to kill him, only to find himself hopelessly entangled in something else entirely?

Johnny frowned, his brows knitting together in confusion. “Hired to what?”

Daniel bit his lip, his heart racing. He could lie. He could make something up and disappear from Johnny’s life. But deep down, he knew he couldn’t. Johnny deserved the truth, no matter how terrible it was.

“To kill you,” Daniel whispered, the words hanging heavy in the air between them. His voice trembled, and he couldn’t bear to look Johnny in the eye. “I was sent to take you out, Johnny. But I couldn’t… I can’t do it.”

The silence that followed felt suffocating. Daniel braced himself for the anger, the betrayal that was sure to follow. He expected Johnny to recoil, to shove him away, to call him a liar or worse.

But none of that happened.

Instead, Johnny just stood there, shock and confusion written across his face, but no sign of hatred or anger. “You were hired to… kill me?” Johnny’s voice was low, like he was trying to wrap his head around it.

Daniel nodded, guilt gnawing at his insides. “I didn’t know it would be you. When I started watching you, when I started learning about you… I couldn’t go through with it. I’ve never felt like this before. I tried to fight it, but every time I saw you…” He trailed off, his throat tightening with emotion.

Johnny took a step closer, his eyes locked onto Daniel’s. “But you didn’t do it. You didn’t hurt me.”

“No, I didn’t,” Daniel replied softly, his voice thick with emotion. “I couldn’t.”

Johnny’s gaze softened, the tension in his body slowly easing as he processed the truth. “You could’ve ended me at any point, but you didn’t. You’re still here.”

Daniel let out a breath he hadn’t realized he was holding, his eyes finally meeting Johnny’s. “I’m still here.”

There was a beat of silence before Johnny’s hand reached out, gently cupping the side of Daniel’s face. The touch was so tender, so full of unspoken understanding, that it made Daniel’s chest ache. “Whatever this is,” Johnny murmured, “whatever the hell is happening between us… it’s real, isn’t it?”

Daniel nodded, feeling the weight of every word. “It’s real, Johnny.”

Without another word, Johnny closed the distance between them, capturing Daniel’s lips in another kiss—this one fiercer, more desperate than before. It was a kiss that spoke of forgiveness, of passion, and of something far more profound than either of them could have anticipated.

Daniel melted into Johnny’s embrace, his hands fisting the fabric of Johnny’s jacket as if afraid to let go. There was no escaping the intensity between them now. Whatever had started as a job had transformed into something Daniel never could have expected—something that had shaken him to his core.

When they finally pulled apart, both of them were breathless, their foreheads pressed together as they stood on that rooftop, the weight of their shared secret hanging in the air.

Johnny’s voice was soft but steady. “We’ll figure this out, Daniel. I don’t know how, but we will.”

Daniel swallowed hard, his heart aching with a strange mixture of hope and fear. “I don’t deserve that, Johnny.”

“Maybe not,” Johnny replied, his thumb brushing lightly over Daniel’s cheek. “But I think we both know we don’t get to choose who we fall for.”

Daniel’s heart thudded in his chest, his emotions swirling as he looked into Johnny’s eyes. In this moment, under the stars, nothing else mattered—not the mission, not the lies, not the danger that had brought them together. All that mattered was the connection between them, the undeniable bond that had formed despite everything.

Johnny gave him a small, lopsided smile, the kind that made Daniel’s heart skip a beat. “You staying?”

Daniel hesitated for only a second before nodding. “Yeah. I’m staying.”

They stood there for a while longer, just holding each other as the city hummed around them. The danger wasn’t gone, the complications weren’t over, but for now, they had this. And for the first time in a long time, Daniel felt like maybe—just maybe—he had found something worth fighting for.

And in that moment, as Johnny’s arms wrapped around him and the weight of his confession lifted, Daniel knew that whatever came next, he wasn’t going to be alone.

For better or worse, they were in this together.

Chapter Text

Johnny leaned against the crumbling brick wall of a dingy back alley, the light from a flickering street lamp casting long shadows across his rugged features. His grip tightened around the handle of his knife, the blade gleaming in the low light. He had been in the business of killing long enough to recognize the thrill of an impending hunt. Tonight was no different.

His target, a high-profile CEO whose greed had earned him more than a few enemies, was supposedly holed up in a nearby warehouse. A client, a faceless voice over the phone, had wired him a large sum to ensure the man’s life came to an abrupt, bloody end.

This was his life—cold, calculated, efficient. No attachments, no complications. Kill, collect, and move on. Johnny liked it that way. Feelings, relationships—they were distractions. And distractions could get you killed.

As he made his way silently down the alley, Johnny’s senses were razor-sharp. Something was off. He could feel it—a faint ripple in the air, a presence he hadn’t noticed before. Someone else was here.

He wasn’t alone.

---

On the other side of the same warehouse, Daniel crouched atop a stack of crates, his piercing gaze sweeping across the open area below. He had been hired for the same job—a well-paying contract on the head of the CEO. Unlike Johnny, Daniel’s approach was methodical, patient. He studied his target, waited for the perfect moment to strike.

Killing had become second nature to Daniel. There was no remorse, no guilt. In this world, it was kill or be killed, and he had chosen the former long ago. He didn’t care about anyone anymore, not after losing everything that had once mattered to him.

He watched as the target entered the building, oblivious to the fate that awaited him. Daniel’s muscles tensed, ready to make his move, when he sensed something—a shift in the shadows.

A figure moved in the periphery of his vision.

Another assassin.

Daniel cursed under his breath. He had dealt with competition before, but something about the silhouette set his nerves on edge. Whoever it was, they were good—very good.

He adjusted his grip on his gun, calculating his next move. This job had just become more complicated.

---

Johnny slipped into the warehouse, his footsteps light and purposeful. He could see his target now, pacing nervously in the center of the room. He was about to strike when movement from above caught his attention.

His eyes narrowed as he spotted the man crouched on a stack of crates. Daniel LaRusso.

Johnny knew who he was—another ghost in the world of assassins, just like him. Their paths had crossed before, but never this close, never like this. Daniel’s reputation preceded him, and Johnny knew better than to underestimate him.

Their eyes met across the room, a silent acknowledgment of the deadly game they were now playing.

Without a word, they both moved at the same time.

---

The warehouse erupted into chaos as Johnny and Daniel lunged at each other. Blades clashed, gunfire echoed, and the sounds of their struggle filled the empty space.

Johnny moved with brutal strength, every strike meant to incapacitate, to kill. But Daniel was faster, his movements precise and calculated, each counter leaving Johnny on the defensive. They were evenly matched—two predators, each determined to come out on top.

For what felt like an eternity, they fought. Blood dripped from cuts and wounds, both of them pushing past the pain, neither willing to give an inch. But it wasn’t long before their fight took its toll. Johnny’s side was slashed open by one of Daniel’s strikes, while Daniel sported a deep gash on his shoulder from Johnny’s knife.

Breathing heavily, they staggered back, both knowing that continuing the fight would only result in mutual destruction. They were both too wounded, too exhausted to finish what they had started.

Johnny wiped the blood from his lip, glaring at Daniel. “You ruined my job, LaRusso.”

Daniel, equally out of breath, scoffed. “I could say the same about you.”

A tense silence hung between them, broken only by the sound of their labored breathing. They should have killed each other right then and there. It would have been the cleanest, most efficient solution. But something held them back—a curiosity, a sense of recognition.

Without another word, they both turned and left, leaving the job unfinished.

---

The next few days were strange. Johnny found himself thinking about Daniel more than he cared to admit. That fight had been different from any he’d experienced before. LaRusso was smart, calculated—he wasn’t just another faceless opponent. He was dangerous, but in a way that intrigued Johnny.

And Johnny hated that it intrigued him.

Meanwhile, Daniel couldn’t shake the encounter either. His shoulder ached from the wound Johnny had inflicted, but it wasn’t the pain that bothered him. It was the way Johnny fought—as if there was something more driving him, something personal. Daniel had never felt so connected to someone in a fight, as if they were two sides of the same coin.

He didn’t like the feeling. It was too close, too real. He had spent years shutting off his emotions, keeping people at arm’s length. Johnny Lawrence was a threat to that detachment.

But despite his best efforts, Daniel found himself drawn back to the same areas where they had first crossed paths, his instincts telling him he would run into Johnny again.

And he did.

---

It started out as a few chance encounters. They’d spot each other across a room, in a crowd, or on the opposite side of a street. At first, they’d exchange cold glares, the memory of their last fight fresh in their minds. But gradually, something shifted.

The tension between them began to change. Their meetings became less about competition and more about a strange kind of understanding. They were both assassins, both living in a world of death and isolation. No one else could understand that, not in the way they could.

One night, they ended up at the same bar, both nursing drinks in a dimly lit corner. Johnny noticed Daniel first, sitting a few seats away, his eyes focused on the amber liquid in his glass. Without thinking, Johnny slid into the seat next to him.

They sat in silence for a while, neither acknowledging the other, but there was an unspoken truce between them.

Finally, Johnny broke the silence. “You here for a job?”

Daniel shook his head. “No. Not tonight.”

Johnny took a sip of his drink, eyeing Daniel carefully. “Good. I’m not in the mood for another fight.”

Daniel smirked, glancing at Johnny. “Neither am I.”

It was a simple exchange, but it marked the beginning of something new between them. They didn’t need to speak much after that—just sitting there, sharing the same space, was enough. For the first time in years, they didn’t feel alone.

---

Over the next few weeks, Johnny and Daniel began to see more of each other. It started small—running into each other in the same places, grabbing drinks at the same bar, exchanging brief conversations. But slowly, their guarded walls began to come down.

They never talked about their pasts, about what had brought them to this life of killing. It wasn’t necessary. They both understood the darkness that lived inside them, the choices that had led them here. What mattered was the present—the strange, fragile connection they were forming.

It wasn’t long before their conversations turned from surface-level banter to something deeper. They found themselves discussing their jobs, the people they had taken out, the reasons they had become assassins in the first place.

Johnny, who had always been brash and reckless, found himself opening up in ways he hadn’t expected. And Daniel, who had spent years building walls around his emotions, found himself letting Johnny in.

One night, after another long evening of drinks and quiet conversation, Johnny turned to Daniel, his expression uncharacteristically serious.

“You ever think about getting out of this life?” Johnny asked, his voice low.

Daniel considered the question for a moment. “I’ve thought about it,” he admitted. “But it’s not that simple.”

Johnny nodded, as if he understood. “Yeah. I know what you mean.”

There was a pause, and then Johnny added, “But maybe we don’t have to do it alone.”

Daniel glanced at him, surprised. There was something vulnerable in Johnny’s eyes, something raw. It was the first time Johnny had suggested anything more than their tentative friendship, the first time he had hinted at the possibility of something deeper.

Daniel wasn’t sure how to respond. He had spent so long keeping people at a distance, convincing himself that he didn’t need anyone. But with Johnny, it was different. He didn’t want to keep him at arm’s length anymore.

---

It happened one night after a particularly grueling job. They had both been hired to take out different targets, but their paths had crossed again, as if fate kept pushing them together. After completing their respective missions, they met up at Johnny’s apartment, both exhausted and covered in the aftermath of their work.

Johnny was pacing the room, agitated from the adrenaline that still coursed through his veins. Daniel watched him from the couch, his own heart still racing.

“You ever think about how messed up this is?” Johnny asked suddenly, his voice rough with frustration. “The killing, the constant looking over your shoulder. It’s exhausting.”

Daniel nodded, feeling the same weight pressing down on him. “Yeah. It is.”

Johnny stopped pacing and turned to face Daniel, his eyes burning with intensity. "What if we just... stopped? What if we walked away from all of this?"

Daniel was quiet for a moment, his mind racing. He had thought about leaving this life before, but it had always seemed impossible. The assassin world had its own gravity, pulling you deeper and deeper until escape was a distant fantasy. And yet, hearing Johnny say it out loud, it felt like there might actually be a way out—if only they were brave enough to take it.

Johnny's blue eyes searched Daniel's, looking for an answer, a sign of agreement, or even just a glimmer of hope. The room fell into an intense silence, the tension hanging between them so thick it was nearly suffocating.

"Johnny..." Daniel started, unsure of what he was even trying to say. "What if... what if we can't leave this behind? What if it's all we've got?"

Johnny stepped closer, his face softening for the first time that night. "No, Daniel. We have each other. That’s what matters." His voice wavered slightly, as if he were admitting something he hadn’t said aloud to anyone before.

The vulnerability in Johnny's eyes struck a chord deep inside Daniel, breaking down the last of his walls. There was something magnetic about this man, something that made Daniel want to believe in him, believe that they could escape the darkness that had consumed them for so long. In that moment, he wasn’t thinking about the blood on their hands, or the mistakes that had led them to this point. He was only thinking about Johnny.

Without fully understanding what he was doing, Daniel stood from the couch and closed the distance between them. They were so close now, he could feel the warmth radiating from Johnny's body. For the first time in years, Daniel felt alive—not from the thrill of a kill, but from something much deeper, something more dangerous than any weapon they’d ever wielded.

Johnny’s breath hitched as Daniel stood before him, their faces inches apart. “Daniel…”

Before either of them could think, Daniel reached out and grabbed Johnny’s collar, pulling him into a kiss. It wasn’t soft or hesitant. It was hungry, desperate—like two men who had spent too long keeping their emotions locked away. Johnny’s lips crashed against his with equal intensity, his hands instinctively finding their way to Daniel’s waist, pulling him closer.

For a moment, nothing else existed. The world outside, their pasts, their bloody histories—it all faded away in the heat of the kiss. Johnny’s lips were warm, rough, and Daniel felt a fire ignite inside him that he hadn’t even realized had been burning all this time.

When they finally pulled away, both men were breathless, their hearts pounding in unison. Daniel stared at Johnny, his mind still reeling from what had just happened. But there was no regret in Johnny’s eyes—only the same mix of longing and relief that Daniel felt in his own chest.

“Guess we just... crossed a line,” Johnny said, his voice low and gravelly, but with a hint of humour beneath the surface.

Daniel smirked, trying to catch his breath. “Maybe that’s the line we were supposed to cross a long time ago.”

Johnny chuckled, his hand still resting on Daniel’s hip, fingers tracing absent patterns. “So, now what?”

Daniel looked into Johnny’s eyes, feeling the weight of the question. He could see the uncertainty there, but also hope—hope that maybe, just maybe, they could have something more than the darkness they’d been living in. They had spent their lives running, hiding behind their assassin personas. But together, they could find a way to stop.

"We leave," Daniel said, surprising even himself with how certain he sounded. "We walk away from this life, from all of it. We disappear."

Johnny nodded, his lips curling into a small, crooked smile. “Together?”

“Yeah,” Daniel whispered, the truth of that word settling into his bones. “Together.”

---

Over the next few days, Johnny and Daniel made plans. It wasn’t going to be easy—they both knew that leaving the assassin world came with risks. Their clients wouldn’t take kindly to losing two of their best killers, and there was always the chance that someone would come after them. But for the first time in years, they had something to fight for other than survival. They had each other.

They spent those final days tying up loose ends, making sure that no one could trace them once they disappeared. Johnny used his connections to secure new identities for them, while Daniel quietly severed ties with his old life. It was a dangerous game they were playing, but the thrill of it was nothing compared to the anticipation of finally being free.

And through it all, their relationship deepened. What had started as a tenuous truce between enemies had blossomed into something neither of them had ever expected—love. It was strange and new, but also undeniable. Every glance, every touch, every kiss solidified the bond between them. They no longer felt like lone wolves, but two halves of the same whole.

One night, as they lay together in the small apartment they’d been using as a safehouse, Johnny turned to Daniel, his voice quiet in the darkness.

“You know, I never thought I’d have this,” Johnny admitted, his fingers lightly brushing over Daniel’s arm. “I never thought I’d have someone like you.”

Daniel smiled softly, resting his head against Johnny’s chest. “Same here. But I’m glad we found each other.”

Johnny pressed a kiss to Daniel’s forehead, his lips lingering there for a moment before he whispered, “I love you, LaRusso.”

The words hung in the air between them, heavy with meaning. Daniel’s heart swelled in his chest, and for the first time in a long time, he didn’t feel alone. He didn’t feel lost. He had found his way home—right here, in Johnny’s arms.

“I love you too, Johnny,” Daniel whispered back, his voice thick with emotion.

---

A few weeks later, Johnny and Daniel were gone—vanished without a trace. Their old lives, the world of assassins and contracts, was left behind. They had escaped.

They found a small, quiet town far from the cities and the chaos they had once known. It was a place where no one knew their names, where they could build a new life together, free from the violence and bloodshed of their past.

It wasn’t easy at first. The scars of their old lives ran deep, and there were moments when the darkness threatened to pull them back under. But every time they felt it creeping in, they had each other to lean on, to pull them back into the light.

Johnny found work as a mechanic, fixing up old cars in a small garage on the outskirts of town. Daniel started his own small business, using the skills he’d honed as an assassin to quietly gather information and help people with more legitimate problems.

And through it all, their love only grew stronger.

---

Years passed, and Johnny and Daniel settled into their new lives. They were no longer assassins, no longer haunted by the ghosts of their pasts. Instead, they were simply Johnny and Daniel—two men who had found each other in the darkest of places and had chosen to carve out their own path together.

On quiet evenings, they would sit on the porch of their small home, watching the sunset and reveling in the peace they had fought so hard to find. Sometimes, they would talk about their old lives, the battles they had fought, the people they had been. But more often than not, they simply enjoyed the silence, the knowledge that they had made it out alive—together.

Because in the end, that’s all that mattered.

No matter how dark their pasts had been, they had found a way to the light.

And they had found each other.

Chapter Text

Hawk was back. Not Eli, not the nerd he’d tried so hard to bury. No, Hawk was the confident, ruthless warrior he’d built himself into—thanks to Cobra Kai. But being in Cobra Kai came with expectations: strength, ruthlessness, and, most of all, loyalty to the dojo. That meant hating Miyagi-Do.

And that meant hating Demetri.

Except… Hawk didn’t.

Not even close.

In fact, if anyone ever found out what was really going on between him and Demetri, things would fall apart faster than he could say “quiet!”—the same word Sensei Kreese had barked at them over and over. Hawk needed to maintain his facade of aggression and domination, but hiding the fact that he was in a secret relationship with his supposed enemy? That was a fight he wasn’t sure how to win.

---

The afternoon sun blazed down on the LaRusso backyard as the Miyagi-Do students trained, their movements precise and deliberate. Demetri was among them, practicing his defensive techniques with focus, trying to block out the thoughts that always seemed to creep in. More specifically, thoughts about him.

Hawk.

Or Eli.

Whatever he wanted to call himself these days, it didn’t change the fact that Demetri had been falling harder for him every day. They were on opposite sides of a karate war, but that hadn’t stopped them from sneaking around, exchanging secret looks, and stealing kisses behind closed doors.

It had been almost a year now. A year of late-night texts, stolen moments between training sessions, and whispered reassurances that this—they—were real, even when the world wanted them to hate each other.

But it wasn’t easy. Being in Miyagi-Do meant standing up against Cobra Kai and everything they represented, and being in Cobra Kai meant fighting, literally and figuratively, to survive. Their relationship was like walking a tightrope between two opposing forces, and sometimes Demetri wondered if it would all come crashing down.

That thought stuck with him as the training session ended, and the students started to head home. Demetri lingered by the bonsai trees, pretending to be adjusting one of the small branches, but really, he was just waiting. He’d gotten a text earlier that day—one simple line.

Hawk: Meet me at our spot after practice.

Demetri’s heart had skipped a beat when he’d seen it. Their spot. The place where this whole thing had started. It was a small, secluded corner of the park, hidden away from the rest of the world, where they could be themselves without the pressure of their dojos or friends watching. It was where they could just be Eli and Demetri, not Hawk and some random Miyagi-Do nerd.

Once the backyard was clear, Demetri slipped out of the dojo, making his way toward the park. The cool evening breeze felt good after the day’s intense training, but his mind was racing. He hadn’t seen Hawk in almost a week, not since their last near-disastrous encounter at school, when Miguel had caught them talking in the hallway and Hawk had quickly covered it up by throwing some insult Demetri’s way.

Demetri had played along, like he always did, but it still stung. The secrecy, the lies, the pretending—it was all starting to take a toll.

When he reached the park, Demetri took a deep breath, making his way to their hidden spot behind the trees. Hawk was already there, leaning against the trunk of a large oak tree, arms crossed over his chest, his signature mohawk looking as fierce as ever. His face softened the moment he saw Demetri, though, and the tension in his posture melted away.

“Hey,” Hawk greeted, his voice low but warm.

“Hey,” Demetri replied, smiling despite the weight he’d been carrying. “I missed you.”

Hawk pushed off the tree and stepped closer, his expression softening in a way that no one else ever got to see. “I missed you too.”

Without another word, Hawk reached for Demetri's hand, pulling him close until their bodies were pressed together. Demetri sighed softly, the tension in his shoulders releasing as he leaned into Hawk’s warmth. Being with him always felt like coming home, even if they had to hide it.

“I hate this,” Demetri murmured against Hawk’s shoulder, his voice barely audible. “I hate that we have to sneak around.”

Hawk’s grip tightened on Demetri’s hand, and he pulled back just enough to look him in the eyes. “I know. I hate it too.”

Their eyes locked, and for a moment, everything else faded away—the rivalry, the pressure, the expectations. It was just the two of them.

Hawk cupped Demetri’s cheek, his thumb brushing gently against his skin. “But I don’t hate this,” he said softly before leaning in to press a slow, lingering kiss to Demetri’s lips.

Demetri kissed him back, letting himself get lost in the moment. Hawk’s lips were warm and familiar, and they moved against his with a tenderness that made Demetri’s heart ache. He could never get enough of this, of him. Even with all the risks, it was worth it.

When they finally pulled apart, both of them were breathing a little heavier, their foreheads resting together.

“I hate it too, but I’d hate not being with you more,” Demetri admitted, his voice barely above a whisper. It was the truth, as scary as it was. The thought of losing Hawk—Eli—was unbearable, even if it meant they had to keep hiding.

Hawk nodded, his hand still cupping Demetrii’s cheek. “I get it. And I don’t want to lose you either.”

There was a moment of quiet, just the sound of the wind rustling the leaves around them. Demetri’s heart was still racing, but now it wasn’t from anxiety—it was from being this close to Hawk, from knowing that despite everything, they were in this together.

“I wish it didn’t have to be like this,” Demetri said, his voice soft. “I wish we didn’t have to hide.”

Hawk sighed, pulling Demetri into another embrace. “Me too. But for now, we’ve just gotta keep playing it cool, you know? No one can know.”

Demetri nodded, resting his head against Hawk’s chest. He understood the stakes, but it didn’t make it any easier. Still, being with Hawk like this, even in secret, was worth it. He’d take these stolen moments over nothing at all.

After a long pause, Hawk pulled back slightly, his eyes searching Demetri's. “We’ll figure it out, okay? We always do.”

Demetri smiled, feeling a little lighter at Hawk’s reassurance. “Yeah. We will.”

Hawk grinned, the cocky smirk that made Demetri’s heart skip a beat. “And in the meantime…” He leaned in, brushing his lips against Dimitri’s ear. “We’ve got now.”

Before Demetri could respond, Hawk kissed him again, this time more intense, more urgent. Demetri melted into it, his hands tangling in Hawk’s shirt as he kissed back just as eagerly. Every time they kissed, it was like the rest of the world didn’t matter, like they could forget about the rivalry, the dojo wars, the secrets. It was just them.

When they finally broke apart, both of them were breathless, their faces flushed. Hawk’s eyes were dark with something unspoken, and Demetri felt a shiver run down his spine.

“I don’t care what anyone thinks,” Hawk said, his voice low but firm. “I’m not losing you, D.”

Demetri’s heart fluttered at the nickname, something only Hawk ever called him. He smiled, leaning in to press a soft kiss to Hawk’s lips. “Good. Because I’m not going anywhere.”

---

The next few days passed in a blur of training, school, and trying to act normal in front of their friends. It wasn’t easy—especially for Hawk. Being in Cobra Kai meant constantly putting on the act of being tough, of being someone who wouldn’t hesitate to take down a Miyagi-Do student. And with the All Valley Tournament approaching, tensions were higher than ever.

Hawk felt the pressure mounting with every passing day, and he knew Demetri felt it too. The thought of facing each other in the tournament made his stomach twist in knots, but he pushed it aside. They’d cross that bridge when they got to it.

One afternoon, after a particularly brutal Cobra Kai session, Hawk found himself alone in the locker room, his fists clenched as he tried to calm his breathing. The fight with Miyagi-Do was getting more intense by the day, and Kreese’s constant demands for aggression were taking their toll.

His phone buzzed in his pocket, and he pulled it out, his heart skipping a beat when he saw Demetri’s name on the screen.

Demetri: Can you meet? I need to see you.

Hawk hesitated for only a second before typing back.

Hawk: Yeah, same place?

Demetri: Yeah.

Hawk shoved his phone back in his pocket, grabbing his jacket and heading out of the dojo. He couldn’t wait to see Demetri. After the day he’d had, all he wanted was to be with the one person who made everything feel okay.

When he arrived at the park, Demetri was already there, sitting on the same blanket they’d brought a few weeks ago, back when things had felt simpler. Demetri looked up when Hawk approached, his eyes softening when he saw him. Hawk's heart fluttered at the sight of Demetri sitting there, looking as though he’d been waiting for him forever. Without hesitation, Hawk dropped down next to him, their knees brushing together.

“You okay?” Demetri asked softly, sensing the tension that still radiated off Hawk from his training session.

Hawk nodded, though his jaw was still tight. “I just needed to see you. Today was… rough.”

Demetris hand found Hawk’s, their fingers threading together. “Same. I hate how things are getting so intense, especially with the tournament coming up.”

Hawk exhaled slowly, turning to look at Demetri. “I know. It’s all anyone talks about at Cobra Kai. How we’re going to crush Miyagi-Do. It’s just… it’s getting harder to keep pretending.”

Demetri squeezed his hand, his thumb brushing gently across Hawk’s knuckles. “I know what you mean. Sometimes it feels like everything’s closing in.”

For a moment, they sat in silence, the weight of their situation pressing down on them. It felt like they were trapped between two worlds—one where they had to be enemies, and one where they could be together. Hawk hated it. He hated the pressure, the secrecy, the constant fear that someone would find out.

But more than anything, he hated the idea of losing Demetri.

Hawk leaned in, resting his forehead against Demetri’s. “I don’t care what anyone thinks. I just… I need you, D. I don’t know how to do this without you.”

Demetri’s breath hitched at the raw honesty in Hawk’s voice. He had always seen the boy behind the bravado, behind the mohawk and the tough exterior. He had always known that Eli was still in there, and right now, he was speaking to him, not Hawk.

“You don’t have to do it without me,” Demetri whispered, cupping Hawk’s cheek. “I’m right here. And I’m not going anywhere.”

Hawk’s heart swelled at Demetri’s words, and without thinking, he closed the small distance between them, capturing Demetri’s lips in a kiss. It was soft at first, hesitant, as if they were both afraid of what might happen if they gave in completely. But then, like always, the familiar warmth spread through them, and the kiss deepened.

Hawk’s hand slid to the back of Demetri’s neck, pulling him closer, while Demetri’s free hand gripped Hawk’s shirt, holding him like he never wanted to let go. The world around them disappeared—there were no dojos, no rivalries, no tournaments. Just the two of them, lost in each other.

When they finally pulled apart, their foreheads pressed together, both of them were breathing heavily, their faces flushed. Hawk’s heart was racing, but this time, it wasn’t from anxiety—it was from the rush of being with Demetri, of knowing that, despite everything, they had this.

Demetri smiled, his eyes shining with affection. “You know,” he said softly, “we should probably be worried about someone seeing us.”

Hawk chuckled, though the sound was still a little breathless. “I don’t care. Let them see.”

Demetri raised an eyebrow. “Really? You, of all people, are saying that?”

Hawk grinned, his thumb brushing over Demetri’s bottom lip. “Yeah. I mean, what are they going to do? We’re already in too deep.”

Demetri laughed, a soft, sweet sound that made Hawk’s chest feel lighter. “True. But maybe we should still keep this on the down low until after the tournament.”

Hawk sighed dramatically. “Fine. But after the tournament, we’re telling everyone.”

Demetri smirked. “Deal. But until then, we’ll just have to keep sneaking around and stealing kisses like we always do.”

Hawk pulled him closer again, his lips hovering just over Demetri’s. “I’m okay with that.”

And then he kissed him again, slower this time, savouring the moment. Demetri’s lips were soft and familiar, and Hawk couldn’t get enough of them. It was moments like this that made everything else worth it—the secrecy, the lies, the pressure. Because when he was with Demetri, none of that mattered. They were just two boys, in love, and that was all that mattered.

As the sun began to set behind them, casting the park in a soft orange glow, Hawk and Demetri lay back on the blanket, their hands still intertwined. They talked quietly, about everything and nothing, sharing small smiles and the occasional kiss. The tension from earlier faded, replaced by the comfort of being with the person who understood them better than anyone else.

“I wish we could just… stay like this forever,” Demetri murmured, his head resting on Hawk’s shoulder.

“Me too,” Hawk replied, pressing a soft kiss to the top of Demetri’s head. “But we’ll figure it out. After the tournament, we won’t have to hide anymore.”

Demetri looked up at him, his eyes filled with hope. “You really mean that?”

Hawk nodded, his gaze steady. “Yeah, I do. I’m done pretending, D. I’m done acting like I don’t care. Because I do. About you.”

Demetri’s smile was soft but genuine, and he leaned up to kiss Hawk again, his heart feeling lighter than it had in days. “I care about you too. So much.”

They lay there for a long time, watching the sky change colors as the sun set completely. The world around them faded into darkness, but in that moment, Hawk and Demetri were each other’s light, holding onto each other like they were the only thing that mattered.

As the stars started to twinkle above them, Hawk turned his head to look at Demetri, his heart full. “After the tournament,” he said again, his voice firm. “We won’t hide anymore. We’ll be together, out in the open.”

Demetri smiled, his fingers lacing through Hawk’s once more. “I can’t wait.”

They kissed again, slowly, sweetly, and when they finally pulled apart, both of them were grinning.

Whatever came next—tournaments, rivalries, secrets—they would face it together. Because no matter how different their paths were, no matter how many people tried to keep them apart, they had each other.

And that was enough.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

It had started as an inside joke between Daniel and Johnny, a playful jab at each other that had grown over time. Whenever they were out with friends, someone—usually Robby or Amanda—would jokingly ask, “So when’s the wedding, you two?”

Daniel would roll his eyes and laugh. “Yeah, right! As if!” while Johnny would smirk and add, “I’d need to get a ring first.”

But behind those laughs lay a truth that neither of them fully acknowledged. They had been dating for over two years, and the bond they shared was stronger than either had anticipated. Their playful banter and lighthearted teasing had transformed into something deeper, and what started as a rivalry had blossomed into a passionate romance.

Daniel loved how Johnny challenged him, and Johnny cherished how Daniel grounded him. They had become inseparable, navigating life together while still keeping their individuality intact.

Yet, the incessant joking about marriage had begun to wear on Daniel. Sometimes, he found himself daydreaming about a future with Johnny, wondering what it would be like to commit to one another in a more official capacity. But with those thoughts came the insecurities—was he getting ahead of himself? Did Johnny even want that kind of future?

They were lying on the couch one lazy Saturday afternoon, surrounded by half-eaten pizza and a plethora of video games scattered across the coffee table. Johnny had his arm draped lazily over Daniel’s shoulders, his fingers absentmindedly playing with the hair at the nape of Daniel’s neck. They were currently engaged in a heated gaming session, both vying for the title of champion.

“Come on, man! You can’t keep spamming that move!” Daniel exclaimed, laughing as he fumbled the controller.

“Maybe if you weren’t so predictable!” Johnny shot back, a cheeky grin on his face. “You should really think about your next move… like, I don’t know, how about when you’re gonna finally say yes to my proposal?”

“Very funny,” Daniel laughed, nudging him with his elbow. “Maybe if I had a ring, I’d think about it.”

Johnny chuckled, the light in his eyes glimmering with mischief. “I’ll get right on that—right after I beat you at this game.”

---

As the weeks passed, the jokes continued to fly. The friends would tease about wedding plans and planning the “big day,” completely oblivious to how deeply it affected Daniel. He knew Johnny wasn’t ready for marriage, and he was okay with it—at least he thought he was.

But as each day turned into weeks, Daniel started to feel the weight of the jokes. They all seemed to enjoy the banter, but deep down, he was left with a lingering question: was this just a joke, or could it be something more?

Then came that fateful Friday evening. Johnny had mentioned that he wanted to take Daniel out for dinner, insisting it was a surprise. They ended up at a cozy little Italian restaurant that had become one of their favorites. Candlelight flickered on their table, casting soft shadows around them as they shared plates of pasta, wine, and laughter.

Throughout dinner, the jokes came up again, but this time, there was a different energy in the air. Johnny had been a little quieter, a thoughtful look in his eyes as he played with his food.

“What’s up with you?” Daniel asked, cocking his head to the side. “You seem a little distracted.”

Johnny looked up, a flicker of something passing through his gaze. “Just thinking about something.”

“Like what?” Daniel pressed, intrigued.

“Just… how people keep asking when we’re getting married,” Johnny said, a hint of a smile breaking through his thoughtful demeanor. “Maybe we should give them a real answer.”

Daniel chuckled, shaking his head. “Yeah, right! Like that’s ever gonna happen.”

“You never know,” Johnny replied, his tone suddenly serious. He paused for a moment, as if gathering his thoughts. “Maybe I should ask you right now.”

Daniel raised an eyebrow, unsure whether Johnny was joking. “You mean like—”

“Yes,” Johnny interrupted, his eyes locking onto Daniel’s. “Like, right now. Would you marry me?”

Daniel’s heart stopped. “Wait, are you serious?”

Johnny pulled a small velvet box from his pocket, and as he opened it, Daniel gasped. Inside was a simple but beautiful silver ring, the diamond catching the candlelight perfectly.

“Holy shit, Johnny! You actually bought a ring?” Daniel’s voice wavered, shock flooding through him.

Johnny smiled nervously, the corners of his mouth twitching upward. “I know this isn’t how we usually do things, but I want you to know how serious I am about us. So, Daniel LaRusso, will you marry me?”

Time seemed to freeze as Daniel stared at the ring, his heart racing. This was the moment he had never truly allowed himself to imagine, and yet here it was, unfolding in front of him.

“Are you serious?” Daniel whispered again, his voice barely audible.

Johnny nodded, his expression earnest. “Yeah, I’m serious. I love you, man. I’ve loved you since we first started dating, and I don’t want to keep playing this game of pretend. I want a future with you. So, what do you say?”

Tears prickled at the corners of Daniel’s eyes. “You really mean it?”

“Absolutely,” Johnny replied, his voice steady.

With a mix of disbelief and joy, Daniel looked from the ring to Johnny’s hopeful face. “Yes! Yes, I’ll marry you!”

Johnny grinned, a mixture of relief and excitement washing over him. He slipped the ring onto Daniel’s finger, and the moment their hands touched, a spark ignited between them. Daniel couldn’t contain his excitement; he leaned across the table and captured Johnny’s lips in a fervent kiss.

Their kiss was electric, filled with all the laughter and love they had shared over the years. The restaurant faded away, the world around them dissolving as they poured their hearts into each other.

Johnny pulled back, his blue eyes sparkling. “I can’t believe you actually said yes.”

“Of course, I said yes!” Daniel laughed, his heart soaring. “How could I say no to that?”

Their laughter filled the air, and they spent the rest of the night celebrating their engagement, oblivious to the rest of the world.

---

Once they got home, the couple was buzzing with excitement. They were finally engaged! Daniel felt giddy, a mix of disbelief and joy swirling within him.

“Okay, so we need to talk about wedding plans,” Daniel said playfully as they collapsed onto the couch, still reeling from the night’s events.

Johnny chuckled, pulling Daniel closer. “You’re already planning it, huh? I just proposed; I didn’t think we’d be diving headfirst into planning tonight!”

“Come on! We’ve had the ‘jokes’ about marriage for so long; this is our chance to finally make it real,” Daniel said, grinning from ear to ear.

“Fine, let’s start planning,” Johnny relented, feigning reluctance. “But you know it’s going to be your job to figure out the seating arrangements.”

Daniel laughed. “Deal! As long as I get to pick the cake.”

Johnny rolled his eyes but couldn’t suppress a smile. “You and your sweet tooth.”

They spent hours bouncing ideas off each other, making plans and laughing until their sides hurt. It was a magical night filled with kisses and excited chatter, and neither wanted it to end.

---

Months later, the day finally arrived. Daniel was both nervous and excited as he stood in front of the mirror, adjusting his tie. He could hear the sound of guests arriving, their laughter echoing through the small venue they had chosen—a beautiful garden filled with blooming flowers and twinkling lights.

“Hey, you ready?” Johnny entered the room, looking dapper in his fitted suit, his hair styled just right.

Daniel turned, his breath catching in his throat. “Wow, you look incredible.”

Johnny smiled, a touch of bashfulness crossing his features. “Not as incredible as you.”

As they shared a quiet moment, their eyes locking, Daniel felt a rush of love that took his breath away. This was it—the moment they had both dreamed about. They were finally committing to one another, surrounded by their closest friends and family.

“Are you nervous?” Johnny asked, concern lacing his voice.

“A little,” Daniel admitted, running a hand through his hair. “But mostly I’m just excited.”

“Me too,” Johnny replied, stepping closer and taking Daniel’s hands in his own. “Whatever happens today, just know that I love you.”

“I love you too,” Daniel said, a smile spreading across his face. “And I can’t wait to spend the rest of my life with you.”

---

As they walked down the aisle, hand in hand, Daniel’s heart raced with joy. The decorations were beautiful, the setting perfect, and all he could focus on was Johnny.

They exchanged vows under a canopy of flowers, surrounded by their loved ones. Daniel couldn’t help but feel overwhelmed by the love and support enveloping them.

When it was time for the rings, Johnny’s hands trembled slightly as he slipped the band onto Daniel’s finger. “With this ring, I promise to love you forever,” Johnny said, his voice unwavering.

“And with this ring, I promise to always stand by your side,” Daniel echoed, his voice thick with emotion as he slipped the ring onto Johnny’s finger. He could feel the weight of the moment, the gravity of the promises they were making to each other.

The officiant smiled, and after a brief pause, declared, "You may now kiss."

Johnny didn’t hesitate. He leaned in, pulling Daniel close and capturing his lips in a kiss that was both tender and passionate. The applause around them was drowned out by the intensity of the moment, the feeling of finally being bound together in a way that neither of them had ever imagined possible.

As they pulled apart, both breathless and smiling, Daniel whispered, "I can't believe we're really married."

Johnny grinned, his blue eyes glinting with mischief. "Believe it, LaRusso. You're stuck with me now."

The guests laughed and cheered as they walked down the aisle together, hand in hand, as husbands. The world seemed brighter, the future full of endless possibilities. Everything they had been through—the fights, the jokes, the moments of doubt—had led them to this perfect day.

---

After the ceremony, the celebration spilled into the evening, with laughter, music, and dancing filling the air. Daniel and Johnny found themselves surrounded by friends and family, each congratulating them with heartfelt words and warm embraces.

As the night went on, they snuck away from the reception, escaping to a quiet spot under the stars. They sat side by side, hands intertwined, watching the twinkling lights above them.

"You know," Johnny began, breaking the comfortable silence, "I never thought I’d be the type of guy to get married. Especially not to someone like you."

Daniel laughed softly, leaning his head on Johnny’s shoulder. "Yeah, well, I never thought I’d fall for you either. But here we are."

Johnny turned, pressing a soft kiss to Daniel’s forehead. "I’m glad we are."

They stayed like that for a while, savoring the peacefulness of the moment. The sky stretched out endlessly above them, and for the first time in a long while, Daniel felt truly content. He had found someone who understood him, challenged him, and loved him for who he was.

"I love you," Johnny whispered, breaking the quiet.

"I love you too," Daniel replied, his voice full of warmth.

As they sat there, wrapped in each other’s embrace, they both knew that whatever challenges came their way, they would face them together. The jokes had turned into reality, and the future they had never dared to dream of was finally theirs to share.

Together, they would build a life full of love, laughter, and countless kisses—because, in the end, they knew they were exactly where they were meant to be: side by side, forever.

Chapter Text

Daniel and Johnny had always walked a fine line between rivals and allies. After decades of bitterness, they’d finally started to bridge the gap with an uneasy but functional partnership. They had come to a fragile understanding, working together to lead their dojos, all for the sake of their students and their families. But it was never easy. The history between them was too heavy, and their egos too large.

That balance was shattered one fateful night.

---

It had started as a minor disagreement in the dojo, as so many things between Daniel and Johnny did. They had been discussing techniques for a demonstration, each having strong opinions on the best approach. Daniel wanted to focus on defense and self-discipline, while Johnny argued for a more aggressive style.

“I’m telling you, LaRusso, these kids need to learn how to strike back. You can’t always win by playing defense!” Johnny’s voice rose, his frustration palpable.

“And I’m telling you that fighting isn’t about going in fists blazing!” Daniel shot back, his arms crossed. “You keep pushing this ‘strike first’ mentality, and someone’s going to get seriously hurt.”

Johnny scoffed. “Not everyone can just stand there and let their enemy hit them, like your Mr. Miyagi did. The world isn’t always going to hand you the perfect counterattack, Daniel.”

Daniel’s eyes darkened at the mention of Mr. Miyagi. “Don’t you dare bring him into this! Miyagi-Do is about balance and control—things you’ve never understood.”

“That’s because you’re too soft!” Johnny spat, his words laced with venom. “You’ve always been soft, LaRusso. That’s why you need to hide behind all this zen bullshit. You were a lucky kid back in ‘84, but look around—you’re not invincible, and neither are your precious students!”

Daniel’s fists clenched at his sides, anger bubbling up in him. “You’ve never changed, have you? Still the same bully, still looking for a fight! You haven’t learned anything from the past.”

Johnny’s face twisted in a snarl. “You don’t know me, Daniel! Don’t pretend like you’re some saint who’s never made mistakes. You think you’re better than me? You think I’m the one who can’t change?”

That was the breaking point. The years of tension, resentment, and misunderstanding boiled over.

“You know what, Johnny?” Daniel said, his voice low and cold. “I’m done. I’m done with this partnership, and I’m done with you. If you want to run your dojo into the ground, be my guest. But I’m not going to stand by and watch.”

Johnny glared at him, his face hard and unforgiving. “Fine. Get out. I don’t need you or your sanctimonious crap. You were always a pain in my ass.”

Without another word, Daniel stormed out, slamming the door behind him. The sound echoed through the dojo, as final as the silence that followed.

And just like that, the fragile alliance they had built was gone.

---

Weeks turned into months, and Daniel and Johnny didn’t speak. They avoided each other at every opportunity, their once-intertwined lives diverging completely. Daniel threw himself into running Miyagi-Do, focusing on his students, his family, and trying to convince himself that he didn’t care about what Johnny was doing. He worked late into the evenings, pushing himself harder than ever to drown out the lingering frustration and pain that gnawed at him.

Johnny, on the other hand, threw himself into Cobra Kai, working to expand his dojo and prove to himself that he didn’t need Daniel LaRusso or anyone else. He taught his students with even more fervor, pushing them to be strong, to be fierce, to strike first and never look back. But even as he did, there was a hollow space inside him—something missing that no amount of training could fill.

Their friends noticed the change. Amanda, Robby, and even Miguel all tried to get them to reconcile, but neither man was willing to budge. Too many harsh words had been spoken, too much pride stood in the way.

---

It was a rainy evening when the call came. Daniel had just finished cleaning up the dojo and was heading home, his mind preoccupied with the long day behind him, when his phone buzzed in his pocket. He answered without looking, expecting it to be Amanda reminding him to pick something up for dinner.

“Hello?”

“Mr. LaRusso?” A voice on the other end, unfamiliar and serious. “This is St. Joseph’s Hospital. You’re listed as an emergency contact for Johnny Lawrence.”

The world tilted on its axis. Daniel froze in place, the rain now seeming to pound harder against the windows of his car.

“W-what? What happened?” Daniel stammered, his heart racing.

“There’s been an accident. Mr. Lawrence was involved in a motorcycle collision. He’s stable, but he’s suffered some serious injuries. We thought you should know.”

Daniel didn’t remember the rest of the conversation. All he could hear was the pounding of his heart in his ears and the echo of Johnny’s name over and over in his mind. Without thinking, he threw the car into gear and sped off toward the hospital, the rain blurring the city lights around him.

By the time he reached the hospital, his hands were trembling. He barely registered the nurses at the front desk as they guided him to Johnny’s room.

When he finally saw Johnny lying in that hospital bed, bruised and bandaged, something inside him cracked.

Johnny’s usual strong, confident demeanor was gone, replaced by the fragility of his injuries. His leg was in a cast, his arm in a sling, and there were cuts and bruises littering his face. But it was the stillness of his figure that hit Daniel the hardest. Johnny was always in motion, always full of life—even when they were fighting. Seeing him like this, vulnerable and hurt, was almost unbearable.

Daniel stood frozen in the doorway, unsure of what to do or say. But then Johnny’s eyes fluttered open, catching sight of him. A flicker of surprise crossed his face, followed by something softer.

“Hey, LaRusso,” Johnny croaked, his voice raspy and weak. “Didn’t think I’d see you here.”

Daniel swallowed hard, his throat dry. “Of course I’m here,” he whispered, stepping closer to the bed. “They called me... said I was your emergency contact.”

Johnny chuckled softly, though it quickly turned into a grimace of pain. “Yeah... guess I forgot to change that. Old habits.”

Silence fell between them, thick and heavy with everything left unsaid. Daniel wanted to say something, anything to break the tension, but the words wouldn’t come.

“I’m sorry,” Johnny said suddenly, his voice quiet but firm.

Daniel blinked in surprise. “For what?”

“For everything,” Johnny continued, his eyes locking onto Daniel’s. “For the dojo... for the things I said... for pushing you away.”

Daniel’s chest tightened. Hearing Johnny apologize was something he never thought would happen, not like this. It was as if all the anger and resentment between them had dissolved in the face of what truly mattered.

“I’m sorry too,” Daniel replied, his voice thick with emotion. “I shouldn’t have walked away like that. I should have listened.”

Johnny shook his head weakly. “Nah... we were both idiots. Too much pride, too much history between us. But I don’t want it to be like that anymore.”

Daniel felt a lump form in his throat as he looked down at Johnny, the weight of everything they had been through pressing down on him. He didn’t know how to fix what had been broken between them, but one thing was clear: he couldn’t lose Johnny. Not like this.

“You scared the hell out of me, you know that?” Daniel whispered, his voice trembling. “I thought... I thought I was going to lose you.”

Johnny smiled faintly. “Takes more than a bike crash to get rid of me.”

Daniel let out a shaky laugh, his eyes misting over. “You’re a stubborn bastard, you know that?”

Johnny’s smile widened, though it was strained by the pain. “Takes one to know one.”

---

Over the next few days, Daniel visited Johnny every day in the hospital. They talked—really talked—for the first time in what felt like forever. It wasn’t easy. The walls they had built between them over the years were still there, but slowly, brick by brick, they began to tear them down.

It started with small conversations about their students, their dojos, and their shared history. They even laughed about the ridiculousness of their rivalry, how far they had come since that first tournament all those years ago.

But beneath the surface, something deeper was stirring. The unresolved tension between them—the feelings they had both buried under years of anger and denial—were bubbling to the surface.

One afternoon, after Johnny had been discharged and was recovering at home, Daniel came by to check on him. They sat on Johnny’s couch, the air between them thick with unspoken words.

“Johnny,” Daniel began hesitantly, “about everything that happened... I’ve been thinking a lot lately.”

Johnny raised an eyebrow, sensing the seriousness in Daniel’s tone. “Yeah? About what?”

“About us,” Daniel said, his heart pounding in his chest. “About what we’ve been through, and... how I feel about you.”

Johnny’s eyes flickered with confusion at first, then slowly with understanding. The air in the room seemed to shift, growing heavier as Daniel’s words hung between them.

“How you feel about me?” Johnny echoed, his voice uncharacteristically soft. He was staring at Daniel now, searching his face for any sign that he’d misheard.

Daniel swallowed hard, his throat dry. This was something he hadn’t planned on—something he hadn’t even fully admitted to himself until recently. But after everything, after seeing Johnny so vulnerable and hurt, Daniel couldn’t deny it any longer.

“Yeah,” Daniel whispered, barely able to meet Johnny’s gaze. “I care about you, Johnny. More than I probably should. I didn’t realize it until I almost lost you.”

Johnny was silent for a moment, his eyes unreadable as he processed Daniel’s words. Then, he let out a soft chuckle, shaking his head as though he couldn’t believe what he was hearing.

“Well, that’s... unexpected,” Johnny finally said, though his voice lacked its usual sarcasm. He was looking down at his hands, fidgeting slightly, something Daniel rarely saw him do. “I always figured we were destined to just piss each other off for the rest of our lives.”

Daniel managed a weak laugh. “Yeah, me too. But I guess... I don’t know, maybe there’s more to us than that.”

Johnny looked up then, meeting Daniel’s eyes with a seriousness that took him by surprise. “You’re not wrong,” Johnny said quietly. “I... I’ve been feeling the same way, even if I didn’t know how to say it. Hell, I didn’t even want to admit it. But when you came to the hospital... when I saw how much you cared...”

He trailed off, his gaze softening in a way Daniel had never seen before.

A thick silence stretched between them, and for the first time in their turbulent history, they were both completely vulnerable with each other. No more bravado, no more rivalry—just two men who had been through hell and back, finally facing the truth they had both been running from.

Daniel leaned forward slightly, his heart pounding in his chest. “So... what now?”

Johnny didn’t answer with words. Instead, he closed the small distance between them, cupping Daniel’s face in his rough, calloused hands, and pressed his lips to Daniel’s in a kiss that was both hesitant and tender. It wasn’t rushed or forceful—just an honest, quiet moment between two people who had been denying this for far too long.

Daniel melted into the kiss, his hands coming up to grip Johnny’s shoulders as the weight of the years of tension and unresolved feelings dissolved in that single, shared moment. It felt like everything between them had led to this—like this was the only way their story could have ended.

When they finally pulled apart, both breathless, Johnny smirked, his usual confidence returning. “Well, LaRusso, that was long overdue.”

Daniel laughed softly, shaking his head. “Yeah, it was.”

They stayed like that for a while, leaning into each other, the years of rivalry now feeling like a distant memory. It wasn’t perfect, and they both knew they had a long way to go. But for the first time, there was no animosity between them—only understanding, and something deeper that neither of them had been willing to acknowledge until now.

As Daniel rested his head against Johnny’s shoulder, feeling the steady beat of Johnny’s heart beneath his hand, he realized that whatever came next, they would face it together. Because that’s what they had always been, in the end—two fighters, stronger together than apart.

And this time, they were ready to stop fighting each other, and start fighting for what really mattered.

---

Weeks later, life had settled into a new rhythm. Their dojos continued to operate, the students none the wiser to the new dynamic between their senseis. To the outside world, it seemed like Daniel and Johnny had simply buried the hatchet and moved forward, their rivalry put to rest.

But behind closed doors, things were different.

Johnny and Daniel found a strange kind of peace in their new relationship. It wasn’t always smooth—arguments still flared, and their strong personalities clashed from time to time. But now, instead of letting their anger drive them apart, they used it as fuel to understand each other better. They’d fight, and then they’d make up—often in ways that were far more enjoyable than their old verbal sparring matches.

One evening, as they sat together on Johnny’s couch, legs entangled and a half-empty beer on the table in front of them, Daniel glanced at Johnny with a mischievous grin.

“You know, if someone had told me back in high school that I’d be sitting here like this with you... I probably would’ve thought they were crazy.”

Johnny snorted, taking a swig of his beer. “Yeah, well, same here. Guess we’re both crazy.”

Daniel chuckled, leaning his head against Johnny’s shoulder. “Yeah. Crazy... but it’s worth it.”

Johnny didn’t say anything in response. He didn’t need to. The way his arm wrapped around Daniel’s waist, pulling him just a little closer, said more than words ever could.

For the first time in a long time, they both felt like they were exactly where they were supposed to be—together.

And this time, they weren’t letting go.

Chapter Text

The night after the All Valley Tournament was supposed to be a victory for Daniel. He had won. He had shown everyone that the underdog could beat the odds, and he had made Mr. Miyagi proud. Yet, as the evening drew on, the weight of it all hung over him like a dark cloud. His muscles ached, not just from the fight but from the emotional exhaustion of the day. The thrill of winning was already fading, replaced by a strange hollowness. He had expected it to feel better, but instead, something gnawed at him, unsettled.

It wasn’t until the knock came at his door, heavy and irregular, that he felt a shift.

Who the hell would be knocking this late?

Daniel pushed himself up from the couch where he had been lying, too wired to sleep but too tired to do anything else. He opened the door cautiously, squinting into the dim light outside. The figure standing on his porch was the last person he ever expected to see.

Johnny Lawrence.

His face was a mess of bruises and scrapes from the tournament. His eyes were bloodshot, his body swaying slightly as if the ground beneath him couldn’t make up its mind to stay still. And then Daniel smelled it—the unmistakable scent of alcohol.

“Johnny?” Daniel asked, stunned. “What are you doing here?”

Johnny didn’t answer at first. He just stood there, staring at Daniel like he was trying to form words but couldn’t quite manage it. His mouth opened, then closed again, his shoulders slumping as if the weight of everything was dragging him down.

Daniel’s immediate instinct was to shut the door, to turn his back on the guy who had been nothing but a nightmare for him for months. But something stopped him. Maybe it was the way Johnny looked—completely broken—or maybe it was the fact that Daniel couldn’t shake the feeling that this wasn’t how it was supposed to end between them.

“Can I... can I come in?” Johnny’s voice was rough, barely a whisper.

Daniel hesitated for a long moment. He had every right to tell Johnny to get lost. But there was something raw, something desperate in Johnny’s eyes that made Daniel’s heart clench. He stepped aside, silently inviting him in.

Johnny stumbled into the house, his steps heavy and unsteady. Daniel closed the door behind him, the tension between them palpable.

“You’re drunk,” Daniel said quietly, stating the obvious.

Johnny didn’t respond. He just sank onto the edge of Daniel’s couch, burying his face in his hands. The room felt suffocatingly quiet, the ticking of the clock on the wall too loud in the silence between them.

“Why are you here?” Daniel asked, keeping his distance.

Johnny looked up at him then, and for the first time, Daniel saw something other than anger or arrogance in his expression. He saw defeat. Shame.

“I didn’t know where else to go,” Johnny admitted, his voice thick with the weight of the alcohol and something deeper—something darker. “I just... I needed to get out of there. Kreese—he—” Johnny trailed off, running a hand through his messy blond hair. “He’s lost it, man. I couldn’t take it anymore.”

Daniel frowned, recalling the scene at the tournament after Johnny had lost. Kreese had practically attacked him, grabbing him by the throat in front of everyone. Daniel hadn’t thought much of it at the time, too focused on his own victory. But now, seeing Johnny like this, it made him pause.

“Kreese has always been a psycho,” Daniel muttered, folding his arms. “But that doesn’t explain why you’re here.”

Johnny shook his head, his gaze dropping to the floor. “I don’t know, okay? I just—” He let out a bitter laugh, the sound harsh and empty. “I guess I figured if anyone would understand hating me, it’d be you.”

Daniel blinked, taken aback by the bluntness of Johnny’s words. The raw vulnerability in his voice.

“I don’t hate you,” Daniel said, surprising himself with how true the words felt, even as he said them.

Johnny looked up, his eyes narrowing. “Don’t bullshit me, LaRusso. I made your life hell.”

“Yeah, you did,” Daniel shot back, the anger bubbling up now. “You were a real asshole, Johnny. You and your stupid Cobra Kai gang. You made everything worse for me.”

Johnny’s jaw clenched, his knuckles going white as he gripped the edge of the couch. “I know. Believe me, I know. I’ve had nothing but time to think about it.”

“So what?” Daniel asked, taking a step closer. “You come here drunk, looking for what? Forgiveness?”

“I don’t know what I’m looking for,” Johnny snapped, his voice rising. “I don’t need your pity.”

“Then why the hell are you here?”

“I don’t know!” Johnny yelled, his fists tightening as he glared up at Daniel. “I don’t know, okay? I’m messed up. Everything is screwed up. I ruined everything, and now—” His voice cracked, and for a second, Daniel saw the cracks in Johnny’s armor, the carefully crafted image of toughness falling away.

Now it was Daniel’s turn to fall silent, watching Johnny as he struggled with emotions that clearly had been buried for too long. He wanted to stay angry. He had every right to. But there was something about seeing Johnny like this—broken, lost—that made it impossible to hold on to that anger.

“Johnny,” Daniel said after a long pause, his tone softer now. “You don’t have to keep doing this. Keep running from everything.”

Johnny let out a humorless laugh, rubbing his face with his hands. “What the hell else am I supposed to do?”

Daniel sat down across from him, feeling the weight of the moment press on his chest. “I don’t know. But you can’t keep going down this road. You’re better than this.”

Johnny scoffed. “Yeah, sure. Whatever you need to tell yourself, LaRusso.”

“I mean it,” Daniel said, more firmly this time. “You’re not Kreese. You don’t have to be like him.”

The room went quiet again, but this time, the silence wasn’t as tense. It felt... calmer. Like the storm between them had finally passed, leaving behind only the wreckage of their old rivalry.

Johnny leaned back against the couch, his eyes drifting to the ceiling. “You ever wonder how we got here?” he asked suddenly, his voice quieter now, more thoughtful. “How we went from fighting in high school to... this?”

“All the time,” Daniel admitted. “It’s crazy when you think about it.”

Johnny chuckled softly, the sound almost bitter. “I hated you back then, you know. I thought you were this cocky little punk, and I wanted nothing more than to knock you down a peg.”

“Funny,” Daniel said, smiling a little. “I thought the same about you.”

They shared a look then—something unspoken passing between them, a mutual understanding that had never been there before. It was strange, surreal even, to be sitting here like this after everything they had been through. But it felt right, in a way neither of them could explain.

“You didn’t deserve the crap I put you through,” Johnny said after a moment, his voice soft but sincere. “I was just angry at... everything. At Kreese, at my old man... and I took it out on you.”

Daniel nodded, his own anger softening as he listened. “We were just kids, Johnny. We didn’t know any better.”

Johnny’s eyes met his again, and for the first time, there was no hostility there. Just regret. And maybe something else—something deeper that neither of them had ever acknowledged.

“You didn’t deserve what Kreese did to you either,” Daniel added quietly. “I saw it. After the tournament.”

Johnny flinched slightly at the mention of it but didn’t deny it. “Yeah, well... I guess we’ve both got our scars.”

There was a long pause after that, neither of them quite sure what to say next. The tension between them had shifted, becoming something different—something unfamiliar, but not unwelcome.

“I should go,” Johnny said finally, pushing himself up from the couch with some difficulty. “I’ve already made a fool of myself enough for one night.”

But before he could take another step, Daniel stood up, reaching out to grab his arm. “You don’t have to go, Johnny.”

Johnny froze, looking down at Daniel’s hand on his arm, then back up at Daniel’s face. There was something raw and uncertain in his eyes, something vulnerable that Daniel had never seen before.

“Stay,” Daniel said, his voice barely above a whisper. “Just... stay.”

For a moment, Johnny didn’t move. Then, slowly, he sat back down, the weight of the world seemingly lifted from his shoulders just a little.

They didn’t speak after that. They didn’t need to.

For the first time in their lives, Johnny Lawrence and Daniel LaRusso sat in silence—no rivalry, no anger, no hatred. Just two men who had been through hell and back, finally finding peace in each other’s presence.

And maybe, just maybe, that was the beginning of something more.

---

Weeks passed after that night, and things between Johnny and Daniel changed in ways neither of them had expected. They weren’t rivals anymore, but they weren’t exactly friends either. It was something in between—something more complicated, more delicate.

Johnny still carried the weight of his mistakes, and Daniel still had his own wounds to heal, but the walls between them had begun to crumble. It was subtle at first—quiet nods of acknowledgment when they ran into each other, small conversations that didn’t end in insults. But over time, those moments grew into something more, something neither of them could deny.

One evening, months later, Johnny found himself back at Daniel’s house. This time, he was sober, and this time, he didn’t feel like a lost cause. They sat on the back porch, watching the sun set over the hills, the sky painted in shades of orange and pink. The quiet between them was comfortable now, no longer burdened by the weight of their shared history.

“I’ve been thinking a lot about that night,” Johnny said, breaking the silence. His voice was softer now, the usual bravado replaced by something more honest. “About everything we talked about.”

Daniel glanced over at him, his expression thoughtful. “Yeah?”

Johnny nodded, his gaze fixed on the horizon. “I don’t know if I’ll ever stop regretting the way things went down between us. But... I’m glad we had that conversation. It’s been good to have you in my life again.”

Daniel smiled, a small, genuine smile that reached his eyes. “Me too, Johnny. I never thought we’d end up here, but... I’m glad we did.”

For a long moment, they just sat there, the weight of the past finally starting to lift, leaving room for something new.

Johnny turned to look at Daniel, his heart pounding in his chest, though he wasn’t entirely sure why. “You ever think about... what could’ve been different? If we’d handled things differently back then?”

Daniel’s eyes met Johnny’s, and there was a flicker of something there—something deeper than friendship, something that had been building between them for months now. “Yeah,” Daniel said softly. “I do.”

The air between them felt charged, like the moment before a storm. Johnny swallowed hard, his mind racing. He had been avoiding this feeling for too long, pushing it down because it scared him, because it wasn’t what he had expected. But sitting here now, with Daniel beside him, he couldn’t deny it anymore.

“I don’t want to waste any more time,” Johnny said suddenly, his voice rough but certain. “We’ve been through too much already, and I’m tired of pretending I don’t—” He cut himself off, his breath hitching as he tried to find the right words.

Daniel’s gaze softened, his hand reaching out to cover Johnny’s, the touch grounding him, steadying him. “You don’t have to say anything, Johnny. I know.”

Johnny looked down at their hands, his heart racing in his chest. “But I want to. I need to.”

Daniel waited, his thumb gently brushing the back of Johnny’s hand, giving him the space he needed.

“I... I care about you, LaRusso. More than I ever thought I could. And I don’t want to keep running from that anymore,” Johnny admitted, his voice low but filled with conviction. “I don’t want to keep pretending that this... whatever this is between us... doesn’t mean something.”

Daniel’s breath hitched, his chest tightening at Johnny’s words. He had felt it too, the shift between them, the way their rivalry had morphed into something else—something stronger, something undeniable. “Johnny...” he started, but his voice broke, the weight of everything they’d been through pressing down on him.

Johnny squeezed his hand, his blue eyes full of vulnerability. “It’s okay if you don’t feel the same way,” Johnny said, his voice thick. “I just... I needed to say it. I needed you to know.”

Daniel stared at him for a long moment, his mind reeling. And then, without thinking, without overanalyzing, he leaned forward and pressed his lips to Johnny’s.

The kiss was soft at first, tentative, like they were both testing the waters, unsure of what it would mean. But then Johnny responded, his hand sliding up to cup the back of Daniel’s neck, pulling him closer as the kiss deepened. The world around them faded away, leaving just the two of them, wrapped in each other, finally letting go of the past and stepping into something new.

When they finally pulled apart, both of them were breathing heavily, their foreheads resting together as they tried to catch their breath.

“I feel the same way,” Daniel whispered, his hand still gripping Johnny’s. “I’ve felt this way for a while, but I didn’t know how to say it.”

Johnny let out a shaky breath, relief flooding through him. “Well... you just did.”

They stayed like that for a while, neither of them saying anything, just holding onto each other in the fading light of the evening. It was quiet, peaceful, and for the first time in a long time, Johnny felt like maybe—just maybe—he could finally stop running.

As the sun dipped below the horizon, Johnny pulled Daniel closer, pressing another kiss to his lips, and for the first time in his life, he felt like he was exactly where he was meant to be.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

The night had been a whirlwind—a collision of emotions and tension that neither of them had expected to end the way it had.

Daniel sat on the edge of his bed, head in his hands, trying to make sense of it all. The sheets were still rumpled, the faint scent of Johnny’s cologne lingering in the room, a reminder of what had happened. What they had done.

He couldn’t stop replaying it in his mind. The heated words, the way they’d pushed each other to the brink of frustration, the crackling energy that had built between them until it had finally exploded. What had started as a fight had ended in desperate, consuming kisses. Hands pulling, grasping, bodies pressed against each other in a way that felt both wrong and impossibly right.

Now, in the quiet aftermath, Daniel felt sick to his stomach—not because of Johnny, but because he knew he couldn’t let this happen again. He couldn’t allow himself to fall into the chaos that Johnny Lawrence always brought with him.

“This was a mistake,” Daniel had said, his voice shaky but firm as they lay side by side, the room still heavy with the weight of their shared heat. Johnny’s breath had hitched, his eyes wide with disbelief as he stared at Daniel, the sting of rejection already settling in.

“A mistake?” Johnny had repeated, as if he hadn’t heard Daniel right. “You can’t be serious, LaRusso.”

But Daniel had been serious. He’d forced himself to say the words, even as his chest ached. “We can’t do this again, Johnny. It’s too complicated. We’re too—” he paused, searching for the right word, “—different.”

Johnny had sat up then, his jaw tight, anger simmering just beneath the surface. “Different?” he’d echoed, his voice low and sharp. “What the hell does that even mean?”

“It means this can’t work,” Daniel had replied, running a hand through his hair, trying to ignore the pang in his chest as he looked at Johnny. “We shouldn’t have let it happen in the first place.”

Johnny had stared at him for a long moment, the hurt and confusion clear in his eyes, before he’d stood up, pulling his clothes on with quick, jerky movements. “Right. I get it,” he’d muttered, his voice cold. “This was just some one-time thing for you. Guess I shouldn’t be surprised.”

“That’s not what I—” Daniel had started, but Johnny had cut him off with a bitter laugh.

“Save it, LaRusso. I’ll see myself out.” And with that, Johnny had stormed out of the room, slamming the door behind him, leaving Daniel sitting there in the silence, heart pounding in his chest, already regretting the words he’d spoken.

That had been a week ago, and Daniel hadn’t been able to think about anything else since. He told himself he’d made the right decision, that it was better to shut things down before they spiraled out of control, but every time he closed his eyes, he could still feel Johnny’s hands on him, still hear the way his name had sounded on Johnny’s lips in the dark.

It wasn’t just the physical part, though. That had been incredible, sure—but there was something else, something deeper that had shifted between them that night. Something Daniel couldn’t quite put into words, but that scared him all the same.

He wasn’t supposed to feel like this about Johnny. They were supposed to be enemies, or at best, reluctant allies. Not...whatever this was. He didn’t know how to deal with it, didn’t know how to make sense of the emotions that had been simmering beneath the surface for months, only to explode into something neither of them could control.

---

On the other side of town, Johnny was struggling just as much. He hadn’t seen Daniel since that night—hadn’t been able to bring himself to. Every time he thought about it, his stomach twisted in knots, anger and longing warring inside him.

He’d replayed Daniel’s words over and over in his mind, trying to figure out where it had all gone wrong. They had connected that night in a way Johnny hadn’t thought was possible—not with Daniel, not after everything that had happened between them. It had been real, it had meant something.

But to Daniel, it had been a mistake.

Johnny didn’t know why it hurt so much. It wasn’t like he’d ever expected anything serious to happen between them. They weren’t exactly the type to have a normal, functional relationship. But after everything, after that night—it felt like something had been ripped away from him, something he hadn’t even known he wanted until it was gone.

He tried to drown the memories in cheap beer and late-night TV, but it didn’t work. No matter what he did, he couldn’t get Daniel out of his head. He couldn’t stop thinking about the way Daniel had looked at him that night, the way his body had felt pressed against his own, the way his breath had hitched when Johnny kissed him.

Johnny slammed down his beer, the anger bubbling up again. He shouldn’t care. He shouldn’t feel this way about LaRusso, of all people. But he did, and he didn’t know how to stop.

---

Two weeks later, Daniel found himself standing outside of Johnny’s apartment, his heart pounding in his chest as he raised his hand to knock. He didn’t know what he was doing here. He didn’t even know what he wanted to say. But he couldn’t keep going like this, couldn’t keep pretending that night hadn’t happened, that it hadn’t changed something between them.

The door swung open, and Johnny stood there, looking surprised—and a little pissed. “What the hell are you doing here, LaRusso?”

Daniel swallowed hard, his throat suddenly dry. “I—I need to talk to you.”

Johnny crossed his arms over his chest, leaning against the doorframe. “About what? Thought you made it pretty clear where we stand.”

Daniel winced. “I know. I shouldn’t have said that. I was—” He paused, searching for the right words. “I was scared, Johnny. I didn’t know how to deal with it.”

Johnny’s eyes narrowed. “Deal with what?”

“This,” Daniel said, gesturing between them. “Whatever this is between us. I’ve been trying to pretend it doesn’t matter, but it does. I can’t stop thinking about that night, and it’s driving me crazy.”

Johnny stared at him for a long moment, his expression unreadable. “So what? You want to take it back now? You want to pretend it wasn’t a mistake after all?”

Daniel shook his head, stepping closer. “No. I don’t want to take it back. I never did. I just... I didn’t know how to handle it.”

Johnny let out a bitter laugh. “You think I do? You think I know what the hell I’m doing with this?”

Daniel looked up at him, his eyes searching Johnny’s. “Maybe we don’t have to know. Maybe we just... see what happens.”

Johnny’s jaw tightened, and for a moment, Daniel thought he was going to push him away again. But then, Johnny stepped forward, closing the distance between them, his hand reaching up to cup the back of Daniel’s neck.

“You’re a real pain in the ass, LaRusso, you know that?” Johnny muttered, his voice rough but softer now.

Daniel’s breath hitched as Johnny’s thumb brushed against his skin. “Yeah, I know.”

And then Johnny kissed him.

It wasn’t like the desperate, heated kisses they’d shared that night. This was slower, more deliberate, like they were both trying to figure out what this meant, what it could be. But it was still just as intense, just as electric, and Daniel couldn’t stop the shiver that ran down his spine as Johnny pulled him closer.

When they finally pulled apart, both of them were breathing heavily, their foreheads resting together as they tried to catch their breath.

“So what now?” Johnny asked, his voice low, his hand still resting on the back of Daniel’s neck.

Daniel smiled, his heart racing in his chest. “I don’t know. But I think we’ll figure it out.”

---

They did figure it out, eventually. It wasn’t easy, and it wasn’t perfect—nothing ever was with them. They still fought, still argued, still pushed each other’s buttons in ways that no one else could. But now, underneath all of that, there was something else. Something stronger.

It wasn’t long before the nights they spent together became more frequent. They’d sneak moments alone, away from the dojo or their regular lives, where they could just be Johnny and Daniel, not rivals or enemies, but something closer, something more real.

And with every kiss, every touch, every heated night, they found themselves falling deeper into whatever it was they had built together. It wasn’t always easy, but for the first time in their lives, they weren’t running from it anymore.

And for both of them, that was enough.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

The quiet hum of Cerebro filled the underground chamber, its soft blue light reflecting off the metal walls. Charles Xavier sat in his wheelchair, hands folded neatly in his lap, eyes closed in concentration. The weight of the world pressed on his mind, as it had so many times before. But this time felt different. The threats were no longer just hidden in the shadows. They were advancing, looming on the horizon like a storm that would wipe away everything.

His chest tightened. It wasn’t just the humans this time. Mutants were tearing themselves apart, divided into factions, as if the battles over survival hadn’t already left enough scars on their kind.

"Charles," the voice came from behind him, low and familiar.

Charles didn’t need to turn to know who it was. He could feel Erik’s presence like a ripple in the air, an energy he had always been sensitive to—perhaps too sensitive.

"Erik," he said softly, without opening his eyes.

Magneto stepped into the room, his heavy boots echoing in the otherwise silent chamber. His dark coat swept around him as he approached, coming to stand just a few feet from Charles.

"It’s worse than I expected," Erik began. His voice was rough, worn down by years of battle and losses. He sounded older, more tired than Charles remembered. "Our people are at each other's throats, and the humans… they’re preparing for war."

Charles opened his eyes, focusing on the curved helmet Erik held loosely at his side. That helmet, designed to block him out, to protect Erik from the reach of his mind. It had always been a symbol of their separation, the literal and figurative barrier between them. And yet, here Erik stood, ready to fight by his side once more.

"I know," Charles murmured. "I’ve seen it."

For a long moment, they said nothing more. The silence between them was thick with unsaid words, regrets, and memories neither could quite bring themselves to voice. It had been years since they had last fought, and even longer since they had stood side by side.

"We can’t keep doing this," Erik finally said, his tone bitter but laced with a weariness that Charles hadn’t heard before. "You know it as well as I do. We’ve been at each other’s throats for decades, and what have we accomplished?"

Charles lowered his gaze. "Nothing. Or at least, not enough.”

"Exactly. And now… now we’re out of time."

Erik's hand tightened around his helmet, and Charles caught the faint tremor in his fingers. For all his strength, for all his power and conviction, Erik was still human—or mutant, perhaps, but vulnerable all the same. And Charles, despite everything, still cared.

"We’re fighting the wrong enemy," Charles said softly. "We always have been."

Erik looked down at him, his eyes shadowed but searching. "And what if it's too late?"

Charles met his gaze, holding it for longer than he should have. He had always been able to sense Erik’s emotions, the turmoil beneath his iron control, the anger and the pain. But there had always been something else there, too—something that Charles had never dared to confront.

"I don’t believe it is," Charles replied. "But we’ll need to work together."

A small, almost mocking smile pulled at Erik’s lips. "You say that like it hasn’t been the hardest thing for us."

Charles allowed himself a brief smile in return. "Perhaps it always will be."

Erik stepped closer, his eyes narrowing slightly. "Tell me the truth, Charles. Do you think we can save them? All of them?"

Charles inhaled slowly, holding Erik’s gaze. "I believe we can try."

Erik’s jaw tightened, but he didn’t argue. Instead, he glanced away, staring at the softly pulsing lights of Cerebro. When he spoke again, his voice was quieter, more uncertain. "We’ve wasted so much time."

Charles blinked, feeling the weight of those words settle between them. "We have."

He hadn’t expected Erik to admit it, to let the wall between them crack, even for a moment. But there it was, that familiar vulnerability that Erik so often kept hidden behind his armour.

For years, they had fought on opposite sides, torn apart by their beliefs, by their different visions for the future of their kind. But under all of that—beneath the anger and the betrayal—there had always been something more. Something neither of them had ever been willing to admit.

Charles’s heart beat faster, and he felt a lump form in his throat. "Erik…"

But before he could finish, Erik stepped forward, closing the gap between them in one swift motion. Charles froze as Erik reached down, his hand gentle but firm as he cupped the side of Charles’s face.

"I don’t want to fight you anymore," Erik said, his voice barely above a whisper.

Charles swallowed hard. "Neither do I."

And then, before Charles could say another word, Erik’s lips were on his.

The kiss was sudden, intense, filled with years of unspoken feelings and unresolved tension. Charles’s breath hitched, his mind reeling as he instinctively reached up, his hand resting lightly on Erik’s chest. He could feel the steady thrum of Erik’s heartbeat beneath his palm, grounding him in the moment, in the reality of it.

It wasn’t like any of the kisses Charles had imagined over the years—brief flashes of desire that he had always pushed aside, knowing that the chasm between them was too wide, too deep. This kiss was raw, filled with both yearning and frustration, as if Erik was trying to convey all the things he had never been able to say.

And Charles… Charles found himself kissing back.

For just a moment, they allowed themselves to forget the world outside, the war that loomed on the horizon, the lives that hung in the balance. For just a moment, they allowed themselves to be Charles and Erik, not Professor X and Magneto, not enemies or allies, but two men who had spent far too long hiding how much they cared.

But all moments come to an end.

Erik pulled back first, his hand lingering on Charles’s cheek for just a second longer before he let it fall to his side. His breathing was uneven, his expression conflicted.

Charles blinked, his own heart racing, his mind struggling to catch up with what had just happened.

"Erik," he began, but Erik shook his head.

"Don’t," Erik said, his voice tight. "Not now. We still have work to do."

Charles wanted to argue, wanted to reach out, but he knew Erik was right. This was not the time for confessions or reconciliations. Their people—mutantkind—needed them both focused, united, at least for now.

"You're right," Charles said softly. "We’ll deal with this later."

Erik’s gaze softened, just for a moment, before he turned away. "If there is a later."

Charles watched him go, feeling a sense of loss he hadn’t expected. Erik had always been a force in his life, a constant presence, whether as an enemy or an ally. But this… this was something different, something that had been building between them for years, even if they had both refused to acknowledge it.

But the world was crumbling around them, and they couldn’t afford to be distracted. Not now.

---

Days passed, and the threat loomed ever closer. The humans had mobilized, and factions of mutants had splintered off, some following extremists who saw violence as the only solution. It was chaos, and Charles and Erik found themselves in the thick of it, working together despite the tension that still hung between them.

Every conversation, every glance, was laced with unspoken words, but neither of them dared to bring it up again. Not while the world was burning.

But even as they fought side by side, even as they saved each other’s lives more times than they could count, the distance between them felt more profound than ever. Charles knew it wasn’t just about the war, about their conflicting ideals. It was about everything that had gone unsaid for so long.

He could feel Erik pulling away, retreating behind his walls once more, even as they fought for the same cause. And Charles… Charles wasn’t sure how to stop it.

The final battle came sooner than either of them had expected.

The skies were dark with smoke, the air thick with the sounds of explosions and the screams of those caught in the crossfire. Humans and mutants clashed on the streets, and it felt as if the world was tearing itself apart.

Charles and Erik fought together, their powers complementing each other in a way that felt almost instinctive. They had always worked well together, despite everything. But the battle was brutal, and they were both exhausted, their bodies pushed to the limit.

It wasn’t until Charles saw the flash of metal hurtling toward Erik that everything seemed to slow down.

"Erik!" he shouted, but it was too late.

Erik turned just as the sharp blade pierced his side, his expression twisting in pain. Charles’s heart lurched, and without thinking, he reached out with his mind, his power lashing out in a wave that sent their enemies scattering.

He was at Erik’s side in an instant, his hands trembling as he reached for him. "Erik, stay with me."

Erik grimaced, blood seeping through his fingers as he clutched his wound. "It’s… nothing," he rasped, but his voice lacked its usual conviction.

"Don’t lie to me," Charles said, his voice thick with emotion.

"Erik, please," Charles whispered, his voice shaking as he gripped Erik’s shoulder. His powers rippled through the air, trying to focus, trying to find something—anything—that could help.

Erik’s eyes cracked open, his breath labored, but even now, there was that familiar defiance in his gaze. "Always… begging, Charles," he said, his lips quirking into a weak smile. "You never could let go."

Charles felt a lump form in his throat. "I’m not letting go. Not this time. We’ve lost too much already."

Erik’s hand, slick with blood, reached up and grabbed Charles’s wrist with surprising strength. "You think I don’t know that?" he rasped. "But this… this is the price we always knew we might pay."

Charles shook his head, tears blurring his vision. "Not like this. Not like this, Erik."

Erik closed his eyes again, and for a moment, Charles feared he was slipping away. But then, Erik’s voice came, softer this time, more vulnerable than Charles had ever heard. "I didn’t want it to end like this either."

Charles’s chest ached, a desperate, raw feeling tearing through him. "Then stay with me. We can stop this, Erik. We can still make it right."

Erik opened his eyes once more, his face pale, his expression softening in a way that Charles hadn’t seen in years. He was no longer Magneto, the indomitable force who had defied the world. He was Erik, the man Charles had loved and lost so many times before.

"I always thought," Erik began, his voice so quiet that Charles had to lean closer to hear him, "that we were too different. That we would always be on opposite sides of the line. But…"

Charles’s heart pounded in his chest. "But what?"

Erik’s grip on Charles’s wrist tightened, and for a moment, his eyes locked with Charles’s, filled with something that felt like regret—regret, and something more. "But maybe I was wrong."

Before Charles could respond, Erik surged forward, his hand sliding up to cup the back of Charles’s neck, pulling him down into another kiss—this one slower, deeper, filled with everything they had never said. Charles could taste the bitterness of blood on Erik’s lips, could feel the tremor in his body as his strength waned, but he couldn’t pull away. He didn’t want to.

In that moment, there was no battle, no war, no ideological divide. There was just them—two men who had fought and loved and lost too many times, but who, even now, couldn’t let each other go.

When they finally broke apart, both gasping for breath, Erik rested his forehead against Charles’s, his voice barely a whisper. "You always did make things complicated."

Charles gave a breathless, broken laugh. "You never made it easy, either."

Erik’s lips twitched in the faintest hint of a smile, but his eyes were closing again, his body going limp in Charles’s arms.

"Erik, no," Charles choked out, panic flooding his senses once more. "Stay with me. Please, stay with me."

But Erik’s breathing was growing shallow, his face pale and cold. The wound in his side was deep, and no amount of psychic power could stop the damage already done.

"Charles," Erik murmured, his voice so faint it was almost lost in the chaos around them. "You need to finish this."

Charles shook his head, tears spilling down his cheeks. "Not without you. I won’t do this without you."

Erik’s hand brushed against Charles’s cheek, a ghost of a touch. "You’ll have to."

Charles clutched Erik’s hand in both of his, holding on as if sheer willpower could keep him alive. "I don’t want to."

Erik’s eyes fluttered open one last time, his gaze soft but unwavering. "You’ll carry on… you always do."

The weight of those words, of that final acknowledgment, crushed Charles’s heart. For so long, they had fought—against each other, against the world. But now, in these last moments, there was no more fighting. There was only the truth that had always been between them: that they had loved each other, in their own broken, complicated way, and that love had always been there, even in their darkest moments.

"I love you," Charles whispered, his voice cracking as the words left his lips. He had never said it before, not like this, not in a way that truly captured the depth of it. "I always have."

Erik’s lips curved into the faintest smile, his eyes softening. "I know."

And then, with one last breath, Erik’s hand slipped from Charles’s grasp, and his body stilled.

For a long moment, Charles could only sit there, his mind reeling, his heart breaking as he stared down at the man he had fought beside and against for so many years. The man he had loved, despite everything.

The battle raged on around him, but in that moment, Charles Xavier felt utterly and completely alone.

---

It was hours later when the fighting finally stopped. The threat had been neutralized, the remaining forces scattered. The world had been saved—at least for now—but Charles felt none of the relief that should have come with victory.

He sat in the ruined streets, Erik’s body lying still beside him, his mind numb with the weight of it all.

A few of the others—his students, his friends—had come to find him, to help, but Charles had waved them away. He didn’t want their pity, didn’t want their concern. Not now.

The sky was growing darker, the fires of the battle dying down, but Charles remained where he was, staring at the man who had been his greatest adversary and his greatest love.

He had known this was a possibility. They both had. But nothing could have prepared him for the reality of it, for the crushing sense of loss that gnawed at him.

"You always were too stubborn for your own good," Charles muttered, his voice rough with emotion.

But there was no answer. There never would be.

Charles closed his eyes, his hands trembling as he reached out with his mind, brushing against the remnants of Erik’s presence—faint, fleeting, but still there, still a part of him.

He would carry Erik with him, just as he always had. The war might be over, but the battle in his heart would never end.

And maybe… maybe that was what had always bound them together. Not their differences, not their ideals, but the simple truth that they were two men who had fought and loved in equal measure, two men who had never known how to let go.

Charles took a deep, shuddering breath, his heart aching with the weight of everything left unsaid, everything lost.

"I’ll make it right," he whispered, his voice barely audible in the stillness of the night. "I’ll make sure your sacrifice wasn’t in vain."

But even as he said the words, even as he made that silent vow, Charles knew that a part of him had died along with Erik.

He would carry on, as Erik had said. He would fight for their people, for the future they had both dreamed of, in their own ways.

But he would never forget. He would never stop loving Erik, never stop wishing for a world where they could have been together, without the weight of their pasts pulling them apart.

In the end, it had always been the two of them, against the world.

And now… now it was only Charles.

But he would carry Erik with him. Always.

Chapter Text

Erik's eyes snapped open, his breath catching in his throat as the world around him solidified. He was standing in a wide, sunlit courtyard, the faint scent of roses drifting on the air. The sharp contrast between this peaceful moment and the battle-torn world he had just left was so jarring that for a moment, he thought he might be hallucinating.

His hands clenched at his sides, and he focused, testing the magnetic fields around him. The iron in the earth, the metal pipes beneath the building—it was all there, humming with the same subtle energy he had always sensed. He was awake. This was real. But how?

He looked down at himself, noting with growing confusion that he was dressed in his old leather jacket and plain shirt, the clothes he hadn’t worn in years. His hands… they looked younger, not worn and weathered by decades of struggle and pain.

Then, from behind him, a voice, one he hadn’t heard spoken so casually in years.

"Erik! You’ve finally decided to grace us with your presence."

Erik froze.

Slowly, as if fearing that any sudden movement might break the fragile spell, he turned around. Standing just a few feet away, grinning like he had no care in the world, was Charles. His hair was thick and chestnut brown, his blue eyes bright with laughter, his smile wide and teasing.

Charles, as he had been. Before the war. Before everything had gone wrong.

Erik’s breath caught in his throat. He stared at Charles as though he were seeing a ghost—because in a way, he was. This man, this version of Charles, was long dead in Erik’s timeline. The Charles Xavier he had known in the end was broken, burdened by too many losses, their friendship turned to ashes long ago.

But this… this was the beginning. The early days of their partnership, their friendship. Before they had fought, before they had betrayed one another, before the chasm had opened between them.

"Erik?" Charles tilted his head, his grin fading just slightly. "Are you all right? You look… well, a bit like you've seen a ghost."

Erik swallowed hard, forcing himself to respond. "I… I’m fine." The words felt heavy and awkward on his tongue.

Charles’s smile returned, his gaze warm and inviting, as if there wasn’t a lifetime of pain and regret looming between them. "Good. Come, we’ve got a session planned with some of the students, and I was hoping you could demonstrate."

Students. Erik’s mind raced. He knew exactly where—and when—he was. This was early in the formation of Charles’s school, when they were still gathering mutants, offering them a safe place to learn and grow. They were still building something good. Something fragile.

"Right," Erik muttered, his voice rough with disbelief. "The students."

Charles didn’t seem to notice the tension in Erik’s voice. He turned, waving Erik to follow, as if everything were perfectly normal. As if Erik hadn’t just fallen back in time with the knowledge of everything that was about to come crashing down on them both.

---

Erik walked alongside Charles as they moved through the halls of the grand mansion, his mind spinning with questions and half-formed thoughts. He had no idea how he had been thrust back to this moment in time. No explanation, no warning. One moment, he had been in a desperate battle for mutantkind’s survival, and the next, he was here, at the start of it all.

He should have been panicking—his entire future depended on the course of these years—but instead, all he could think about was Charles.

Charles, alive and whole, smiling and laughing in that way he hadn’t done in so many years.

Erik couldn’t tear his eyes away from him. The last time he had seen Charles, it had been in the aftermath of yet another battle, both of them exhausted, bruised by years of conflict and betrayal. Now, Charles looked like a different person—like the man Erik had fallen in love with, though he had never dared admit it to himself back then.

Was this some kind of second chance? Was he meant to change things? To stop them from tearing each other apart? The temptation gnawed at him, curling in his gut with a dangerous heat. He could keep Charles safe this time. He could stop the war before it ever began, avoid all the mistakes that led to their fractured future.

But as the thought took root, Erik hesitated. What would that do? The timeline was fragile, and he had no idea how his actions might ripple through the future. Could he really risk altering the course of history, just for the chance to spare Charles—and himself—pain?

More than that, could he risk his heart again?

"Erik," Charles called softly, breaking through his reverie.

Erik blinked, realizing they had stopped. Charles was watching him with a concerned frown, his hand resting on the edge of a grand wooden table in what Erik now recognized as Charles’s office.

"You seem… distracted. Are you sure everything is all right?"

Erik swallowed, fighting the emotions that churned inside him. He had to play this carefully. "I’m fine," he said, softer this time. "Just thinking."

Charles smiled, though it didn’t quite reach his eyes. "Thinking too much, as usual." He leaned casually against the table, his arms crossing in front of him. "I know you have your doubts about the school, about my vision, but I think we can make something great here. Together."

Together.

The word struck Erik like a physical blow. He had forgotten how hopeful Charles had once been, how much faith he had placed in the idea that they could build a future together—where humans and mutants could coexist. It had been an impossible dream, and Erik had known it even then. But hearing Charles speak with such optimism now, knowing what lay ahead, twisted something deep inside him.

"We’ll see," Erik replied, his voice rough with the weight of everything left unsaid.

Charles studied him for a moment longer, then, as if sensing the heaviness in Erik’s heart, his expression softened. "You know, you don’t have to carry everything on your shoulders alone," he said gently. "You’ve always been… strong, but there’s no harm in sharing the burden once in a while."

Erik clenched his fists, forcing himself to stay still, though every instinct screamed at him to reach out, to hold Charles and tell him everything. How much he regretted what had happened between them. How much he wanted to change it. How much he had loved him, even when they had been enemies.

But he couldn’t. Not yet.

Instead, Erik nodded tightly, his voice hollow as he said, "I’ll keep that in mind."

---

The next few days passed in a strange blur. Erik found himself falling back into old routines, working with Charles to train the students, to teach them control and responsibility. But every moment spent with Charles was agony—a constant reminder of what had been lost, of what was yet to come.

He found himself watching Charles when the man wasn’t looking, his chest tightening at every laugh, every touch of his hand. He remembered each of these moments from his first time through, but now they carried an unbearable weight. Knowing what was coming—what would tear them apart—made every interaction bittersweet, as if he were living through a beautiful dream that would inevitably turn into a nightmare.

And yet, the temptation to change things gnawed at him constantly. He could stop Shaw earlier, prevent the war that followed. He could convince Charles to join him, to stand united before the fractures of their friendship deepened beyond repair. Erik could see the possibilities in every decision, every conversation they shared. But no matter how much he wanted to rewrite the future, he couldn’t shake the fear of what it might cost.

On the fourth night, after hours spent in restless thought, Erik made a decision.

---

Charles was sitting in his study late that evening, a glass of whiskey in hand, when Erik entered. The firelight danced across the room, casting warm shadows on the walls, and Charles looked up with a welcoming smile as Erik approached.

"Couldn’t sleep either?" Charles asked, nodding toward the other chair across from him. "Join me."

Erik hesitated only briefly before he took the offered seat. He had rehearsed the words in his head a thousand times, but now, sitting here with Charles so close, they caught in his throat.

Charles tilted his head slightly, his brow furrowing as he studied Erik. "You’ve been… distant these past few days," he observed quietly. "More so than usual, I’d say. Is there something on your mind?"

Erik laughed bitterly, shaking his head. "More than you know."

Charles’s eyes softened with concern. "You can tell me, Erik. You know that, don’t you?"

And there it was—the opening he needed. But as Erik opened his mouth to speak, to tell Charles the truth about who he was, where he had come from, and everything that was about to happen, he froze.

Because what if Charles didn’t believe him? What if he thought Erik was losing his mind, or worse, what if Erik succeeded in altering the timeline—only to lose something even more precious in the process? Could he risk their friendship, their bond, on the slim chance that he might save them from the future?

But he had already lost Charles once. And the thought of watching it all fall apart again was too much to bear.

"I’ve been thinking a lot," Erik began, his voice low. "About us. About what happens next."

Charles's expression softened further, his blue eyes filled with warmth and curiosity. “Us?” he echoed, his lips quirking into a small smile. “Now that’s not something I expected to hear from you.”

Erik felt his pulse quicken, but he pressed on. This was a risk, but it had to be taken. “Yes, us,” Erik said quietly. “I’ve… been thinking about the future. The choices we’re making now and what they might lead to.”

Charles leaned back in his chair, his gaze never leaving Erik’s. The flickering firelight bathed his features in a soft glow, highlighting the sincerity in his expression. “That’s natural, Erik. We’re trying to build something new here. Something that will last.”

Erik looked down at his hands, his heart heavy. He had to say it—he had to make Charles understand, but how could he explain the horrors that were coming? How could he tell him that every dream, every ideal they shared, would be shattered by the paths they were destined to take?

He took a deep breath and looked Charles directly in the eye. “What if it doesn’t last? What if… what if everything we build here falls apart? What if we destroy it ourselves?”

Charles frowned, clearly confused by the sudden intensity of Erik’s tone. “Erik, I know you’ve been through a lot, but you can’t give up hope before we’ve even begun. We’ve always known this wouldn’t be easy, but I believe—”

“You don’t understand,” Erik interrupted, his voice cracking slightly. “I’ve seen it, Charles. I’ve seen what happens to us. To you. To me. To all of this.”

Charles’s frown deepened, and he set his glass aside, leaning forward slightly. “What are you talking about?”

Erik’s hands trembled as he stood up abruptly, pacing the room in agitation. “I don’t know how or why, but I’ve been given… a second chance. I’m not supposed to be here, in this time. I came from years in the future—a future where everything we’ve fought for is lost. You and I, Charles… we aren’t allies. We’re enemies.”

For a long, tense moment, Charles said nothing. Erik couldn’t bring himself to look at him, couldn’t bear to see the disbelief or worse—the pity that might flash in those blue eyes. But finally, after what felt like an eternity, Charles spoke, his voice careful and calm.

“You’ve… seen the future? And we’re not together?”

Erik stopped pacing and turned to face him. Charles didn’t look incredulous or dismissive. He looked… thoughtful. “Yes,” Erik said softly, his voice heavy with regret. “We’re on opposite sides of a war. We’re both fighting for mutantkind, but we tear each other apart in the process. We become enemies.”

Charles’s face softened, his eyes filled with an emotion that Erik couldn’t quite name. “Enemies,” Charles repeated quietly. “You and me.”

Erik clenched his fists. “I don’t want that future, Charles. I don’t want us to fall apart. But I don’t know if it’s possible to change it.”

Charles stood slowly, his eyes never leaving Erik’s as he crossed the room to stand in front of him. “You’re saying that we’ve already made mistakes, that we will make choices that divide us?”

Erik nodded, feeling a knot of guilt form in his chest. “Yes. I betray you. And you betray me. And everything we fought for… everything we cared about is destroyed.”

Charles was silent for a moment, his gaze searching Erik’s face. Then, with a gentleness that made Erik’s heart ache, he placed a hand on Erik’s arm. “But we haven’t made those choices yet.”

Erik blinked, taken aback by the simplicity of Charles’s statement. “What?”

Charles’s eyes were filled with that same unwavering hope that Erik had both admired and resented for so long. “If you’ve seen a future where we’re torn apart, then we can stop it. We can choose a different path.”

Erik shook his head, his throat tightening. “I don’t know if it’s that simple, Charles. You don’t know what’s coming. The world… the humans, they’ll never accept us. And you’ll keep hoping for peace while I’ll keep fighting for survival.”

Charles’s hand tightened on Erik’s arm. “Then we’ll fight together. Erik, we’ve always been stronger when we’ve worked together. Whatever challenges the future holds, we can face them if we stand united.”

Erik wanted to believe him. He wanted to believe that this time, things could be different. But doubt still gnawed at him, the memories of battles, of broken promises, of standing across from Charles on opposite sides of a battlefield, etched into his mind.

“I don’t want to lose you again,” Erik said, his voice barely more than a whisper. “Not again.”

Charles’s expression softened even further, and he took a step closer, his hand sliding down to grasp Erik’s. “You won’t,” he said quietly. “You won’t lose me.”

For a moment, Erik felt that familiar pull between them, the same magnetic force that had drawn him to Charles all those years ago. It was as if time itself were bending, pulling them back together, offering them a chance to rewrite the story they had lived before. Erik looked into Charles’s eyes, saw the warmth there, the unwavering belief in him, and felt something break inside him.

Without thinking, Erik reached out, cupping Charles’s face in his hands. For a moment, they just stood there, the air between them thick with tension. And then, before Erik could second-guess himself, he leaned in and pressed his lips to Charles’s.

The kiss was soft at first, hesitant, as if Erik were afraid that the moment might shatter if he pushed too hard. But Charles responded immediately, his hands sliding up to grasp Erik’s shoulders, pulling him closer. The kiss deepened, years of unspoken feelings pouring out between them in that single, desperate moment. It wasn’t just a kiss. It was a promise, a vow that this time, they would try. They would fight for each other, no matter what the future held.

When they finally pulled apart, both of them breathless, Charles rested his forehead against Erik’s, his voice barely above a whisper. “We’ll change it, Erik. We’ll change everything.”

Erik closed his eyes, his hands still cradling Charles’s face. “I hope you’re right, Charles. I really hope you’re right.”

---

The days that followed were different. Erik carried the weight of the future on his shoulders, but it felt lighter now, as if sharing it with Charles had made it easier to bear. They trained the students, laughed together, and spoke of their dreams for mutantkind, just as they had before. But now, there was something else between them—a closeness that Erik had never allowed himself to feel in the original timeline.

At night, when the mansion was quiet, they would sit together, sometimes in silence, sometimes talking about everything and nothing. And some nights, they would kiss, slow and tender, as if each touch was a reminder that they still had time to rewrite their fate.

But Erik couldn’t shake the fear that still lingered in the back of his mind. He knew how easy it was for things to go wrong, how fragile the balance was between them. And no matter how much he wanted to believe that they could change the future, the doubt still gnawed at him.

One night, as they lay together in the darkness, Charles’s head resting on Erik’s chest, Erik spoke the fear that had haunted him for days.

“What if it doesn’t work?” he asked quietly, his hand brushing through Charles’s hair. “What if we still end up on opposite sides?”

Charles shifted slightly, lifting his head to look at Erik. His expression was calm, but there was a steely determination in his eyes. “Then we’ll find our way back to each other,” he said simply. “No matter what.”

Erik stared at him, his heart swelling with emotion. Charles believed in him, in them, in a way that Erik had never believed possible. And in that moment, Erik realized something that he had been afraid to admit before.

He didn’t just want to change the future. He wanted to build a life with Charles—a life where they didn’t have to be enemies, where they could stand side by side, not just in battle, but in everything.

Erik leaned down and kissed Charles again, softly, slowly, pouring every unspoken word into that kiss. “I’ll fight for you,” he whispered against Charles’s lips. “I’ll fight for us.”

Charles smiled, his eyes shining with emotion. “And I’ll fight for you, Erik. Always.”

As they lay there together, the weight of the future no longer seemed so heavy. They didn’t know what was coming, but they knew one thing for certain—they would face it together. And this time, they wouldn’t let anything tear them apart.

The future was unwritten, but for the first time in a long time, Erik felt hope.

Chapter Text

Anthony LaRusso never cared much for birthdays. Sure, there were always parties, family dinners, and gifts, but those were more for everyone else than for him. For the past few years, his birthday had felt more like an obligation than something to celebrate. That is, until this year.

This year, something was different. This year, there was Kenny.

It was still early morning, and the LaRusso house was quiet except for the gentle hum of activity downstairs as his parents prepared breakfast. His alarm hadn’t even gone off yet, but Anthony had been lying awake in bed, staring at the ceiling with a soft smile on his face, thinking about the day ahead.

He wasn’t smiling because of the usual gifts or family traditions, though he appreciated those. No, this time, he was excited for something—or rather, someone—else entirely. He pulled out his phone from under his pillow and saw that there were no new messages, but he knew better than to worry. Kenny was always a step ahead, and if there was one thing Anthony had learned about his boyfriend, it was that Kenny loved surprises.

Anthony’s phone buzzed in his hand, making his heart leap. It was a text from Kenny.

Kenny: Happy Birthday, LaRusso. Get ready for the best day ever.

Anthony felt his heart skip a beat, his lips curling into a grin. He quickly typed back.

Anthony: What are you planning, Payne?

Kenny: You’ll see. Just be ready after school.

Anthony couldn’t help but chuckle, the anticipation already building. He sat up in bed and stretched, the soft morning light filtering through his curtains. If Kenny was planning something, Anthony knew it was going to be special.

---

School dragged on longer than usual that day. It wasn’t because of the workload or the classes, but because Anthony couldn’t stop thinking about what Kenny had in store for him. His friends and family had already wished him happy birthday, and while it was nice, he was counting down the minutes until he could see Kenny.

During lunch, Anthony’s sister, Sam, caught him grinning at his phone for the hundredth time that day.

“What’s got you so smiley today?” she asked, raising an eyebrow as she slid into the seat next to him.

“Just… excited,” Anthony said, trying to play it cool, but the blush creeping up his neck gave him away.

“Uh-huh, excited about what exactly?” Sam’s knowing smirk made him feel like he was five again.

Anthony rolled his eyes. “If you must know, Kenny’s planning something for my birthday.”

Sam’s smile softened, and she nudged him with her elbow. “You two are cute, you know that?”

“Shut up,” Anthony muttered, though he couldn’t stop the grin that spread across his face. He quickly changed the subject, but Sam’s teasing didn’t stop there. By the time lunch ended, Anthony was practically vibrating with excitement.

---

Finally, school let out, and Anthony made his way to the front of the building, scanning the crowd for any sign of Kenny. His heart sped up when he saw him leaning casually against the wall, arms crossed and that signature smirk on his face.

Kenny was wearing his favorite hoodie, the one Anthony had teased him about because it was "practically a second skin," and Anthony felt a wave of affection wash over him. How did he get so lucky?

“Hey, birthday boy,” Kenny said as Anthony approached, his voice low and playful.

“Hey,” Anthony replied, his pulse quickening just from the sight of him.

Kenny stepped forward and, without warning, leaned in and pressed a soft kiss to Anthony’s lips. It was quick, just a teasing brush of lips, but it was enough to send sparks flying through Anthony’s chest.

Anthony blushed, glancing around to make sure no one had seen, but he couldn’t hide his smile. “What was that for?”

“Just saying hello,” Kenny replied, his smirk widening. “And happy birthday, of course.”

Anthony laughed, feeling a flutter in his stomach. “Well, thanks. So… what’s this surprise you keep hinting at?”

Kenny’s eyes lit up, and he grabbed Anthony’s hand, tugging him gently toward the parking lot. “Come on, I’ve got something planned, but you have to trust me.”

“I always trust you,” Anthony said, letting Kenny lead the way. He felt a warmth spread through him at the casual way their fingers intertwined, and the excitement bubbling inside him grew with every step.

They walked for a few blocks, the afternoon sun warm on their backs, before Kenny stopped in front of a familiar spot—the park. It was a quiet, hidden corner of the park where they’d spent plenty of time together over the past few months, sneaking away to share stolen moments between training and school.

Anthony raised an eyebrow. “The park? I thought you had something big planned.”

Kenny just grinned. “Who said it wasn’t big?”

Before Anthony could respond, Kenny led him down a small path toward a secluded clearing. As they rounded the corner, Anthony’s breath caught in his throat. Laid out in the middle of the grass was a blanket, surrounded by tiny string lights hanging from nearby trees. There were candles, snacks, and a small picnic basket, but what really made Anthony’s heart swell was the attention to detail. Kenny had set out all of Anthony’s favorite treats—chips, candy, and even the mini cupcakes his mom always made for his birthday.

“Surprise,” Kenny said softly, watching Anthony’s reaction carefully.

Anthony’s chest felt tight with emotion as he took it all in. “Kenny… this is amazing.”

“You like it?” Kenny asked, a little more vulnerable now, as if unsure of Anthony’s response.

“Like it? I love it,” Anthony replied, turning to face Kenny, his eyes wide with gratitude. “How did you even do all this?”

Kenny shrugged, trying to play it cool, but there was a hint of pride in his smile. “I had some help, but most of it was me.”

Anthony felt a surge of affection so strong it almost overwhelmed him. Without thinking, he stepped forward and pulled Kenny into a hug, burying his face in Kenny’s shoulder. “Thank you.”

Kenny hugged him back, his arms wrapping securely around Anthony’s waist. “Anything for you,” he whispered.

They stayed like that for a moment, just holding each other in the soft glow of the lights, the sounds of the park distant in the background. It was peaceful, and for the first time in a long time, Anthony felt completely at ease.

When they finally pulled apart, Anthony leaned in and kissed Kenny again, this time slow and lingering. It wasn’t rushed or hurried, just a sweet exchange that made his heart soar. When they broke apart, Kenny was smiling softly, his eyes full of warmth.

“Happy birthday, Anthony,” Kenny said quietly, his voice filled with affection.

“Best birthday ever,” Anthony replied with a grin, feeling a flutter in his chest as Kenny’s fingers traced soft patterns on his back.

They settled down on the blanket, surrounded by snacks and candles, and Anthony felt like he was in some kind of dream. They spent the next hour talking, laughing, and teasing each other, the atmosphere so relaxed and intimate that Anthony almost forgot they were in the middle of a public park.

“Okay, time for your birthday present,” Kenny announced, sitting up and reaching into the picnic basket. He pulled out a small, neatly wrapped box and handed it to Anthony, his eyes twinkling with excitement.

Anthony blinked in surprise. “You didn’t have to get me anything.”

“Of course I did,” Kenny replied with a grin. “Now open it.”

With a mixture of curiosity and anticipation, Anthony tore open the wrapping paper. Inside was a sleek leather bracelet with a simple silver clasp. It was understated but elegant, exactly Anthony’s style.

“Kenny… this is amazing,” Anthony said, his voice soft with awe. He ran his fingers over the smooth leather, feeling a warmth spread through him. “I love it.”

Kenny smiled, clearly pleased with Anthony’s reaction. “I thought it would look good on you. Plus, now you’ve got something to remind you of me, even when we’re not together.”

Anthony’s heart swelled at the thought, and he wasted no time slipping the bracelet onto his wrist. It fit perfectly, and he couldn’t stop staring at it, feeling a surge of affection for the boy sitting beside him.

“You’re the best, you know that?” Anthony said, leaning over to kiss Kenny’s cheek.

Kenny chuckled, his cheeks flushing slightly. “I try.”

They sat together for a while longer, the sun slowly setting behind the trees, casting a golden glow over the park. The atmosphere was so serene, so perfect, that Anthony almost forgot about the rest of the world. All that mattered was this moment with Kenny.

---

As the sky darkened and the stars began to twinkle overhead, Kenny shifted closer to Anthony, resting his head on Anthony’s shoulder. “You know, I was kinda nervous about today,” Kenny admitted, his voice soft.

Anthony glanced down at him, surprised. “Why?”

Kenny shrugged, his fingers absentmindedly tracing patterns on Anthony’s arm. “I just wanted it to be perfect. I didn’t want to mess it up.”

Anthony felt his heart ache at the vulnerability in Kenny’s voice. “Kenny, this is perfect. You made this the best birthday I’ve ever had.”

Anthony gently tilted Kenny's chin up, so their eyes met. “Seriously, I couldn’t have asked for anything more. You… you make everything better.”

Kenny's expression softened, and he smiled, the nervous tension in his body melting away. “I’m really glad you think so. I just wanted you to know how much you mean to me.”

The sincerity in Kenny’s words hit Anthony right in the chest. He had never felt so understood, so seen. He leaned in, pressing his forehead against Kenny’s, their breaths mingling in the cool evening air. The world around them seemed to disappear again, leaving just the two of them wrapped in the warmth of each other’s presence.

“You mean a lot to me too,” Anthony whispered, his hand gently cupping Kenny’s face. “More than I can even put into words.”

Kenny smiled, his eyes glimmering with affection. “You don’t have to put it into words.”

Before Anthony could respond, Kenny closed the distance between them, kissing him softly. It was slow and sweet, the kind of kiss that made time feel like it was standing still. Anthony’s heart fluttered in his chest, and he let himself sink into the warmth of the moment, his fingers threading through Kenny’s hair.

When they pulled away, both of them were grinning, their foreheads still pressed together. The sound of crickets chirping in the distance and the rustling of leaves in the trees was the only noise, and it made the moment feel even more intimate.

“Okay,” Kenny said with a playful smirk, “now that I’ve kissed the birthday boy at least three times, I think my mission is complete.”

Anthony chuckled, his heart swelling with happiness. “I think I could use one more kiss. Just to make sure.”

Kenny laughed, leaning in to give Anthony another quick kiss, their lips meeting in the soft glow of the string lights. “There. How’s that?”

“Perfect,” Anthony said, his voice soft and full of contentment.

They spent the rest of the evening lying side by side on the blanket, staring up at the stars, talking about everything and nothing. The night was filled with quiet laughter, shared memories, and the occasional stolen kiss. It was simple, but it was everything Anthony had ever wanted—just him and Kenny, wrapped in a bubble of warmth and love.

As the night grew colder, Kenny reached for Anthony’s hand, their fingers entwining naturally. “You know, I could get used to this,” Kenny said, his voice soft.

“Used to what?” Anthony asked, turning his head to look at Kenny, their faces close again.

“Us,” Kenny replied, his eyes searching Anthony’s. “Being together like this. It feels… right.”

Anthony felt his heart skip a beat at Kenny’s words. He smiled, squeezing Kenny’s hand gently. “It does. It feels like we’re exactly where we’re supposed to be.”

Kenny leaned in, brushing his lips against Anthony’s one more time. “Happy birthday, Anthony. I love you.”

Anthony’s heart swelled at those three words, and he kissed Kenny again, pouring every ounce of affection and gratitude he felt into it. When they finally pulled apart, Anthony rested his head against Kenny’s shoulder, feeling completely at peace.

“I love you too, Kenny,” Anthony whispered, a soft smile on his lips. “And this really is the best birthday ever.”

And as they lay there together, beneath the stars and surrounded by the quiet beauty of the night, Anthony knew that there was no better way to spend his birthday than in the arms of the boy he loved.

---

The End.

Chapter Text

The X-Mansion had seen its fair share of chaos over the years, but the playful prank war between Hank McCoy and Alex Summers had reached legendary status among the residents. It all started with a simple, harmless joke—Alex replacing Hank’s beloved coffee with a concoction that had tasted suspiciously like pickle juice—and escalated into an all-out battle of wits, skill, and creativity.

It had been going on for weeks now, a series of elaborate pranks that involved everything from carefully placed whoopee cushions to holograms that left the other utterly confused. The other residents, from Charles to Logan, had mostly chosen to stay out of it, watching with amusement as the two men took their rivalry to increasingly ridiculous heights. Even Scott, Alex’s brother, had warned them both that they might regret it.

But neither Hank nor Alex could back down now. They were too invested. Besides, it was all in good fun—or so they told themselves.

At the moment, Hank was hidden in his lab, surrounded by the scent of chemicals and the hum of various machines. His lab coat, usually pristine and pressed, was currently covered in a fine layer of flour—thanks to Alex’s latest prank, a flour bomb strategically placed above the door.

Hank had to admit, Alex had a certain flair for mischief. But Hank wasn’t one to be outdone.

With a smirk tugging at his lips, Hank carefully finished wiring the final part of his latest invention—a small device that would release a harmless puff of neon-colored smoke when triggered. He placed it strategically under the seat of one of the chairs in the lab, knowing full well that Alex would come in soon. He always wandered into the lab, making jokes about Hank’s “mad scientist” tendencies.

And right on cue, Hank heard the familiar sound of Alex’s boots clomping down the hall. He straightened up, wiped some of the flour off his coat, and tried to hide his grin.

The door opened with a creak, and Alex walked in, his signature grin plastered across his face. He looked at Hank, who was pretending to be deep in concentration.

“Hey, Hank,” Alex said casually, leaning against one of the counters. “How’s the flour taste?”

Hank didn’t bother looking up from his workstation. “A bit dry, if you must know. But I’m sure you’ll find something even more creative next time.”

Alex chuckled, clearly pleased with himself. He sauntered over to the chair where Hank had placed his trap and plopped down, oblivious to the device waiting for him.

The moment he sat, the puff of bright pink smoke burst into the air around him, swirling like a cloud of cotton candy. For a split second, Alex looked shocked, his eyes wide as he waved his hands in front of his face. Then, as he realized what had happened, he burst into laughter.

“Pink smoke, huh?” Alex managed between laughs, wiping at the air in front of him. “You got me good this time, Hank.”

Hank couldn’t hold it in any longer. The sight of Alex sitting in a cloud of neon pink smoke, combined with the ridiculousness of their prank war, sent him into a fit of laughter. It started as a small chuckle but quickly grew into uncontrollable laughter that echoed through the lab.

Alex joined in, his loud, carefree laughter mixing with Hank’s deeper, more subdued chuckles. For a moment, they were both just laughing, completely caught up in the absurdity of the situation. The tension that had been building between them—through the pranks, through their competitive nature, and even through their long-standing camaraderie—melted away in that shared moment of hilarity.

Hank leaned against the counter, wiping tears from his eyes as he tried to catch his breath. “Okay, okay. I think we can call this one a draw.”

“A draw?” Alex gasped, still grinning. “No way, McCoy. You’re ahead after that one. But I’ll catch up, don’t you worry.”

Hank shook his head, a fond smile on his face. “You’re impossible, Summers.”

Alex smirked. “You love it.”

There was a pause—just a brief moment where their laughter subsided and the air between them shifted. Hank looked at Alex, really looked at him, noticing the way his blue eyes sparkled with amusement, the way his hair was still slightly tousled from the pink smoke. For the first time in weeks, they weren’t thinking about pranks or one-upping each other. They were just… together.

Alex seemed to notice the shift too, because his grin softened into something more gentle, more thoughtful. Without thinking, he leaned in, his hand resting on the counter beside Hank. Hank’s heart skipped a beat as Alex’s face moved closer, his breath warm against Hank’s cheek.

Then, in a move so soft and unexpected, Alex brushed his lips against Hank’s in the lightest of kisses.

Hank froze. His mind went completely blank, the feeling of Alex’s lips lingering on his like an electric charge. He hadn’t been expecting this—not from Alex, not now, not after all the playful bickering and pranks. But as his heart hammered in his chest, Hank realized something: this wasn’t out of nowhere.

It was something that had been building between them for a long time, buried beneath the teasing, the competition, the jokes. There had always been something more, something unspoken that neither of them had acknowledged until now.

When Alex pulled back slightly, their eyes met, and for a moment, they just stared at each other, both unsure of what to say. Hank could see the same surprise reflected in Alex’s expression, but there was no regret—only a shy, almost nervous smile playing at the corner of his lips.

“Sorry,” Alex muttered, looking sheepish. “I, uh… I got caught up in the moment.”

Hank’s heart was racing, but he managed a small smile. “Caught up?”

“Yeah,” Alex said softly, his gaze flicking from Hank’s eyes to his lips and back again. “I mean… it felt right.”

Hank’s breath hitched, his mind still spinning from the kiss. But as he looked into Alex’s eyes, he realized that it did feel right. It felt more than right.

“Well, if we’re caught up in the moment,” Hank murmured, his voice barely above a whisper, “we might as well do it properly.”

Before Alex could respond, Hank leaned in, closing the distance between them. This time, the kiss was more than just a brush of lips—it was deeper, more intentional, filled with all the things they hadn’t said aloud. Alex responded instantly, his hands reaching up to cup Hank’s face, pulling him closer.

The kiss was soft at first, a slow exploration of something new and uncharted. But as the seconds passed, it deepened, becoming more intense, more urgent. Hank’s hands gripped Alex’s waist, pulling him closer, and Alex’s fingers tangled in Hank’s hair, tugging gently.

They broke apart only when the need for air became too great, their breaths coming in shallow gasps as they rested their foreheads together. Hank could feel Alex’s heartbeat racing against his own, their shared warmth grounding them both in the reality of what had just happened.

“Wow,” Alex whispered, his voice breathless. “That was…”

“Unexpected,” Hank finished, though a smile tugged at his lips. “But not unwelcome.”

Alex chuckled softly, his fingers still playing with the edge of Hank’s lab coat. “Yeah. Definitely not unwelcome.”

They stood there for a moment, letting the weight of the kiss settle between them. The lab, which had been filled with laughter only minutes ago, was now quiet, save for the soft hum of machinery in the background. But it wasn’t an awkward silence—if anything, it felt natural, like this was where they were meant to be.

“So,” Alex said after a beat, his voice low. “Does this mean the prank war is officially over?”

Hank raised an eyebrow, a teasing glint in his eyes. “I’m not sure. What do you think?”

Alex grinned, his hands slipping around Hank’s waist as he pulled him closer. “I think we could find better things to do with our time than rigging smoke bombs and whoopee cushions.”

Hank chuckled, his hands settling on Alex’s shoulders. “I suppose you’re right. But I have to admit, I’m going to miss the competition.”

Alex leaned in, his lips brushing Hank’s ear as he whispered, “Who says the competition has to end? I bet I could still make your heart race faster than you make mine.”

Hank’s breath hitched, his pulse quickening at the challenge in Alex’s voice. “You’re on, Summers,” he murmured, pulling Alex in for another kiss.

This time, there was no hesitation, no uncertainty. They had spent weeks playing games, teasing and pushing each other to their limits. But now, they were done with the pranks. Now, it was just them—two people who had found something unexpected in the midst of their playful rivalry.

And as they kissed, deep and lingering, Hank knew one thing for certain: this was no longer just a game.

It was something much more real.

Chapter Text

The McCoy-Summers household was always a mixture of chaos and love. The gentle hum of activity could be heard from the moment the sun crept through the windows to the quiet of the night. Hank McCoy, a brilliant scientist with a heart of gold, and Alex Summers, a former rebel with a strong sense of family, had managed to build a life full of warmth and adventure. They had been married for over a decade now, their love as steadfast as it had been on the day they exchanged vows. And now, they were the proud fathers of two children: Scott, their sixteen-year-old son, and their younger daughter, Emma, who was only six.

The day started like most Saturdays, with Alex making pancakes while Emma ran around the kitchen pretending to be a superhero. Hank sat at the table, sipping his coffee and occasionally glancing over the newspaper, though most of his attention was on his family.

“Dad, can I have extra chocolate chips?” Emma asked, pulling on Alex’s apron as he flipped another pancake.

“Of course, kiddo,” Alex replied with a grin, reaching for the chocolate chips and sprinkling a handful into the batter. “But only if you promise not to turn into a chocolate monster later.”

Emma giggled, twirling around the kitchen in her cape. “I can’t promise that! Chocolate monsters are my specialty!”

Hank chuckled from his seat, watching his daughter’s antics with affection. “We’ll have to keep an eye on her, Alex. Last time she ate too much chocolate, I’m pretty sure she bounced off the walls.”

Alex shot him a playful look. “You’re right, we’ll need to call in the superheroes to contain her.”

Scott, however, was noticeably absent from the morning routine. He had always been a quieter kid, more introspective than his younger sister, but lately, something had shifted. Hank had noticed the changes in his son—the way Scott had withdrawn more, the shadows under his eyes, and the way he kept to himself in his room longer than usual.

Hank tried not to overthink it. After all, Scott was a teenager, and these things happened. But as a parent—and as someone who knew what it was like to feel different—he couldn’t help but worry.

“Hey, where’s Scott?” Hank asked, glancing at the stairs that led to their son’s bedroom.

Alex’s expression softened. “Still in his room, I think. He’s been sleeping in a lot lately.”

Hank nodded, but a quiet sense of unease settled in his chest. He’d check in with Scott later.

After breakfast, Hank headed upstairs while Alex cleaned up the kitchen with Emma’s enthusiastic help. He knocked on Scott’s door, waiting for an answer. The room behind the door was silent for a moment before he heard a quiet, “Come in.”

Hank pushed the door open to find Scott sitting on the edge of his bed, staring at the floor. His dark hair was disheveled, and there was a tension in his shoulders that hadn’t been there a few months ago. Scott had always been a deep thinker, but this was different. He seemed troubled in a way that went beyond the usual teenage angst.

“Hey, kiddo,” Hank said softly, stepping inside and closing the door behind him. He sat down beside Scott, careful to give him space. “You alright?”

Scott didn’t answer right away. He just sat there, hands clenched in his lap. After a long moment, he spoke, his voice small and strained. “Dad… I think something’s wrong with me.”

Hank’s heart clenched, but he kept his voice gentle. “What makes you say that, Scott?”

Scott’s hands trembled slightly as he spoke. “I… I’ve been noticing things. Weird things. Like, when I get angry or upset, it feels like… something’s building up inside me. I don’t know how to explain it, but it feels like I’m going to explode or something.”

Hank’s concern deepened. He had been expecting something like this for a while now—Scott was at the age when most mutants discovered their abilities, and Hank had always known it was a possibility that his son would manifest powers, given their family history. But knowing it was coming didn’t make it any easier.

“You’re not alone in this, Scott,” Hank said gently, placing a hand on his son’s shoulder. “Your father and I have been through something similar.”

Scott looked up at him, his blue eyes wide with fear. “You mean… my mutation?”

Hank nodded slowly, his heart aching at the fear in Scott’s voice. “Yes. We’ve suspected that you might have one, but we didn’t want to push you until you were ready to talk about it.”

Scott’s breath hitched as he processed this. “So, it’s real? I’m a mutant? Like you and Dad?”

“Yes,” Hank said softly. “And there’s nothing wrong with you, Scott. You’re not broken or dangerous. You’re just learning something new about yourself.”

Scott shook his head, the fear and confusion evident in his expression. “But it doesn’t feel like that. I don’t feel in control. What if I hurt someone? What if I hurt Emma or you or Dad?”

Hank’s chest tightened at the thought of his son carrying such heavy fears. He understood all too well how terrifying it could be to feel like your body was turning against you. He had gone through his own struggles when his mutation first manifested, and he had seen Alex grapple with the destructive power of his abilities. But this was different—this was his son, and all Hank wanted to do was protect him.

“You’re not going to hurt anyone,” Hank said firmly, turning to face Scott. “I know it’s scary, but we’re going to help you. You’re not alone in this, Scott. Your father and I will be with you every step of the way.”

Scott looked down again, his voice trembling. “I just… I don’t want to be a freak.”

Hank’s heart broke at those words. He reached over, gently cupping Scott’s face and tilting it up so their eyes met.

“You are not a freak,” Hank said softly but with conviction. “You’re our son. We love you, and we’re so proud of the person you are. Your mutation doesn’t change that—it doesn’t change who you are.”

Scott’s eyes welled with tears, and he wiped them away quickly, embarrassed. Hank pulled him into a tight hug, holding him close as Scott buried his face in his father’s shoulder.

After a moment, there was a knock at the door, and Alex stepped in, sensing that something important was happening. He took one look at Hank and Scott, and his expression softened. He walked over, placing a gentle hand on Scott’s back.

“Hey, bud,” Alex said quietly, his voice filled with warmth. “What’s going on?”

Scott hesitated for a moment before pulling back from Hank and looking at Alex. “Dad… I think I’m a mutant. I don’t know what’s happening, but it’s scaring me.”

Alex’s face softened even further, and he sat down beside Scott on the other side, wrapping an arm around his shoulders. “I know it’s scary, Scott. I went through the same thing when I was your age. My powers… they scared me too.”

Scott looked up at him, his voice small. “How did you deal with it?”

Alex sighed, glancing at Hank before answering. “Honestly? Not very well at first. I was angry, and I didn’t understand what was happening to me. I pushed people away. But then, over time, I learned how to control it. I had help, just like you will.”

Scott’s eyes flickered between his parents, a mix of emotions crossing his face. “You’ll help me?”

“Of course,” Hank said firmly. “We’re your parents. We’re here to guide you through this.”

Alex nodded, giving Scott a reassuring smile. “We’ll figure this out together, bud. You’re not alone in this.”

Scott looked between them, his fear slowly giving way to relief. He still looked uncertain, but the weight on his shoulders seemed a little lighter.

“I just don’t want to hurt anyone,” Scott repeated, his voice softer now.

“You won’t,” Hank assured him. “We’ll make sure of it. We’ll work with you to help you control your powers, just like I learned to control mine, and like your dad learned to control his.”

Scott nodded slowly, his expression softening as he leaned into his fathers. “Okay… okay, I’ll try.”

“That’s all we can ask for,” Alex said, ruffling Scott’s hair gently.

They sat in comfortable silence for a while, the warmth of the family connection settling around them. Hank and Alex held Scott close, offering him the safety and support he needed in this confusing time.

After a while, Scott pulled back, wiping the last traces of tears from his eyes. “Thanks, Dad. Thanks, Papa.”

Hank smiled, his heart swelling with pride for the boy in front of him. “We’re always here for you, Scott. No matter what.”

Alex nodded, placing a soft kiss on Scott’s forehead. “You’re stuck with us, kiddo.”

Scott chuckled softly, the first genuine smile Hank had seen on his face in days. “Good.”

With that, Scott stood up, taking a deep breath. “I’m gonna go downstairs and help Emma with her superhero game. She’s terrible at saving the world without me.”

Hank and Alex both chuckled as Scott left the room, his steps lighter than they had been in weeks.

When the door closed behind him, Hank turned to Alex, letting out a breath he hadn’t realized he’d been holding. He leaned back against the bed, his shoulders sagging with a mix of relief and lingering worry.

“That went… better than I expected,” Hank said quietly, his hand rubbing his forehead. “But I can’t help but worry about him.”

Alex sat down next to him, resting his hand on Hank’s knee. “He’s tough, Hank. He’s a Summers and a McCoy. He’s got more support than most kids ever get, and he’s not facing this alone. We’ll help him figure it out, just like we did with our own powers.”

Hank nodded, glancing toward the door. “I know, but… I remember what it felt like when my mutation first appeared. The confusion, the fear. He’s so young. I just want to protect him from all of that.”

Alex’s hand tightened around Hank’s, offering silent comfort. “We can’t shield him from everything, love. But we can give him the tools he needs to face it. And look how brave he was, coming to us like that. That took guts.”

Hank smiled at that, a warm feeling spreading in his chest. Scott had always been a brave kid, but seeing him confront something so scary with honesty had been a proud moment.

“I just want to make sure he knows he’s not alone in this,” Hank murmured, his blue eyes meeting Alex’s. “That we’re here for him.”

“We are,” Alex reassured him, leaning in to press a soft kiss to Hank’s lips. “And he knows that. We’ve built a good life for him and Emma. We’ll get through this, just like we always do.”

Hank sighed, his body relaxing into Alex’s presence. “I don’t know what I’d do without you.”

“You won’t have to find out,” Alex teased, his lips quirking into a smile. “I’m not going anywhere.”

They sat there for a few more minutes in silence, just enjoying the peace that came after a difficult conversation. The worries still lingered, of course, but for now, Hank felt lighter. They were a family, and whatever came next, they would face it together.

From downstairs, they could hear the sounds of laughter—the unmistakable sound of Scott and Emma playing their superhero game. It was comforting to know that even with the heavy burden Scott was carrying, he could still find joy in these simple moments.

“Come on,” Alex said, standing up and offering Hank his hand. “Let’s go join them. We could use some superhero time too.”

Hank smiled, taking Alex’s hand and standing. “I’m more of a scientist than a superhero, but I suppose I can give it a shot.”

Alex grinned. “Trust me, you’re a superhero in your own way.”

Hand in hand, they headed downstairs to join their children. As they entered the living room, they were greeted by Scott, who had Emma on his shoulders, both of them giggling and pretending to fly. Hank and Alex exchanged a glance, their hearts full.

Whatever challenges lay ahead for their family—Scott’s mutation, the uncertainties of the future—they would face them together, just like they always had. And as Hank watched his family laugh and play, he knew, deep in his heart, that they would be okay.

Because they had each other.

And that was more than enough.

Chapter Text

The world had long since crumbled into ruins. Once, there had been hope for a future—some semblance of peace between humans and mutants, but that hope had been buried under rubble, consumed by fire. The cities were nothing more than desolate wastelands, skeletal remains of once-great metropolises, their once-shimmering towers now blackened silhouettes against a perpetually gray sky. The war had been brutal and unrelenting, and when the end came, it had come for everyone.

Humans had turned on mutants with a ferocity even Erik had not fully predicted. After years of escalating conflict, of fear and misunderstanding, the government had unleashed the Sentinels—horrific machines designed with one purpose: the extermination of mutantkind. The machines had no mercy, no fear, no hesitation. Within a matter of years, they had done what humanity alone could not: they had brought mutants to the brink of extinction.

Now, the few who remained lived in constant fear. Erik Lensherr—Magneto, once a name that struck terror into the hearts of men—was no longer a leader of a movement. He was a ghost, a relic of a war that had all but wiped his kind from the earth. And Charles Xavier… he was something else entirely. The man who had once fought tirelessly for peace now seemed as broken as the world around him.

Erik walked through the remains of what had once been New York City. The streets were empty, filled with twisted metal, crumbling buildings, and the ashes of the dead. There was no life here. Nothing moved, not even the wind. It was as though the world itself had been sucked dry of any warmth or vitality. But Erik moved with purpose, his boots crunching against the debris underfoot, his senses on high alert for any sign of danger.

The message he had received had been brief, just a single word. But it had been enough to spur him into action. Charles had called him. After all these years, after everything that had happened between them, Charles had reached out.

Erik could see the mansion in the distance now—or what was left of it. The once-grand home of the Xavier School for Gifted Youngsters was in ruins, the western wing entirely collapsed, smoke still rising from the wreckage. It looked like it had been attacked recently, though Erik knew there would be no survivors. There hadn’t been survivors in a long time.

But Charles was still alive. Erik could feel him, could sense the faint but unmistakable flicker of his old friend’s presence in the back of his mind. That bond, forged so many years ago, had never truly broken, no matter how much they had hurt each other. And now, in the twilight of the world, it was all they had left.

He made his way up the broken path that led to the mansion’s front entrance, his eyes scanning the perimeter for any sign of the Sentinels. They could be anywhere, hunting relentlessly, following the last traces of mutant signatures like wolves on the scent of blood. But for now, there was silence.

The door to the mansion was hanging off its hinges, barely attached to the frame. Erik pushed it aside with a flick of his hand, the metal creaking in protest. Inside, the mansion was as destroyed as the outside. Debris littered the floor, broken glass glinting in the dim light that filtered through the shattered windows. The walls were scorched, and the air smelled of smoke and death.

“Charles,” Erik called out, his voice echoing through the empty halls.

There was no answer.

Erik’s chest tightened with a mixture of fear and anger. Charles had to be here. He had to be. After all the years they had spent apart, all the times they had fought, they couldn’t be reunited only to lose each other again. Erik would not allow it.

He moved through the halls with a sense of urgency now, following the faint pulse of Charles’s mind like a beacon. He reached what had once been the study, the place where they had spent so many nights debating, arguing, dreaming of a future that would never come to pass. The door was partially collapsed, but Erik pushed through the wreckage, and there, sitting in his wheelchair amidst the ruins, was Charles Xavier.

Charles looked up as Erik entered the room, his face pale, his eyes hollow. He looked older, much older than Erik remembered, as though the weight of the world had finally crushed him. His once-bright blue eyes were dull, and his hands trembled as they rested on the arms of his chair. But he was alive.

“Erik,” Charles said, his voice barely more than a whisper. “You came.”

Erik stared at him, unable to speak for a moment. The years had not been kind to Charles, and seeing him like this—broken, diminished—was like a punch to the gut. But despite the exhaustion that radiated from him, there was still a flicker of something in Charles’s eyes. Hope, maybe, or something close to it.

“I always do,” Erik said finally, his voice rough. “You called.”

Charles smiled weakly, though it didn’t reach his eyes. “I wasn’t sure you would hear me.”

Erik stepped closer, his gaze never leaving Charles’s. “How could I not?”

For a long moment, neither of them spoke. The silence between them was heavy with all the things they had never said, all the years of betrayal and anger and loss. But there was no time for that now. The world was dying, and they were the last of their kind.

Charles broke the silence first, his voice low and tired. “There are others. A few. Hiding. We need to get them to safety.”

Erik raised an eyebrow. “Safety? Where, exactly? There’s no place left.”

Charles’s gaze hardened slightly, a flicker of the old determination Erik had once known so well. “There’s a place. Far to the north, hidden from the Sentinels. It’s the only chance we have left.”

Erik frowned, crossing his arms over his chest. “And what exactly do you expect me to do, Charles? You think I can just fly us all to some mythical safe haven?”

Charles’s eyes darkened. “I expect you to help me save what’s left of our people. I expect you to stand with me, Erik, like we should have done all those years ago.”

Erik felt a surge of anger rise in his chest, but he tamped it down. There was no point in arguing, not now. “And what makes you think this place even exists?”

Charles sighed, running a hand through his thinning hair. “I’ve seen it. In my mind. It’s real, Erik. And it’s our only hope.”

Erik studied him for a moment, his gaze sharp. He had learned long ago not to doubt Charles’s visions. If Charles said there was a sanctuary, then it was worth believing, if only because the alternative was unbearable.

“Fine,” Erik said, his voice tight. “But if we do this, it’s not just for them. It’s for us too.”

Charles looked up at him, his expression softening. “Erik, I—”

“Don’t,” Erik interrupted, his voice harsh. “We don’t have time for apologies. Not anymore.”

Charles stared at him, his eyes filled with something Erik couldn’t quite name—sorrow, regret, love, maybe all of them at once. But he didn’t argue. He simply nodded, the weight of the world pressing down on both of them.

---

The journey north was a brutal one. Erik and Charles moved in silence most of the time, their uneasy truce holding for the sake of the few mutants they had managed to gather along the way. They moved under the cover of darkness, avoiding the Sentinels as best they could, always aware that they were being hunted.

The mutants they had rescued were young, scared, and fragile. Erik watched them with a mixture of pity and anger. These children were all that was left of mutantkind. They were the remnants of a once-great species, hiding in the shadows, barely surviving. It was a bitter pill to swallow.

Charles, however, seemed to draw strength from them. He spoke to each one of them, offering words of comfort, his voice calm and soothing, even as his body continued to weaken. Erik could see it—the way Charles’s hands shook more often, the way his breathing grew more labored with each passing day. But Charles never complained. He just kept moving forward, driven by some inner fire that refused to be extinguished.

One night, as they camped under the stars, far from any city or Sentinel patrol, Erik found himself sitting beside Charles. The others were asleep, huddled together for warmth, but Erik couldn’t sleep. His mind was too restless, too consumed by everything that had happened, everything that was still to come.

“You’re pushing yourself too hard,” Erik said quietly, glancing at Charles. “You need to rest.”

Charles smiled faintly, though there was no humor in it. “Resting won’t change anything. We’re running out of time.”

Erik clenched his fists, frustration bubbling up inside him. “And what happens when we get to this place of yours? What then, Charles? Do you really think we can rebuild? Do you really think there’s any future left for us?”

Charles’s gaze turned thoughtful, his eyes distant as he stared up at the stars. “I don’t know,” he admitted softly. “But I have to believe there is. It’s all I have left.”

Erik was silent for a long moment, his chest tight. He had never been one for hope, not like Charles. Hope, in his experience, was a luxury—one that could be ripped away at any moment, leaving only bitterness in its wake. But seeing Charles now, after all they had endured, still clinging to that belief… it stirred something in him.

“I used to think you were naïve,” Erik admitted, his voice quieter now, almost gentle. “All those years, your dream of peace—it felt like a fantasy. And maybe I was right. Maybe peace was never possible.” He paused, his gaze shifting to the sleeping mutants around them. “But looking at them… I understand now why you held on to that hope.”

Charles turned his head to look at Erik, his expression soft, almost sad. “It wasn’t naïveté, Erik. It was necessity. If I didn’t believe we could create a better world, what else was there?”

Erik met his gaze, something raw and vulnerable in his own eyes. “I don’t know. Maybe there was nothing. Maybe that’s why I was so angry.”

For a moment, the two of them sat in silence, the weight of their past hanging heavily between them. But there was something else there too—something that had always been between them, something unspoken and yet so powerful it had shaped everything they had done. They had fought each other, torn each other apart, but they had never truly let go.

“I don’t want to be your enemy anymore,” Erik said suddenly, his voice rough with emotion. “Not after everything. Not now.”

Charles’s eyes widened slightly, and for a moment, Erik could see the surprise, the vulnerability, in his expression. But then Charles smiled—soft and sad and filled with something Erik hadn’t seen in years. “You never really were,” Charles whispered. “Not in here.” He placed a hand over his heart, and Erik felt a pang of something deep and painful in his chest.

“I’m tired of fighting you,” Erik continued, his voice strained. “I’m tired of the pain. The loss. I don’t want to spend what’s left of our lives like this.”

Charles reached out then, his hand trembling slightly, but his touch was steady as he placed it on Erik’s arm. “Neither do I,” he said softly, his eyes filled with that same quiet determination that had always drawn Erik to him. “We’ve both made mistakes, Erik. But we don’t have to keep making them.”

Erik looked at him, really looked at him, and for the first time in years, he felt something shift inside him. The anger, the resentment, the bitterness—it was still there, but it wasn’t consuming him anymore. Not when he was here, with Charles, and there was still something worth fighting for.

He reached out, his hand hesitating for only a moment before he rested it over Charles’s. “I don’t know how to change, Charles,” Erik admitted, his voice thick. “I’ve spent my whole life fighting. I don’t know how to stop.”

Charles’s fingers tightened slightly around his arm, and Erik felt the warmth of that touch spread through him like a lifeline. “We’ll figure it out,” Charles whispered. “Together.”

The word hung between them, filled with so much meaning, so much history. Erik felt his throat tighten, but he nodded. Together. They had never truly been together, not in the way that mattered, but maybe… maybe they could be now.

Without thinking, without allowing himself to second-guess it, Erik leaned forward. His hand slid to Charles’s cheek, his thumb brushing the familiar lines of his face, and then, slowly, he closed the distance between them.

The kiss was soft, tentative, as if they were both afraid of breaking the fragile moment. Charles’s lips were warm, and Erik could feel the faint tremor in his hands as they rested on his shoulders. For a heartbeat, time seemed to stop—the weight of the world, the destruction, the war, it all faded away, and it was just the two of them, alone in the quiet night.

When they finally pulled apart, Erik rested his forehead against Charles’s, his breath coming in shallow gasps. “I can’t lose you again,” Erik whispered, his voice hoarse. “Not like before.”

Charles closed his eyes, his hand coming up to rest on the back of Erik’s neck. “You won’t,” he murmured, his voice steady despite the exhaustion that Erik could feel radiating off him. “We’re here now. And we’ll stay together.”

Erik swallowed hard, his heart pounding in his chest. He had spent so many years running, so many years trying to build something out of the ruins of their fractured world. But now, sitting here with Charles, it felt like he had finally found what he had been looking for all along.

---

The journey continued, but something had changed between them. There was still the ever-present danger, the constant threat of the Sentinels, the weight of what had been lost, but now Erik and Charles moved together, no longer divided by their old ideologies. They worked as one, each trusting the other in a way that hadn’t existed in years.

And as they drew closer to the sanctuary Charles had spoken of, Erik began to believe, for the first time in a long time, that there might still be a future for them—maybe not the future they had once dreamed of, but something else. Something that could be enough.

The sanctuary itself was hidden deep within the Canadian wilderness, far from the decimated cities and the hunting grounds of the Sentinels. It wasn’t much—just a small, fortified compound, hidden beneath layers of dense forest and protected by natural barriers. But to the few mutants they had gathered along the way, it was a beacon of hope.

As they approached, Erik felt a strange mixture of relief and trepidation. This was the end of their journey, the place where they would make their stand. But it was also the beginning of something new—something fragile, but filled with possibility.

The gate to the sanctuary opened as they approached, and a small group of mutants emerged to greet them. They were young, most of them no older than the students Erik and Charles had once taught at the mansion. But there was something in their eyes—something that Erik recognized. It was hope, fragile but burning bright.

Charles greeted them warmly, his voice filled with that same quiet reassurance that had always made him a leader, even now. Erik stood beside him, his presence silent but solid, a reminder that they were not alone.

As the mutants welcomed them into the sanctuary, Erik felt Charles’s hand brush against his, a brief but deliberate touch. Erik turned to look at him, and Charles smiled—a real smile this time, one that reached his eyes.

“We made it,” Charles whispered, his voice filled with quiet wonder.

Erik nodded, his chest tight with emotion. “We did.”

For the first time in years, Erik allowed himself to believe that maybe—just maybe—they could build something out of the ashes of the world. Something that would last.

And this time, they would do it together.

---

As the night fell over the sanctuary, Erik and Charles stood side by side, watching the stars appear in the sky above. The world was still broken, still dangerous, but in this moment, there was peace.

“Do you think we can really rebuild?” Erik asked quietly, his voice filled with a vulnerability he rarely allowed himself to show.

Charles glanced at him, his eyes soft. “I believe we can. And I believe we will.”

Erik looked out at the horizon, the darkness stretching out before them. There was so much uncertainty, so much they still had to face. But for the first time in a long time, he felt something stir inside him—something that had been buried for years.

It was hope.

He turned to Charles, his voice steady. “Then let’s rebuild.”

Charles smiled, his eyes shining with a quiet, unspoken promise. “Together.”

And in the shattered remnants of their world, they began anew.

Chapter Text

The soft hum of machinery and the faint clicking of Hank McCoy's keyboard filled the lab as the evening wore on. Hank had become lost in his work, as was often the case when he was engrossed in a new project. He was sprawled over his desk, glasses perched precariously on his nose, papers strewn about in organized chaos. The blue glow of the computer screen cast a gentle light on his furrowed brow, highlighting the intense concentration on his face.

Tonight, he was analyzing genetic data, trying to make sense of the latest mutation patterns that had been reported in young mutants. He found solace in the numbers and patterns, his mind racing to connect dots that might lead to better understanding and treatment options. It was his passion—his life’s work—but it often came at a cost, especially when it meant isolating himself from those he cared about.

On the other side of the mansion, Alex Summers had been waiting for Hank to finish up. He had planned a relaxing evening together, maybe even a movie or a simple dinner, but as the hours ticked by, he found himself growing increasingly restless. It wasn’t unusual for Hank to lose track of time when he was working on something important, but Alex couldn’t help feeling a little neglected.

After pacing the living room for the umpteenth time, Alex decided enough was enough. He pushed off the couch, determination flaring within him. If Hank was going to keep burying himself in his work, then Alex would have to drag him out of it.

Quietly, he crept through the mansion, the faint sounds of the lab guiding him through the winding halls until he reached the door. He took a deep breath, steeling himself for the impending confrontation.

With a quick turn of the knob, Alex stepped inside the lab, and the overwhelming scent of antiseptic and chemicals hit him. It was a familiar scent, one that was always present whenever Hank was deep in his research. He found Hank exactly as he expected—eyes glued to the screen, oblivious to the world around him.

“Hey, Brainiac,” Alex called, his voice laced with playful teasing.

Hank jumped slightly, startled out of his focused state. He turned to look at Alex, his expression shifting from surprise to joy. “Oh, Alex! I didn’t realize you were here,” he said, pushing his glasses up the bridge of his nose.

“Yeah, well, I’ve been waiting for you. You’ve been in here for hours,” Alex replied, stepping closer, arms crossed over his chest. “Did you even eat dinner?”

Hank’s gaze flickered to the clock on the wall. “I—uh, I might have skipped it,” he admitted sheepishly, feeling a slight flush creep up his neck. “I was just trying to finish this analysis, and it turned out to be more complicated than I anticipated.”

Alex’s expression softened, and he couldn’t help but smile at the sight of Hank’s disheveled hair and focused demeanor. “You know, the world won’t end if you take a break, right?”

“I know,” Hank replied, a hint of a smile playing on his lips. “But this research is important. I can’t just abandon it.”

“But you can’t just work yourself into the ground either,” Alex countered, moving closer to Hank. He placed a hand on Hank’s shoulder, feeling the tension in his muscles. “You need to take a step back once in a while. You know that.”

Hank opened his mouth to respond, but before he could say anything further, Alex made his move. With a swift motion, he snuck up behind Hank, spinning him around in one fluid motion. Hank barely had time to register what was happening before Alex pressed his lips against his in a soft, unexpected kiss.

The suddenness of it caught Hank completely off guard. His eyes widened, and for a split second, his mind went blank, all thoughts of research and analysis vanishing into thin air. It was as if time had stopped—nothing existed outside of this moment, this kiss.

Alex’s lips were warm and inviting, coaxing Hank out of his overwhelmed state. He felt his heart race, a thrill of surprise mingling with joy as he instinctively wrapped his arms around Alex’s waist, deepening the kiss. The world around them faded, the soft glow of the lab lights dimming in significance as Hank melted into the kiss.

When they finally broke apart, Hank was left slightly dazed, his cheeks flushed and his breath coming in soft pants. Alex grinned at him, clearly pleased with the effect he’d had. “See? Sometimes you just need a little nudge to get out of your own head.”

Hank chuckled, shaking his head as he tried to regain his composure. “You certainly have a way of surprising me, Summers.”

“I aim to please,” Alex said, his grin widening. “Now, how about you take a break? I made us dinner, and it’s still warm.”

Hank raised an eyebrow, a playful smile creeping onto his lips. “You made dinner? I must be more tired than I thought if you actually cooked.”

“Hey, I can cook! It just doesn’t always come out edible,” Alex replied, feigning offense. “But tonight, I promise it’s safe to eat.”

“Alright, you’ve convinced me,” Hank said, finally relenting. He took one last glance at his work, the data and charts that had occupied his thoughts for so long, before turning back to Alex. “Let’s go see what you’ve whipped up.”

Alex’s smile broadened as he led Hank out of the lab. They walked side by side, the atmosphere shifting from the sterile confines of the lab to the warmth of the rest of the mansion. The chatter of other mutants filtered in through the walls, and for the first time that evening, Hank felt the tension in his shoulders ease.

As they entered the kitchen, Hank was greeted by the delightful aroma of something savory simmering on the stove. It wasn’t a grand feast, but it was hearty and comforting, a stark contrast to the sterile environment he had been so engrossed in. Alex pulled two plates from the cabinet and served up a generous portion of his latest culinary experiment—stir-fried vegetables with grilled chicken.

“See? Not bad, right?” Alex said, watching Hank’s reaction with anticipation.

Hank took a bite, savoring the flavors. “Actually, this is really good,” he admitted, surprised at how well Alex had done. “I might be a little jealous of your cooking skills.”

“Don’t get used to it,” Alex teased, taking a seat at the kitchen table. “I can’t make any promises for next time.”

They settled into a comfortable rhythm as they ate, exchanging stories and laughter over the remnants of Hank’s earlier concentration. Alex regaled Hank with tales of the latest training sessions with Scott and Jean, while Hank shared some of his latest findings from the lab.

But as they talked, Hank couldn’t help but glance at Alex, marveling at the way he could effortlessly transition from playful teasing to heartfelt conversation. There was a lightness in the air that made Hank feel more at ease than he had in hours.

Eventually, Alex leaned back in his chair, an impish grin lighting up his face. “You know, I can’t believe you were just going to spend all night in that lab, completely ignoring everything else.”

Hank shook his head, a sheepish smile creeping onto his lips. “I get so caught up in the details sometimes. It’s hard to step back and see the bigger picture.”

“Like how you’ve got me right here?” Alex raised an eyebrow, leaning forward on the table, his eyes sparkling with mischief. “You’re always thinking about the future—about research and missions—but have you thought about this?” He gestured between them.

Hank felt his heart skip a beat at the implication. “I… well, I try to think about it. I just don’t want to mess things up.”

“You’re not going to mess anything up,” Alex said firmly, his tone leaving no room for doubt. “I mean, you’re not going to stop overthinking, but you don’t have to. Just… be with me. Enjoy what we have.”

Hank smiled, touched by Alex’s sincerity. “I really appreciate you, you know. You help me find balance in all this chaos.”

“Good, because I plan on sticking around,” Alex replied, a playful smirk crossing his face. “Whether you like it or not.”

“Trust me, I’m very much in favor of that,” Hank said softly, meeting Alex’s gaze. The connection between them felt palpable, the comfort of their relationship grounding Hank in a way he hadn’t expected.

As they finished dinner, Hank felt a warmth spreading through him—not just from the food but from the presence of Alex, the way he could pull Hank out of his self-imposed isolation and remind him of the beauty of simply being together.

After the dishes were cleared, they moved to the living room, curling up on the couch. The TV flickered in the background, a mindless action movie playing, but neither of them was paying much attention. Instead, they settled into each other, Alex’s head resting against Hank’s shoulder, Hank’s arm draped protectively around him.

“You know,” Alex murmured, his voice low and relaxed, “sometimes I worry you get so wrapped up in your work that you forget to have fun.”

Hank chuckled softly, brushing a gentle hand through Alex’s hair. “I guess I do. But you’re good at reminding me.”

“Damn right,” Alex said, a playful grin spreading across his face. “And if I have to drag you away from that lab every now and then, I will.”

Hank smiled, feeling a warmth spread through him that had nothing to do with the cozy blanket draped over them. “I’m sure I’ll get dragged away from the lab more often if it means spending time with you.”

“Exactly!” Alex exclaimed, playfully nudging Hank. “Just think of me as your personal life coach.”

Hank laughed, shaking his head. “I don’t think I’m ready for that level of commitment.”

Alex snorted, the sound filling the room with lightheartedness. “You know, I’m really good at this life-coaching thing. I have a natural talent for it.”

“I’m sure you do,” Hank replied, his tone playful yet affectionate. “Though I must admit, your methods are… unconventional.”

“Unconventional is my middle name,” Alex said with a dramatic flair, leaning back against Hank's shoulder. “You can’t argue with the results.”

Hank’s heart swelled at that. Alex had a unique way of pulling him out of his own thoughts, bringing him back to the present moment. The ease between them felt both comforting and exhilarating, and as the credits of the movie began to roll, Hank felt grateful for this unexpected evening.

“Hey, can I ask you something?” Alex’s voice broke through Hank’s reverie.

“Of course. You can ask me anything,” Hank replied, his gaze focused intently on Alex.

“What are you thinking about for the future?” Alex asked, his tone shifting slightly, becoming more serious. “I mean, I know you’re always focused on your research, but have you thought about… us?”

Hank took a deep breath, the weight of Alex’s question settling over him like a warm blanket. “I’ve thought about it a lot,” he admitted, his voice quiet. “It’s hard not to, especially when you mean so much to me.”

“Yeah?” Alex looked up at him, curiosity shining in his eyes. “And what do you see?”

Hank paused, searching for the right words. “I see a future where I’m not just in the lab. I see us living, exploring, growing together. I want to share more moments like this—quiet evenings, laughter, the small things that make life beautiful.”

Alex’s expression softened, and Hank could see the emotions flickering in his eyes. “That sounds perfect, Hank. I want that too.”

Hank took a moment to gather his thoughts, feeling a swell of affection for the man beside him. “I just worry, sometimes. I’m so focused on what I can achieve scientifically, on making a difference for others, that I don’t want to lose sight of what’s right in front of me.”

Alex shifted slightly, turning more toward Hank, his hand reaching out to gently squeeze Hank’s knee. “You won’t lose me, I promise. I’m here. I’m not going anywhere.”

Hank looked down at Alex’s hand, feeling a surge of reassurance at the connection. “I know that. And I’m grateful for it. It’s just—”

“Just what?” Alex encouraged softly.

“It’s easy for me to get wrapped up in my work. I want to make sure I’m present, that I’m giving you what you need too,” Hank said, his voice steady but laced with vulnerability.

“You already do, Hank,” Alex replied earnestly, his eyes locked onto Hank’s. “You’re here, right now, and that’s what matters. I want you to keep being you, and I’ll figure out how to fit into that, too.”

Hank smiled, feeling the tension in his shoulders ease further. Alex had a knack for making him feel seen, for reminding him of the importance of the present moment. “Thank you, Alex. You really are my grounding force.”

“Always,” Alex said with a wink. “Now, how about a little less talk about the future and a little more about the present? You mentioned we should have more fun, right?”

Hank raised an eyebrow, intrigued by Alex’s sudden shift in tone. “What did you have in mind?”

“Remember that video game you bought last week? The one with the ridiculous name?” Alex smirked, the familiar sparkle returning to his eyes.

“‘Galactic Warriors: Interstellar Showdown’? Yes, I remember,” Hank chuckled, the memory of his excitement upon purchasing it flooding back. “But you realize I’m not just going to let you win, right?”

“Win? Please,” Alex said with mock bravado. “I’m going to destroy you! Just you wait.”

With a light laugh, Hank rose from the couch and made his way to the entertainment center. He fumbled through the stack of games until he found the one Alex was referring to. “You may have confidence, but I’ve trained for this,” Hank replied playfully, a glint of competitive spirit igniting within him.

“Good! I like a challenge,” Alex declared, his competitive nature flaring as he settled back into the couch.

As they set up the game, Hank felt a rush of excitement coursing through him. It wasn’t just about the game; it was about the way Alex’s presence made everything feel lighter, more enjoyable. The atmosphere was electric as they prepared to play, and soon the room filled with laughter and playful banter.

Alex took an early lead, his fingers deftly navigating the controller while Hank furrowed his brow in concentration, trying to catch up. “You call that a strategy?” Alex laughed, clearly enjoying himself.

“Just you wait,” Hank countered, grinning despite himself. “I have a plan.”

“Your plans are always way too complicated,” Alex said, shaking his head as he shot down one of Hank’s characters on-screen. “Sometimes you just need to keep it simple.”

“Point taken,” Hank replied, chuckling as he tried to adjust his approach mid-game. “But I still think strategy has its merits.”

As the game continued, the competitive edge between them gave way to laughter and playful insults, their dynamic perfectly balanced in a way that felt right. It was refreshing, this simple act of enjoyment together, and Hank couldn’t remember the last time he’d felt so free from the weight of the world.

After a particularly intense round, they both collapsed onto the couch, breathless from laughter and the thrill of competition. Hank’s heart raced, not just from the game but from the connection they had forged, even in something as trivial as gaming.

“I have to admit, this was a brilliant idea,” Hank said, leaning back against the cushions.

“Of course it was! I’m a genius,” Alex replied smugly, leaning against Hank with a satisfied grin. “Besides, I needed a little Hank-time.”

“Are you saying I’m a distraction?” Hank teased, nudging Alex playfully with his elbow.

“Not a distraction. A wonderful addition,” Alex clarified, looking up at Hank with a serious glimmer in his eye that made Hank’s heart flutter.

“I’ll take that compliment,” Hank said, his tone softening. “But I should warn you, I’m still determined to beat you next time.”

“Good luck with that,” Alex shot back with a cheeky smile, before his expression turned more serious. “Hank?”

“Hmm?” Hank turned to look at him, feeling a shift in the atmosphere.

“Promise me we’ll keep doing this. Not just gaming, but this—taking time for each other. I don’t want to be just your escape from work; I want to be part of your life, every bit of it,” Alex said, his sincerity washing over Hank like a warm tide.

“I promise,” Hank said softly, the weight of Alex’s words settling in. “I’ll do better. I want you to be part of everything.”

“Good,” Alex replied, looking satisfied. “Now let’s get back to the game. I want to destroy you one more time before we call it a night.”

With renewed energy, they dove back into the game, laughter ringing out as they navigated through pixelated chaos. For Hank, the weight of the lab, the research, and all the pressures of life faded away into nothing. It was just him and Alex—two souls finding joy in the simple act of being together.

Hours later, as the game finally ended and they collapsed back onto the couch, Hank felt a sense of peace settle over him. They may not have solved all of life’s complexities in one evening, but they had carved out a space for each other in the midst of it all.

Alex turned to Hank, a contented smile on his face, and Hank found himself reaching out, brushing his fingers against Alex’s cheek. The gesture was tender, a silent affirmation of everything they had built together.

“Thank you for tonight,” Hank murmured, his heart swelling. “I didn’t realize how much I needed this.”

“Anytime, McCoy,” Alex replied, his voice low and warm. “Just remember, I’m always here to pull you out of the lab when you need it.”

Hank nodded, grateful for Alex’s presence in his life. With Alex by his side, he felt like he could finally breathe, like he had someone to share both his triumphs and his burdens with. It was a beautiful realization, and one he intended to embrace fully.

As they settled into a comfortable silence, Hank felt a quiet sense of hope blooming in his chest. Whatever challenges lay ahead, he knew they would face them together, side by side.

And as the evening came to a close, Hank found solace in the knowledge that he wouldn’t have to navigate life alone. With Alex’s hand in his, the world felt a little less daunting, and their future—whatever it may hold—felt a little brighter.

Chapter Text

The wind howled through the desolate landscape, the remnants of a battle still hanging heavy in the air. The scene was one of devastation—crumpled metal, shattered buildings, and a haze of smoke rising into the overcast sky. The mission had been a success, technically. The threat had been neutralized. But the cost… the cost had been far too high.

Charles Xavier could feel it in his bones, an ache that stretched deep into his soul. It wasn’t just the loss of life that haunted him, but the gaping wound of something more personal, something far more intimate.

Erik.

He hovered near the remains of what had once been a fortified industrial complex, the echoes of explosions and gunfire still ringing faintly in his ears. But the present moment was eerily silent. The only sound now was his own ragged breathing as he wheeled himself over the uneven ground, pushing through the wreckage in search of his friend.

His heart raced, pounding in his chest with a mixture of dread and determination. He had felt the blast—the massive burst of energy that had torn through the battlefield. Felt it, and in that instant, felt Erik’s mind flicker and weaken like a dimming flame.

Now, Erik was somewhere nearby, buried beneath the weight of twisted steel and debris. Hurt, possibly dying.

“No,” Charles whispered to himself, his hands tightening on the arms of his wheelchair. “He can’t be…”

He reached out with his mind, his telepathy searching the vast expanse of the ruined complex, sifting through the mental signatures of the fallen and injured. But his focus was singular, his thoughts centered on Erik—on finding him, saving him. Charles’s mental shields cracked as panic slipped through the cracks, intensifying his search.

And then, he felt it.

A faint pulse of thought—a flicker, barely there but unmistakable. Erik was alive.

Charles moved faster, the wheels of his chair crunching against the debris-strewn ground as he navigated through the destruction. His heart was in his throat now, his mind racing with fear and guilt. How many times had they been in this situation? How many times had they fought, risked their lives, and nearly lost each other?

Too many.

And yet, here they were again.

Finally, Charles reached the center of the blast site, and there, half-buried beneath the rubble of twisted metal beams and concrete, was Erik Lensherr. Magneto, the master of magnetism, now reduced to a motionless figure, his chest barely rising with labored breaths.

Charles’s breath caught in his throat. Erik’s once imposing figure looked so fragile now, broken and bloodied, his body covered in burns and deep gashes. His helmet had been knocked off in the blast, leaving his face exposed, pale and slack with unconsciousness.

“Erik,” Charles breathed, his voice tight with emotion as he wheeled himself closer. “No, no, no…”

He reached out with his mind, brushing against Erik’s consciousness—tentative, searching for any sign of life beyond the faint pulse he had felt earlier. Erik’s mental defenses were still there, as strong as ever, but they were weakening, fraying at the edges, leaving him vulnerable in ways Erik never allowed himself to be.

“Stay with me, Erik,” Charles whispered, leaning down as much as he could, his hands hovering just above Erik’s chest, afraid to touch for fear of causing more pain. “I’m here. You’re not alone.”

Erik’s body gave no response, but Charles could sense a flicker of awareness—a faint stirring deep within Erik’s mind. He was still there, trapped beneath layers of pain and unconsciousness.

Charles’s jaw clenched. He couldn’t lose Erik. Not now. Not after everything.

“I can’t let you go like this,” he muttered under his breath, his voice shaking. “You have to hold on.”

Without hesitation, Charles closed his eyes and reached deeper into Erik’s mind, pushing past the barriers that had kept him out for so many years. He wasn’t sure if Erik would allow it—not even now—but there was no other choice. He needed to find Erik, to pull him back from the brink, and the only way to do that was to venture into the very heart of his mind.

As he entered Erik’s subconscious, Charles was hit with a wave of disorientation. Erik’s thoughts were a maelstrom, chaotic and fragmented, torn apart by the pain and trauma of his injuries. Images and emotions swirled around Charles in a blur—flashes of memories, moments of anger, fear, and regret. But beneath it all, there was something deeper, something buried that Charles had never seen before.

And it took his breath away.

He saw Erik as a young boy, watching his mother die in the concentration camp. The pain of that moment was visceral, raw, and unrelenting. But then the memories shifted—time passing in an instant—and Charles found himself standing in another memory. The memory of a young man meeting a stranger by the sea, a man with clear blue eyes and a hopeful heart.

It was Charles. The memory of their first meeting, when they had still been allies. Friends.

Charles had seen this memory before, felt it in Erik’s mind many times, but this time… it was different. There was something more. Something that Erik had hidden, even from himself.

Regret.

Charles’s breath caught as the emotion washed over him. It was overwhelming, the weight of it nearly suffocating. Erik’s mind was filled with regret—regret for the choices he had made, for the path he had taken. Regret for all the times he had pushed Charles away, for all the times he had fought him instead of standing by his side.

But there was more than regret. There was something else. Something that Charles had always suspected but had never dared to believe.

Love.

It was there, buried deep beneath layers of anger and resentment, but it was unmistakable. Erik had loved him. Still did. And the realization hit Charles like a tidal wave, leaving him reeling.

In the midst of Erik’s fragmented thoughts, Charles saw flashes of a life that could have been. A life where Erik had stayed by his side, where they had built something together—something lasting, something beautiful. He saw them working together at the mansion, teaching young mutants, guiding them, protecting them. He saw them laughing, talking late into the night like they used to, sharing their dreams for the future.

And then, he saw more.

Charles’s heart ached as he watched a version of their lives that had never come to pass. He saw the two of them not as friends, but as something more. He saw Erik reaching out to him in the quiet moments, their hands brushing, their eyes meeting in a way that spoke of things unspoken. He saw them lying together in the grass, Erik’s fingers threading through his hair, the warmth of his touch chasing away the cold of the world around them.

It was a life they had never lived, but it was real, tangible in Erik’s mind—a dream that had been buried beneath years of war and division.

Charles’s hands trembled as he pulled back slightly, his heart pounding in his chest. Erik’s mind was still fragile, his thoughts fractured and scattered, but the truth was undeniable. Erik had never stopped caring, had never stopped longing for that life they could have had. He had just been too afraid—too scarred by his past—to admit it.

“Erik…” Charles whispered, his voice thick with emotion as he leaned over him, his hand hovering just above Erik’s brow. “Why didn’t you tell me?”

Erik didn’t respond—his body still limp, his mind still drifting in and out of consciousness—but Charles could feel the flicker of his awareness, the faint pulse of his thoughts as they struggled to break free.

“I should have seen it,” Charles continued, his voice trembling. “I should have known.”

He reached out again, this time with more care, more tenderness, guiding his mind gently toward Erik’s consciousness, trying to coax him back. The connection between them was fragile, delicate, but it was there. And Charles clung to it with everything he had.

“You’re not alone, Erik,” he whispered, his fingers brushing lightly against Erik’s temple. “You never were.”

For a moment, there was nothing but silence, the stillness of the ruined world around them pressing in on Charles like a weight. But then, slowly, Erik’s eyes fluttered open.

His gaze was unfocused at first, distant and hazy, but then his eyes found Charles, and something flickered in them—something soft, vulnerable.

“Charles…” Erik’s voice was a rasp, barely more than a whisper, but it was enough.

“I’m here,” Charles said, his own voice thick with emotion as he leaned closer, his hand moving to cup the side of Erik’s face. “I’m right here.”

Erik’s eyes closed again, but his hand, weak and trembling, reached up to cover Charles’s, his fingers brushing against his skin in a gesture that was both desperate and tender.

For a long moment, neither of them spoke. The weight of everything that had passed between them—years of conflict, pain, love—hung in the air like a tangible thing. But in that moment, it didn’t matter. Nothing mattered except the fact that they were here, together, in the aftermath of the battle, in the wreckage of the world they had fought so hard to protect.

“I saw your thoughts,” Charles finally said, his voice barely above a whisper. “I know… I know what you’ve been hiding.”

Erik’s grip on Charles’s hand tightened slightly, his eyes still closed, but he didn’t pull away. There was no anger, no denial. Instead, a deep vulnerability radiated from him, leaving Charles breathless.

“You shouldn’t have seen that,” Erik murmured, his voice cracking. “You shouldn’t have to bear that burden.”

Charles shook his head, his heart pounding in his chest. “It’s not a burden. It’s the truth, Erik. A truth I wish we had explored long ago.”

“Explored?” Erik echoed, his voice filled with disbelief and sorrow. “We’re in a world torn apart by hatred and violence, Charles. How could we have ever allowed ourselves that? You deserved better than what I could give you.”

Charles leaned closer, his forehead resting against Erik’s, their breaths mingling. “But I wanted you. All of you. Every part, every scar. I would have given anything to have you by my side.”

Erik opened his eyes, finally meeting Charles’s gaze. There was a flicker of hope there, barely perceptible beneath layers of pain and uncertainty. “You have no idea how long I’ve fought against that feeling,” he confessed, his voice barely more than a whisper. “But the truth is… I don’t want to fight anymore.”

Charles’s heart swelled at the admission. He felt an overwhelming sense of relief, as if the storm raging within Erik was finally beginning to calm. “Then let’s stop fighting, Erik. Let’s not allow the past to dictate our future any longer.”

The flicker of hope in Erik’s eyes grew brighter, but there was still a shadow of fear lingering beneath. “What if I’m not strong enough? What if I fall again?”

“You’re stronger than you realize,” Charles reassured him, his voice steady. “And you don’t have to carry this alone. Not anymore.” He brushed his thumb across Erik’s cheek, the touch sending a jolt of electricity through both of them. “I’m here. I’ll always be here.”

Erik searched Charles’s gaze, a mixture of longing and apprehension in his eyes. “You really mean that?”

“I do,” Charles promised, feeling a fierce determination rise within him. “We’ve lost so much, Erik. But we have a chance to rebuild—to create a new world, one where we can be free to love and be loved without fear. We can do it together.”

Erik’s breath caught, a mixture of disbelief and longing flickering across his features. “Together?” he echoed, testing the word like it was a lifeline thrown in turbulent waters.

“Yes,” Charles insisted, leaning closer until their foreheads were touching. “You’re not just my ally or my friend. You’re so much more than that to me. You always have been. I want you, Erik, in every way that matters. I want to fight for you, with you, and to build that life we could have had.”

Tears welled in Erik’s eyes, but he blinked them back, his vulnerability now laid bare. “I never wanted to admit it. I didn’t want to hope for something I thought I could never have. But you’re right; I’ve been fighting the wrong battles.”

With that admission, Erik’s defenses began to crumble further, his mental barriers weakening even more as the realization of what they could become settled into his consciousness.

“I love you, Charles,” Erik confessed, his voice trembling. “I always have.”

The words hung in the air, potent and fragile. Charles felt an overwhelming wave of emotion wash over him. “I love you too, Erik. Always. It’s taken us so long to get here, but we have a chance now. Let’s not waste it.”

As they held each other’s gaze, the air around them shifted. The world around them faded into the background—the ruins, the pain, the fear—everything blurred away until it was just the two of them, suspended in their own universe, as if nothing else mattered.

Then, slowly, Erik leaned forward, his lips brushing against Charles’s in a tentative kiss. It was soft and hesitant, like a fragile first step, but it held the weight of everything they had endured, everything they had yet to face together.

Charles responded instinctively, deepening the kiss, pouring all of his love and hope into that single, stolen moment. It felt like a promise—one they were both finally willing to make, to embrace, and to fight for.

As they pulled away, Erik’s breath was shaky, his heart racing with a mixture of exhilaration and fear. “We can’t go back to the way things were,” he murmured, his voice a blend of hope and apprehension.

“No, we can’t,” Charles agreed, his eyes shining with a fierce light. “But we can move forward. Together.”

Erik nodded, determination flickering back to life within him. “I’ll fight for you, for us. I’ll do whatever it takes to protect this life we’re building.”

Charles smiled, relief flooding through him. “And I’ll do the same for you. No more fighting each other—only fighting for those who can’t fight for themselves.”

As they locked eyes, the promise of their new future shimmered in the air. There was still a long road ahead, fraught with challenges and danger, but for the first time in a long while, both men felt a flicker of hope—a shared vision of what their lives could be.

With a newfound strength, Charles focused his energy and reached out to Erik, intent on using his telepathy to heal the physical wounds that plagued him. He could feel Erik’s pain, but he also felt the connection they shared—the bond that transcended everything, that tied their souls together.

With each gentle push of his power, Charles focused on Erik’s injuries, feeling the warmth of his own energy flowing through him, healing and restoring. The darkness of pain began to recede, replaced by a sense of clarity and connection.

“Just breathe, Erik,” Charles murmured, his voice soothing as he concentrated. “I’m here with you.”

Erik nodded, his breath steadying as Charles’s power wrapped around him like a warm blanket. “I trust you, Charles,” he whispered, his voice filled with a tenderness that made Charles’s heart ache.

As the last remnants of pain faded, Charles opened his eyes and pulled back, surveying Erik’s injuries. He was still battered, but the life was returning to his eyes. He looked stronger, more grounded—a reflection of the bond that had been forged between them.

“Thank you,” Erik said, his voice hoarse but sincere. “I didn’t think… I didn’t think I would get another chance.”

“You will,” Charles assured him, resting a hand on Erik’s shoulder, his thumb brushing against the skin. “We both will.”

The moment stretched between them, filled with unspoken promises and the weight of everything they had faced together. They had survived the worst, and now, they had a chance to thrive.

“I never thought I could be happy again,” Erik confessed, his eyes searching Charles’s for reassurance. “After everything… I thought my life was destined for darkness.”

Charles shook his head, a smile breaking through the remnants of worry. “You deserve happiness, Erik. We both do. And we will find it. Together.”

Erik’s lips curved into a tentative smile, his expression softening as he looked into Charles’s eyes. “Together.”

It was a simple word, but it held the promise of a new beginning. They had a long journey ahead, filled with uncertainty and obstacles, but they would face it side by side.

With a shared understanding, Erik leaned in once more, this time kissing Charles deeply, pouring every ounce of his longing, every suppressed emotion into the kiss. Charles melted against him, feeling the warmth radiating from Erik, the love he had longed to express for so many years.

As they broke apart, they both took a moment to breathe, the reality of their situation settling in. The world outside still lay in ruins, the battle they had just fought still echoed in their minds, but they were no longer alone. They had each other, and that was enough.

“I promise,” Erik said, his voice filled with conviction, “I will never let you go again. We’ll protect each other.”

Charles smiled, feeling the weight of Erik’s words settle around them like a protective shield. “And we’ll protect those who can’t protect themselves.”

Together, they looked out at the horizon, the sun beginning to break through the clouds, casting a warm golden light over the destruction that surrounded them. It was a new dawn—one filled with hope and possibility, a chance to rebuild, to reclaim everything they had lost.

And as the light enveloped them, Charles knew that this was just the beginning of their journey. Together, they would rise from the ashes of their past and create a future worth fighting for—a future filled with love, acceptance, and the promise of a better world.

Together. Always.

---

In the days that followed, Charles and Erik would work side by side, using their combined strengths to protect and uplift those who had been left vulnerable in the wake of the chaos. Each mission brought them closer, each shared victory binding them in ways they had only dreamed of before.

They would face adversity, yes, but they would face it together. And with every challenge they overcame, they would carve out a new path—one filled with light, laughter, and the undeniable truth that love could flourish even in the darkest of times.

For in a world that had sought to divide them, they had found each other again, and this time, they were determined to never let go.

Chapter Text

The sun was beginning to dip below the horizon, casting long shadows across the high school campus. The air was thick with the energy of students as they rushed to pack up for the end of the day, but inside the classroom, it was far quieter. Daniel LaRusso sat at his desk, staring down at the papers in front of him, trying to suppress the rising frustration in his chest. Across the room, Johnny Lawrence wasn’t doing much better. He paced back and forth, running his hand through his hair as he muttered curses under his breath.

"Great," Daniel muttered, glancing over at Johnny. "This is going perfectly."

Johnny shot him a glare, his voice dripping with sarcasm. "Oh, yeah, just what I wanted, LaRusso. A partner project with you. Fantastic."

The tension between them had been palpable from the moment they were assigned as partners for the history project. After all these years of rivalry, it seemed only fitting that they’d end up in this situation. They had a long, storied history of trading barbs, throwing punches, and outdoing one another—mostly Johnny doing the outdoing, but Daniel had his moments too. The idea of having to work together felt like some kind of cruel punishment, as though the universe was having a laugh at their expense.

Daniel exhaled sharply, forcing himself to stay calm. “Look, this is stupid. We’re not kids anymore. We can’t keep doing this. Let’s just get the project over with, okay?”

Johnny crossed his arms, not quite willing to let go of the anger just yet. “Yeah, well, maybe I don’t want to get along with you just because you’ve decided to play nice, LaRusso.”

Daniel didn’t rise to the bait. He was beyond that. He wasn’t the same kid who had once been the target of Johnny’s bullying and sarcastic jabs. In fact, despite all the years of conflict, Daniel had learned a lot from Johnny—about strength, resilience, and, ultimately, forgiveness. Still, that didn’t mean he was willing to let Johnny off the hook easily.

“I’m not asking you to be my best friend, Johnny. Just... let’s get through this. We have to. For the grade.”

Johnny clenched his jaw, staring at Daniel for a moment as if weighing his options. Finally, he let out a low breath and dropped into the chair across from Daniel. "Fine. But don’t think for a second that I’m going to be all buddy-buddy with you."

“Yeah, yeah,” Daniel muttered. "Let’s just focus on the work."

For the next hour, they sat in uncomfortable silence, exchanging only the bare minimum of words as they worked on their project. The tension that hung between them was thick enough to cut with a knife. Johnny would occasionally shoot Daniel a look—half-annoyed, half-amused—and Daniel would try to focus on the work in front of him, pretending that their simmering animosity didn’t bother him. But despite their differences, there was something about this situation that felt different. Something that neither of them could explain.

---

A few days later, Daniel invited Johnny to his house to continue working on the project. It was the only way to make any real progress—since school and their usual routines had only gotten in the way. Johnny hadn’t exactly been thrilled with the idea at first, but after some brief reluctance, he had agreed.

Daniel’s house was quiet in the late afternoon, the sunlight streaming in through the large windows and casting a golden glow on the hardwood floors. The two of them had settled in the living room, surrounded by piles of books and papers, and they were trying to organise their thoughts for the project.

As usual, Johnny’s frustration with the whole situation began to bubble over. He slapped a stack of books on the coffee table with too much force, knocking several of them to the floor in the process.

“Dammit!” Johnny cursed under his breath, bending down to pick them up.

Daniel, who had been concentrating on his notes, looked up at the sudden noise. He leaned forward to help, picking up a few of the books that had scattered across the floor. Their fingers brushed, and the contact was brief, but in that moment, everything seemed to stop.

The electricity between them was undeniable—something that had been building slowly but surely over the past few weeks. Neither of them knew what to make of it. Johnny, ever the one to fight against vulnerability, was the first to break the silence. He exhaled sharply, standing up and stepping back from Daniel.

“Great, now we’ve got... whatever this is going on.”

Daniel’s heart was pounding, but he swallowed the sudden surge of emotion that rose in his chest. “What... what’s going on, Johnny?”

Johnny looked at him, clearly frustrated with himself. “I don’t know, man. I don’t get it. One minute, we’re throwing punches at each other, and the next, I’m...”

Before either of them could process it, Johnny’s instincts took over. Without thinking, he leaned forward and kissed Daniel, his lips crashing into Daniel’s with an intensity neither of them had expected. It was a desperate, impulsive kiss—raw and unrefined, but undeniably charged with a hunger they couldn’t ignore.

The moment lasted only a few seconds, but it felt like an eternity.

Johnny immediately pulled away, his eyes wide with shock as he stepped back. “I... I didn’t mean to—”

Daniel blinked, utterly stunned. “What the hell was that?”

Johnny’s face was flushed, and his usual bravado had crumbled. He ran a hand through his hair, muttering curses under his breath. “I don’t know, alright? It was just... it was just a stupid mistake.”

But Daniel didn’t feel angry, didn’t feel betrayed. He was confused, yes, but there was something else. Something in the way Johnny had kissed him—something that hinted at a feeling neither of them was ready to acknowledge.

The awkward silence between them stretched on for what felt like forever. Finally, Daniel broke it. “Johnny... we need to talk.”

Johnny nodded, his eyes not meeting Daniel’s. “Yeah. I know. I’m sorry.”

But the apology felt unnecessary. Neither of them knew what to do with what had just happened, but they couldn’t deny the fact that it had happened. It wasn’t a mistake—they both knew that. The chemistry between them was undeniable, and for the first time, Daniel allowed himself to admit it.

---

A few days later, Daniel was walking to his locker when he noticed Johnny storming down the hallway. His fists were clenched, and his face was set in an angry scowl. It didn’t take long for Daniel to realise that Johnny had just gotten into some sort of confrontation with one of their classmates. The guy had been a nuisance for weeks, and Johnny wasn’t one to let things slide.

“Johnny!” Daniel called out, hurrying to catch up to him. “What happened?”

Johnny didn’t look at him, his jaw clenched in frustration. “Nothing. It’s nothing.”

“Come on, you can’t just walk away from this,” Daniel said, grabbing Johnny by the arm and pulling him around to face him. “Are you okay?”

Johnny looked at him, his blue eyes blazing with unspent anger. He didn’t say anything, but the tension in his body was palpable. Daniel could feel the heat radiating off of him—anger, frustration, and something else he couldn’t quite place.

Without thinking, Daniel stepped closer to Johnny, placing his hand on his chest as if to ground him, to calm him down. But Johnny’s resolve faltered, and before either of them could say anything else, Johnny kissed Daniel again.

This kiss was different. It wasn’t impulsive or accidental. It was raw and filled with the weight of all the years of frustration, of rivalry, of things unsaid. Johnny kissed Daniel like he was trying to kiss away everything that had happened in the past, everything that had kept them apart.

Daniel responded almost instinctively, his arms wrapping around Johnny’s neck as the kiss deepened. This time, there was no hesitation, no fear. Just a quiet understanding between them.

When they pulled away, both of them were breathing heavily, their faces flushed. Johnny looked at Daniel, his expression softening. “We can’t keep doing this, LaRusso.”

Daniel nodded slowly, his heart racing. “No. But we don’t have to hide anymore, either.”

---

By the time the project was completed, Daniel and Johnny had spent hours working together—hours that had slowly peeled away the layers of their animosity. They had laughed together, argued over details, and even shared a few moments of quiet companionship. There was no denying the bond that had formed between them, and when the project was finally done, they both felt a sense of accomplishment, but also something more.

That afternoon, after school had ended, Daniel waited for Johnny outside the building. They had agreed to meet to go over the final touches on the project, but as the minutes passed, Daniel found himself growing more impatient. Finally, Johnny appeared, his expression unreadable as he approached.

They stood in silence for a few moments, and then Johnny spoke, his voice quieter than usual.

“You know, I don’t know what’s going on between us, LaRusso. But I don’t want to fight it anymore.”

Daniel’s heart skipped a beat. He had been wondering the same thing—wondering when they could finally stop pretending, when they could just be... whatever this was.

Without a word, Daniel stepped closer to Johnny, his hand reaching up to cup his face gently. Johnny’s eyes softened, and before either of them could stop it, Daniel leaned in and kissed him.

This kiss was different from the others—not born out of frustration, anger, or impulsiveness. It was slow, deliberate, and filled with a quiet sense of acceptance. Their lips moved together as though this was something they had been waiting for all along, something inevitable. The world around them seemed to fade away, leaving only the warmth of each other’s presence.

When they finally broke apart, Daniel kept his hand on Johnny’s cheek, his thumb brushing softly against his skin. Johnny’s expression was unreadable for a moment, his lips slightly parted as though he were still processing what had just happened. Then, slowly, a small, genuine smile spread across his face.

“You’ve got a thing for me, don’t you, LaRusso?” Johnny said, his tone teasing but his voice softer than usual.

Daniel laughed, his cheeks flushing. “Takes one to know one, Lawrence.”

Johnny chuckled, his hand coming up to grip Daniel’s wrist gently. “Guess I do. But man, what are we going to do about this?”

Daniel pulled back slightly, letting his hand fall to his side, though he stayed close. “I think we stop worrying about what everyone else thinks. Let them talk. Let them stare. I’m tired of hiding.”

Johnny tilted his head, studying Daniel. “You sure? I mean, people are going to lose their minds when they see us together.”

Daniel smirked, his confidence growing. “Let them. Besides, when have we ever cared about what anyone else thinks?”

Johnny laughed at that, the sound warm and genuine. “Fair point.”

---

The following day at school, Daniel and Johnny decided to test the waters. They didn’t make a big announcement or try to call attention to themselves. Instead, they walked into the cafeteria together, side by side, and found a spot to sit near their respective groups of friends.

It didn’t take long for the whispers to start. People noticed the way Johnny and Daniel exchanged subtle glances, how they sat closer than usual, how Johnny nudged Daniel with his elbow when he made a joke, and how Daniel laughed a little too easily at Johnny’s sarcasm. The tension between them was gone, replaced with something lighter, something unmistakably new.

Their friends weren’t oblivious either. Bobby was the first to comment, leaning over to Johnny with a sly grin. “So, when were you going to tell us you and LaRusso are an item now?”

Johnny rolled his eyes, though he couldn’t keep the smirk off his face. “What’re you talking about, Bobby?”

“Oh, come on,” Tommy chimed in, laughing. “It’s obvious, man. You’ve been mooning over each other for weeks. We were just waiting for you two to figure it out.”

Daniel flushed, but he didn’t deny it. Instead, he glanced at Johnny, who gave him a small, almost imperceptible nod. Taking a deep breath, Daniel turned back to their friends.

“Alright, fine. You caught us,” Daniel said, trying to sound nonchalant. “We’re... together.”

The table went quiet for a moment, the group exchanging surprised but amused looks. Then, as if on cue, they all erupted into cheers and laughter.

“About time!” Tommy shouted, clapping Johnny on the back. “I was starting to think you’d never grow the balls to make a move.”

Johnny groaned, though he was smiling. “Alright, alright, don’t make a big deal out of it.”

“Too late,” Bobby said, grinning. “This is a huge deal.”

---

By the end of the week, the news of their relationship had spread throughout the school. Reactions were mixed—some people were surprised, others confused, but for the most part, no one seemed to care as much as Johnny and Daniel had feared.

It turned out that their rivalry had been so infamous that people were more fascinated than judgmental about the fact that they’d ended up together. Some even thought it was poetic, like a story straight out of a movie.

As for Daniel and Johnny, they stopped worrying about the whispers and stares. They walked through the hallways together, sat next to each other in class, and spent their afternoons working on their project—or pretending to work, since most of their time was spent talking, laughing, and occasionally stealing kisses when no one was looking.

---

Their final project presentation was a success, earning them an A and a round of applause from the class. As they stood at the front of the room, basking in the rare moment of shared achievement, Johnny leaned over and whispered, “We make a pretty good team, huh?”

Daniel smiled, his eyes meeting Johnny’s. “Yeah, we do.”

After class, as they walked out of the building together, Johnny slipped his hand into Daniel’s, intertwining their fingers. It was a simple gesture, but it meant everything.

They were done hiding. Done pretending to be enemies. Whatever came next, they were ready to face it together.

And when Johnny leaned down to kiss Daniel one more time, right there in the middle of the courtyard, Daniel kissed him back without hesitation, knowing that this was exactly where he was meant to be.

Chapter Text

It was a warm, golden evening on the California coast. The sun hung low, casting a soft amber glow over the waves that rolled lazily onto the shore. The beach had always been a significant place for Daniel LaRusso and Johnny Lawrence—once a battleground of rivalry, it now symbolised a journey of redemption, transformation, and second chances.

A small group of family and friends gathered on the sand, seated in white chairs adorned with simple yet elegant decorations. Amanda and Carmen, the masterminds behind the planning, had ensured that the atmosphere was both intimate and beautiful. White lanterns lined the aisle, their soft light blending with the fading sun, while sprays of wildflowers were tucked into the driftwood altar.

Johnny stood at the altar with Miguel by his side as his best man. He tugged at the collar of his suit, grumbling under his breath.

“This tie’s trying to choke me to death,” he muttered, glancing at Miguel. “What does that mean? Is it a sign?”

Miguel laughed softly, patting Johnny’s shoulder. “It means you’re nervous. That’s normal, Sensei. You’ve faced way scarier stuff than this, right? Think of it like a sparring match, except… with vows.”

Johnny rolled his eyes but couldn’t suppress a grin. “Yeah, well, I don’t usually spar in a suit.”

The soft strains of music began, signalling Daniel’s arrival. Johnny straightened, his heartbeat quickening as he turned to look down the aisle.

Daniel appeared, walking arm-in-arm with Sam. He wore a crisp white suit with a pale blue tie, the colour bringing out the warmth in his complexion. His expression was one of excitement and nervousness, his eyes scanning the gathered crowd before landing on Johnny.

Johnny’s breath caught in his throat. For a moment, he forgot about his nerves, the tie, and the crowd. All he could think was, How the hell did I get this lucky?

---

As Daniel reached the altar, Sam squeezed his hand, smiling as she took her seat. The officiant—a longtime friend of Amanda’s, known for their humour and heartfelt speeches—welcomed everyone with a warm smile.

“Ladies and gentlemen, we’re gathered here today to witness something truly extraordinary,” the officiant began. “Not just the union of two people, but the union of two stubborn people who spent years pretending they didn’t like each other.”

Laughter rippled through the crowd, and even Johnny couldn’t help but chuckle. Daniel glanced at him, smirking. “Guess we deserved that,” he murmured.

“Absolutely,” Johnny whispered back, his grin softening into something more genuine.

The vows began, with Daniel speaking first.

“Johnny Lawrence,” Daniel started, his voice steady but filled with emotion. “You’ve driven me crazy for years. Honestly, if someone had told me back then that this was where we’d end up, I would’ve called them insane.”

The crowd chuckled, and Daniel’s lips curved into a smile.

“But somewhere along the way, between all the fights and the grudges, I realised you weren’t just my rival. You were the person who challenged me to be better—not just at karate, but at life. And even when I didn’t want to admit it, you were always there, pushing me, inspiring me. I never thought I’d say this, Johnny Lawrence, but… you’re my best friend. And now, you’re my partner. I can’t imagine being anywhere else but here, with you.”

Johnny’s jaw tightened, and he blinked rapidly, trying to keep his emotions in check.

When it was his turn, he stepped closer to Daniel, clearing his throat.

“Yeah, well… LaRusso, you’re no walk in the park either,” Johnny began, earning a round of laughter from the crowd.

“But you’re the only person who’s ever made me want to be better. Not because you told me to—God knows you love doing that—but because you showed me how. You’ve always believed in people, even when they didn’t deserve it. And somehow, you believed in me. I still don’t know what you see in me, but I promise I’m going to work every day to deserve it. To deserve you.”

The crowd was silent for a moment, the weight of Johnny’s words sinking in.

The officiant smiled warmly, their voice carrying a hint of emotion. “By the power vested in me, I now pronounce you husbands. You may now kiss—oh, who am I kidding? Get on with it already!”

Johnny didn’t need to be told twice. He reached for Daniel, cupping his face as their lips met in a kiss that was both tender and filled with all the passion of their journey together. The crowd erupted into cheers, with Miguel and Sam clapping the loudest.

---

The reception was set up on a nearby deck overlooking the ocean. The tables were decorated with simple, beachy centrepieces—candles, seashells, and small vases of wildflowers. The menu was a perfect blend of Italian cuisine (Daniel’s influence) and barbecue (Johnny’s insistence).

As the evening unfolded, the speeches began. Amanda and Carmen were the first to toast the couple.

“Here’s to Daniel and Johnny,” Amanda began, raising her glass. “Two men who’ve given us more headaches than we ever thought possible, but who’ve also shown us what love and perseverance really look like.”

Carmen added, “Watching our families come together has been one of the greatest joys of my life. You two are proof that even the most unlikely journeys can lead to something beautiful.”

Miguel and Sam followed with their own toast, presenting the couple with a surprise—a wedding cake shaped like a dojo. The miniature figurines of Johnny and Daniel on top were posed in karate stances.

“You guys fight all the time,” Miguel joked, “so we thought this was fitting.”

Daniel and Johnny laughed, sharing a glance. “You’ve got us pegged,” Daniel admitted, cutting into the cake.

---

As the night wore on and the crowd began to dwindle, Johnny and Daniel found themselves walking barefoot along the shore. The string lights from the reception twinkled in the distance, and the sound of the waves filled the comfortable silence between them.

Johnny stopped, pulling Daniel to a halt.

“Hey,” he said, his voice quieter than usual. “We did it.”

Daniel smiled, brushing a strand of hair from Johnny’s forehead. “Yeah, we did.”

“No more running,” Johnny continued. “No more fighting. Just us.”

“Just us,” Daniel echoed, leaning in for a soft, lingering kiss.

They stood there for a while, wrapped in each other’s arms, as the ocean whispered around them. For once, there was no rivalry, no past haunting them—only the promise of a future they’d build together, one day at a time.

Chapter Text

Daniel LaRusso sat in his bedroom, the soft hum of the city outside blending with the muffled voices of his parents in the next room. The day was drawing to a close, but he couldn’t shake the gnawing feeling in his gut. He stared out the window, watching the city lights twinkle below him, as if mocking his own internal turmoil. Everything in his life seemed perfect—except for him. His life was being mapped out for him, step by step, and he had no say in it.

He sighed and turned away from the window, his gaze falling on the suit hanging on the back of his door. The dark fabric gleamed in the faint light, a constant reminder of the role he was expected to play. In a few days, he would be standing at the altar, reciting vows he didn’t mean, and tying himself to a life he didn’t want.

He was about to marry Amanda Barnes, the beautiful, intelligent daughter of a wealthy family. Amanda was everything his parents had always dreamed of for him—kind, accomplished, and rich. The LaRussos weren’t in the same financial bracket as the Barnes family, and his parents had spent years pushing him towards Amanda. She wasn’t a bad person—far from it. She was sweet and easy to get along with, but there was no spark between them, no fire. He didn’t love her.

But that didn’t matter. What mattered was the promise of a better life for Daniel’s family. They weren’t destitute, but money was tight, and the Barnes family’s wealth represented a future of security and influence. His parents saw the marriage as a dream come true, a solution to their struggles. Daniel had always known that his parents didn’t care if he loved Amanda—his happiness was irrelevant. This was about survival, a transaction to secure stability.

His thoughts drifted to Johnny Lawrence, his best friend. Johnny. His heart clenched painfully. Johnny wasn’t just his best friend; he was the person who had always been there, the one who made him laugh when he felt like crying, the one who had stood by him during the hardest times in his life.

And he was the one Daniel loved.

Daniel had been harbouring feelings for Johnny for as long as he could remember, but he had never had the courage to tell him. Johnny was straight—or at least Daniel assumed he was—and besides, Johnny didn’t see him that way. They were just friends, despite the bond they shared.

But Daniel couldn’t ignore the truth. He had never loved Amanda. His heart belonged to Johnny.

The idea of never telling Johnny how he felt was unbearable. The thought of marrying Amanda, knowing his heart would always ache for someone else, was suffocating. He couldn’t keep pretending. He needed to talk to Johnny. He needed to tell him everything.

–––

It was late evening when Daniel found Johnny at their usual spot by the beach, where the ocean breeze and the sound of crashing waves could drown out any troubling thoughts. Johnny stood by his motorcycle, the fading sunlight casting a golden glow over him. His leather jacket hung loosely on his shoulders, and his blond hair was slightly tousled by the wind. He looked as carefree as ever, but when he saw Daniel walking towards him, his expression shifted.

“Hey, LaRusso. Everything alright?” Johnny asked, his tone light but his eyes searching.

Daniel hesitated, shoving his hands into his jacket pockets. He wasn’t sure how to begin, how to explain what was weighing on his chest. But he had to. It had to come out.

“I… I need to talk to you about something,” Daniel said, his voice strained.

Johnny raised an eyebrow, his expression turning serious. “Sure, man. What’s up?”

Daniel exhaled deeply, the words clawing at his throat. “I’m getting married. To Amanda.”

Johnny blinked, his blue eyes widening in surprise. “Wait, what? You’re seriously marrying her?”

Daniel nodded, the words tasting bitter in his mouth. “Yeah. I don’t have a choice, Johnny. My parents—” He trailed off, struggling to find the right words. “They want this. They want me to marry her. They’re blinded by the money, by the future they think we’ll have because of this marriage.”

Johnny’s face darkened, a mix of disbelief and frustration washing over him. “You’re telling me you’re going to marry a girl you don’t even love, just for the sake of your parents? That’s messed up, man.”

Daniel felt his chest tighten. “I don’t have a choice, Johnny. I can’t just—” His voice broke, and he quickly wiped a tear from his eye, embarrassed. “I can’t just disappoint them. This is what they want for me. What they’ve always wanted.”

Johnny stepped closer, his expression hardening. “Yeah, well, maybe that’s your problem. You’re letting your parents live your life for you.”

Daniel looked down, his hands trembling. “What am I supposed to do, Johnny? I don’t know what to do. I’ve been given this path, and I can’t just walk away from it.”

Johnny’s eyes softened for a brief moment, but the anger was still there. “You don’t have to walk away, man. You can say no. You can choose to be happy. But you’re not doing that. You’re just letting them make decisions for you, and it’s killing me to see you like this.”

“I don’t want this,” Daniel whispered, his voice barely audible. “I don’t want Amanda. I…I want you.”

Johnny’s gaze faltered, his mouth opening as if to say something, but no words came out. He ran a hand through his hair, trying to compose himself. “You don’t even know what you’re saying right now, Daniel.”

“I do. I know exactly what I’m saying.” Daniel’s voice cracked as he stepped forward, closer to Johnny. “I can’t be with Amanda. I don’t want to marry her. I’m in love with you, Johnny.”

The silence that followed was deafening. Johnny stood frozen, staring at Daniel as if processing what he had just heard. But then, a cold distance seemed to settle between them. Johnny stepped back, his face hardening.

“Good luck with that, man. I hope your wedding day is everything you want it to be.” Johnny’s voice was sharp, bitter, as he turned away.

“Johnny, wait!” Daniel called out, desperation seeping into his tone. “Johnny, please, don’t go! I—I need you!”

But Johnny didn’t stop. He kept walking, disappearing into the night, leaving Daniel standing there, alone. His heart shattered as he whispered, “Why can’t I be happy?”

–––

The days leading up to the wedding felt like a blur. Daniel went through the motions, forcing himself to smile, to pretend. But inside, he was falling apart. His parents were ecstatic about the wedding. Amanda was radiant in her wedding dress. But Daniel couldn’t bring himself to care. He felt like a puppet, his strings pulled by forces beyond his control.

On the wedding day, everything seemed perfect, and yet, nothing felt right. Daniel’s parents were sitting in the front row, grinning from ear to ear as they watched their son prepare to marry the woman they had chosen for him. Amanda was standing beside him, smiling brightly, her hand resting gently on his arm. But Daniel’s mind was elsewhere.

The ceremony started. The solemniser read through the vows, and Daniel stood there, barely hearing the words. It felt like an eternity. He didn’t want this. He didn’t want Amanda. He wanted Johnny. He had always wanted Johnny.

Then, the moment came. The solemniser asked the fateful question. “Does anyone object to this union?”

Silence filled the room.

Daniel’s heart pounded in his chest, his breath shallow as he waited. Then the doors burst open.

“I object!” Johnny’s voice rang out, loud and clear.

Daniel’s heart skipped a beat. He turned towards the door, his eyes wide with disbelief. Johnny stood there, breathless, eyes locked onto his.

“Johnny?” Daniel whispered, unable to believe his ears.

Johnny stepped forward, his eyes blazing with intensity. “I love you, Daniel. I’ve always loved you. And I’m not going to let you marry someone you don’t love. You deserve better than this.”

Daniel’s chest tightened. Tears filled his eyes as he gazed at Johnny. “You… you love me?”

Johnny nodded, his voice filled with raw emotion. “I always have. And I’m not going to let you make this mistake. I’m not going to stand by and let you marry someone else when I know how I feel.”

Daniel felt a hand on his arm. He turned to see Amanda, smiling softly, nodding her head toward Johnny. “Go get your man,” she whispered, her voice warm and understanding.

Daniel couldn’t believe it. Amanda was giving him her blessing. She was letting him go. His heart swelled with relief.

Without another word, Daniel ran to Johnny, his legs carrying him towards the man he had always loved. Johnny caught him in his arms, and for the first time in what felt like forever, Daniel kissed him. The kiss was soft, tentative at first, then growing deeper, more urgent as the years of longing and unspoken love poured into it.

The room erupted in applause. People cheered, clapped, and even some of Amanda’s family gave the two of them their nod of approval. But Daniel didn’t care about the crowd. He didn’t care about anything but the man in his arms. Johnny. The one person who truly mattered.

–––

The aftermath wasn’t easy. Daniel’s parents were furious. They disowned him, their anger and disappointment filling every conversation with bitterness. But Daniel didn’t care. He had Johnny. He had the man he loved, and that was all that mattered.

Years passed, and life went on. Daniel and Johnny built a life together, one that was theirs. They got married in a small ceremony, with only a few close friends. Their family came together, one that they had created by choice, not by obligation. They had three children—Sam, Anthony, and Robby—who filled their home with laughter, chaos, and love.

One evening, as Daniel stirred a pot of Fettuccine Alfredo, Johnny came home from work, his briefcase slung over his shoulder. He dropped it on the counter, leaning over to kiss Daniel on the lips.

“Hey, babe. Smells good in here,” Johnny grinned, giving Daniel a peck.

Their teenage kids groaned from the other room, rolling their eyes.

“Please! Not in front of us!” Sam whined, her voice dripping with mock disgust as she peeked around the corner.

Anthony, sprawled on the couch with his game controller, smirked. “Seriously, Dad. Save it for your anniversary or something.”

Robby, the youngest and always the peacemaker, chimed in with a grin, “I think it’s sweet. You guys are like those old couples in movies who still hold hands in the park.”

Johnny leaned back and chuckled. “Old? Watch it, kid.”

Daniel shook his head, laughing softly as he gave the sauce a final stir. He glanced at Johnny, who was now rummaging through the fridge for a drink. The chaos of their kids, the warmth of the kitchen, the simple joy of coming home to one another—it was everything Daniel had ever wanted, and everything he thought he could never have.

Johnny turned and caught Daniel staring. “What? Did I forget to pick up milk again?” he teased, though his voice softened at the way Daniel was looking at him.

“No,” Daniel said, a small smile playing on his lips. “I was just thinking… how lucky I am.”

Johnny closed the fridge and walked over to him, wrapping an arm around his waist. “Lucky? I’d say you earned it. Took a lot of guts to walk away from all that. From your parents, the expectations, everything.”

Daniel leaned into Johnny’s touch, resting his head against his chest. “Yeah, but it was worth it. I’ve got you, and I’ve got this.” He gestured toward the living room, where their kids were now playfully bickering over which movie to watch.

Johnny kissed the top of Daniel’s head, his voice low but full of affection. “And you’ve got me for as long as you’ll have me.”

Daniel pulled back slightly, looking up at him with a smirk. “So… forever, then?”

Johnny grinned. “Forever sounds about right.”

They stood there for a moment, wrapped up in each other, before Anthony’s voice interrupted them.

“Can we eat already? Some of us are starving out here!”

Daniel laughed, stepping away to grab the plates. “Alright, alright. Dinner’s ready.”

As they sat around the table, the conversation flowed easily—teasing, laughter, and the kind of warmth that only came from family. Daniel looked around, his heart full as he took it all in. This wasn’t the life he’d imagined when he was younger, but it was better. It was real, built on love, choice, and the courage to follow his heart.

After dinner, as the kids cleaned up and Johnny dragged Daniel out to the porch for some quiet time, the stars twinkled above them. They sat together on the swing, Johnny’s arm draped over Daniel’s shoulders.

“You know,” Daniel said softly, breaking the comfortable silence, “there was a time I didn’t think I’d ever get to have this. A family. You.”

Johnny tightened his hold on him. “Yeah, well, there was a time I didn’t think I deserved it. But look at us now. We proved everyone wrong.”

Daniel smiled, resting his head against Johnny’s shoulder. “Yeah. We did.”

The swing rocked gently as the night wrapped around them. In that moment, with the stars above and the love of his life beside him, Daniel knew one thing for certain: he wouldn’t trade this for anything.

No regrets. Just love. Forever.

Chapter Text

The dojo was dimly lit, shadows flickering against the walls from the single overhead bulb. Kwon Jae-Sung sat cross-legged in the centre of the room, his breath steady as he wrapped his bloodied knuckles with trembling hands. A first-aid kit lay open beside him, its contents scattered haphazardly. He hissed as the antiseptic stung, but he didn’t stop. Pain was something he had grown accustomed to; it was almost comforting now, a distraction from the ache he couldn’t shake—the one rooted deep in his chest.

His movements were methodical, but his eyes were distant, staring at the floor as if it held answers to questions he didn’t dare ask. The silence was heavy, broken only by the faint hum of the fluorescent light overhead.

The creak of the dojo door shattered the quiet. Kwon’s hands paused mid-wrap, his jaw tightening. He didn’t need to look up to know who it was. The weight of Yoon De-Jin’s presence was unmistakable, like a gust of cold air in a stifling room.

“What do you want, De-Jin?” Kwon asked without turning around, his voice low and strained. He resumed wrapping his knuckles, his movements harsher now, as if the act could somehow drown out the tension that filled the room.

Yoon hesitated in the doorway, his breath shallow, his hands balled into fists at his sides. He’d thought about this moment for weeks, rehearsed every word, but now that he was here, standing in front of the man who had once been his everything, the words stuck in his throat.

“I—” Yoon’s voice cracked, and he swallowed hard, forcing himself to continue. “I need to talk to you. I need... closure.”

Kwon’s hands stilled again, his shoulders tensing. Slowly, he rose to his feet, turning to face Yoon. The sight of him—frazzled, hesitant, his eyes wide with a mix of fear and determination—struck a chord in Kwon, but he masked it with indifference.

“Closure?” Kwon repeated bitterly, crossing his arms over his chest. “What’s left to say, De-Jin? You made your choice. You walked away.”

Yoon flinched at the accusation, his lips parting as if to protest, but no words came out. Instead, he took a tentative step forward, his heart pounding so loudly he was sure Kwon could hear it.

“I had to leave,” Yoon said finally, his voice trembling. “Cobra Kai... it was destroying me. And you—” He broke off, his breath hitching. “You were destroying yourself, Kwon.”

Kwon’s eyes darkened, his expression unreadable. “So you ran,” he said coldly. “You left me to pick up the pieces. Do you have any idea what that did to me?”

Yoon clenched his fists tighter, his nails biting into his palms. “I know,” he said, his voice cracking. “I know I hurt you. But I was hurting too, Kwon! And I couldn’t stay—”

“You didn’t even try,” Kwon snapped, his voice rising. He took a step closer, his eyes burning with anger and something deeper, something raw. “You didn’t fight for me. For us.”

Tears pricked at Yoon’s eyes, but he blinked them away, refusing to let them fall. “How could I?” he whispered. “You were already gone, Kwon. You were so far down that path, and no matter how much I wanted to, I couldn’t pull you back. I couldn’t save you.”

Kwon’s breath hitched, his anger faltering for a moment before he looked away. “I didn’t need saving,” he muttered, but the words sounded hollow even to him.

Yoon stepped closer, his voice rising in desperation. “Then what did you need, Kwon? Tell me, because I don’t know! All I ever wanted was for us to be enough, but we weren’t, were we?”

Kwon’s head snapped up, his eyes meeting Yoon’s with a fierceness that made him freeze. For a moment, neither of them spoke, the air between them charged with everything they had left unsaid.

“I don’t know if we ever were,” Kwon said finally, his voice breaking. “But I know I can’t keep pretending like I’m not still hurting. Like I didn’t lose everything when you left.”

Yoon’s chest ached at the vulnerability in Kwon’s voice, and he took another step forward, his fear giving way to something braver, something more desperate. “I never stopped caring about you,” he said, his voice trembling. “But I was terrified. Terrified that if I stayed, I’d lose myself completely. And terrified that leaving meant losing you forever.”

Kwon’s expression softened, but the pain in his eyes only deepened. “You did lose me,” he said quietly. “And I lost you.”

The silence that followed was suffocating. Yoon’s heart was in his throat, his legs trembling as he fought the urge to run. But he stayed, forcing himself to meet Kwon’s gaze.

“I’m scared, Kwon,” he admitted, his voice barely above a whisper. “I’m scared that I’ll never be able to move on. That I’ll always wonder... if we could have made it work.”

Kwon stared at him for a long moment, his face a mask of conflicting emotions. Then, without warning, he closed the distance between them, his hands cupping Yoon’s face as he pulled him into a kiss.

It was rough, desperate, and filled with all the emotions they’d buried—love, anger, regret, and longing. Yoon’s hands clutched at Kwon’s shirt, his tears finally spilling over as he kissed him back with equal fervour.

When they broke apart, both were breathless, their faces inches apart. Yoon’s tears mingled with Kwon’s as they stared at each other, their hearts breaking all over again.

“This was always going to end like this,” Kwon said, his voice barely audible. “I’m sorry, De-Jin.”

Yoon’s lips parted as if to speak, but no words came. He could only watch as Kwon stepped back, his hands falling to his sides.

With one last, lingering glance, Kwon turned and walked out of the dojo, his footsteps echoing in the empty space. The door clicked shut behind him, leaving Yoon standing alone in the dim light, the weight of their goodbye pressing down on him.

Yoon sank to his knees, his sobs breaking the silence as he clutched at his chest. The emptiness Kwon left behind was unbearable, and yet, deep down, he knew this was the end.

What could have been was gone, and all that remained was the hollow ache of what they had lost.

Chapter Text

The night air was electric, filled with the hum of excitement as guests arrived at the Grand Hall, elegantly dressed for the annual charity gala supporting mutant rights. Banners adorned with the X-Men logo swayed gently in the breeze, and the sound of laughter and music spilled out from within the beautifully decorated venue. Charles Xavier had spent months organizing this event, hoping to raise awareness and funds for a cause he held dear.

As he stood at the entrance, adjusting his cufflinks and smoothing the lapels of his tailored suit, he felt a mix of anticipation and anxiety. It had been years since he had seen Erik Lensherr, the man who had once been not just his closest ally but also the love of his life. Their paths had diverged after the events that had torn them apart, each choosing different routes in the fight for mutantkind, but the memories of their time together lingered in Charles’s mind like an unfinished melody.

He took a deep breath, stepping into the grand hall. The venue was magnificent, with golden chandeliers casting a warm glow over the crowd. Tables adorned with white linens and flickering candles filled the space, while a live band played softly in the background. Charles moved through the crowd, greeting guests and supporters, his smile genuine but his heart weighed down by the nostalgia that threatened to overwhelm him.

“Charles!” a familiar voice called from behind him. He turned, his heart racing, and found Raven Darkholme, his former student and ally, approaching with a playful grin. She looked stunning in a deep red gown that accentuated her fierce spirit.

“Raven! You look incredible,” Charles said, embracing her warmly.

“Thanks! You clean up pretty well yourself,” she teased, her eyes sparkling. “Ready to work some magic tonight?”

“As ready as I’ll ever be,” Charles replied, trying to shake off the nerves.

Just then, the band shifted into a lively tune, and Raven leaned closer, her voice low and conspiratorial. “So, are you going to ask him to dance if he shows up?”

“Who?” Charles asked, though he already knew the answer.

“You know who,” she said, raising an eyebrow. “Erik. You can’t tell me you haven’t thought about it.”

Charles hesitated, feeling the familiar flutter of emotions surge within him. “I don’t know, Raven. It’s been years. Things are… complicated.”

“Complicated or not, you both deserve this,” she insisted, placing a reassuring hand on his arm. “You can’t let old feelings fade away just because you’re afraid of what might happen.”

Before Charles could respond, a shift in the crowd caught his attention. He turned, his heart racing as he caught sight of Erik. Dressed in a sleek black suit, Erik exuded a magnetic presence that drew the eye. His dark hair was neatly combed back, and the unmistakable intensity in his gaze made Charles’s breath hitch. Memories of their time together flooded back, overwhelming him with both joy and longing.

“Speak of the devil,” Raven murmured, nudging Charles playfully.

Erik scanned the room, his sharp gaze landing on Charles. Time seemed to freeze for a heartbeat as they locked eyes. For an instant, the world around them faded away, leaving only the two of them, bound by an unbreakable connection. Charles felt his heart race, a mixture of excitement and trepidation coursing through him.

“Go,” Raven urged, giving Charles a gentle push. “I’ll hold the fort here.”

With a determined breath, Charles stepped forward, weaving through the crowd until he stood before Erik. “Erik,” he said, his voice barely above a whisper.

“Charles,” Erik replied, a smile breaking across his face that lit up his entire being. “It’s been a long time.”

“It has,” Charles agreed, taking a moment to admire Erik’s presence. “You look… well.”

Erik chuckled, the sound warm and familiar. “You too. The years have been kind.”

They stood for a moment, both men feeling the weight of their shared history, the unspoken words lingering between them. The cacophony of laughter and conversation faded into the background, leaving only the thudding of their hearts in the silence.

“Do you want to dance?” Charles asked, surprising himself with the boldness of his request.

“I’d love to,” Erik replied, his eyes glimmering with something Charles couldn’t quite place—hope, perhaps?

They moved toward the dance floor, the music shifting into a slow, romantic melody. As they found their place among the swirling couples, Erik took Charles’s hand, and the familiar warmth of his touch sent a jolt of electricity through Charles’s veins.

“Look at us, back at a gala,” Erik said with a soft smile, glancing around at the dancing couples. “Feels like old times.”

Charles chuckled, allowing himself to relax into the rhythm of the music. “I never thought we’d be here again.”

“I never thought I’d see you again,” Erik admitted, his voice low, almost a whisper. “But I’m glad I did.”

The moment their bodies connected, Charles felt the years of separation melt away. They moved together with an ease that felt both natural and surreal, the familiarity of their movements rekindling a fire that had long been dormant.

“I’ve missed this,” Charles confessed, his heart racing as he looked up into Erik’s eyes. “I’ve missed you.”

Erik’s expression softened, vulnerability flickering in his gaze. “I’ve missed you too, Charles. More than I can say.”

As they swayed together, Charles could feel the weight of unspoken words hanging between them, the truths they had both kept hidden for so long. Memories of laughter and warmth flooded back, reminding him of a time when their love had felt infinite.

“Things have changed since we last saw each other,” Erik said, his tone contemplative. “I’ve changed.”

“I know,” Charles replied, sensing the underlying pain in Erik’s voice. “I have too. But that doesn’t mean we can’t find our way back to each other.”

Erik’s grip on Charles tightened as they danced, the intensity of his gaze unwavering. “Do you really think it’s possible? After everything?”

“I believe it is,” Charles said, the conviction in his voice surprising even himself. “We’ve both grown, Erik. We’ve learned from our mistakes. We can start anew.”

Erik’s expression softened, a flicker of hope igniting in his eyes. “What if we tried? What if we gave this a real chance?”

“I want that,” Charles replied, his heart racing at the thought. “I want us.”

The music swelled, enveloping them in its embrace as they danced closer, their foreheads nearly touching. The world around them faded away once more, leaving only the two of them wrapped in each other’s presence.

“I never stopped caring for you, you know,” Erik confessed, his voice heavy with emotion. “Even when we were apart, you were always in my thoughts.”

Charles’s heart soared at Erik’s admission. “You were in mine too. I tried to move on, but nothing ever felt right without you.”

“Then let’s not waste any more time,” Erik said, determination seeping into his words. “Let’s make the most of this.”

Charles smiled, feeling a warmth spread through him as they continued to sway together. The night felt alive with possibilities, and the music wrapped around them like a blanket of hope.

As the song reached its crescendo, Erik leaned in, his breath warm against Charles’s cheek. “May I kiss you?”

Charles’s heart raced at the question, his cheeks flushing with anticipation. “Yes.”

Erik closed the distance, capturing Charles’s lips with his own. The kiss was tender at first, a gentle exploration that quickly deepened into something more passionate. Charles melted into the kiss, the years of longing and regret dissipating as their lips moved together in perfect harmony.

When they finally pulled away, both men were breathless, their eyes locked in a gaze filled with newfound determination.

“Let’s not let this slip away again,” Erik said, his voice thick with emotion. “I want to fight for us, Charles. I want to make this work.”

“Me too,” Charles replied, a smile breaking across his face. “I’m willing to do whatever it takes.”

With a renewed sense of purpose, they resumed their dance, laughter spilling from their lips as they twirled and swayed together. The world around them melted away, leaving only the music, the warmth of their connection, and the hope that flickered brightly between them.

As the evening wore on, they continued to lose themselves in each other, sharing stories and memories, laughter and warmth. Every glance, every touch was filled with the unspoken promises of a future they both yearned for.

Later, as the night began to wind down, Erik took Charles’s hand, leading him outside to the terrace. The cool night air enveloped them, and the stars twinkled above like diamonds scattered across velvet.

“Look at the stars,” Charles said, his voice filled with wonder. “They remind me that even in darkness, there’s always light.”

“Just like us,” Erik replied, turning to face Charles fully. “We’ve both been through our share of darkness, but now we have the chance to find our light again.”

Charles nodded, feeling a wave of emotion wash over him. “I want to be that light for you, Erik. I want to build something beautiful together.”

“I want that too,” Erik said, his expression serious yet filled with warmth. “Let’s promise to keep fighting for each other. No matter what comes our way.”

Charles smiled, the weight of his past slowly lifting as he embraced the future that lay before them. “I promise. Together.”

As they stood on the terrace, surrounded by the vastness of the night sky, Charles felt an overwhelming sense of peace wash over him. The shadows of their past had not completely faded, but the light of their rekindled connection illuminated a path forward.

Erik reached for Charles's hand, intertwining their fingers. “I never thought I’d feel this way again,” he admitted, his voice barely above a whisper. “Seeing you tonight brought everything rushing back. The laughter, the dreams… the love.”

Charles squeezed Erik’s hand, a warm smile gracing his lips. “Me too. I thought I had lost that part of myself for good. But being here with you… it feels like coming home.”

“Home,” Erik repeated, the word lingering in the air between them. “That’s exactly how it feels.”

With the cool night air wrapping around them, they stepped closer, their shared warmth igniting the moment. Charles leaned against the railing, looking out over the twinkling lights of the city below. “What do you want for the future, Erik?” he asked, curiosity threading through his voice.

Erik took a deep breath, contemplating. “I want to create a world where we don’t have to hide who we are, where we can live freely as mutants. But more than that, I want to build a life with you. I want a partnership that can withstand anything.”

Charles’s heart swelled at Erik’s words. “I want that too. I want to help you fight for our people and for us. Together, we can be a force for change.”

“Then let’s do it,” Erik said, his gaze steady and filled with conviction. “Let’s build a future where we can be true to ourselves and each other.”

Their eyes met, and in that moment, everything felt possible. They leaned closer, their foreheads touching as they basked in the warmth of their connection. The stars above seemed to shine brighter as if they were blessing this new chapter in their lives.

“May I kiss you again?” Erik asked softly, his breath warm against Charles’s skin.

Charles nodded, his heart racing. “Yes, please.”

Erik captured Charles’s lips once more, the kiss filled with passion and promise. It was deeper this time, a melding of souls that spoke of all the unfulfilled dreams and desires they had both buried deep within. The kiss was a declaration—a vow that they were willing to embrace the future together, no matter how uncertain it might be.

When they finally pulled away, both men were breathless, their foreheads still touching. Charles could see the hope reflected in Erik’s eyes, a hope that mirrored his own.

“I never thought I’d get to feel this again,” Charles said, his voice thick with emotion. “I was so afraid that I’d never get the chance to tell you how I felt.”

“You don’t have to be afraid anymore,” Erik replied, a gentle smile playing at the corners of his lips. “I’m here, and I’m not going anywhere.”

They stood there for a moment, wrapped in each other’s warmth, the cool breeze rustling the leaves around them. It felt as if the universe had conspired to bring them back together, and they were determined to seize this second chance.

“Let’s not let the past define us,” Charles suggested, his eyes locked on Erik’s. “Let’s build new memories—ones filled with laughter, love, and everything we dreamed of.”

“I agree,” Erik said, a playful grin breaking across his face. “But first, how about we join the others? I think they might be wondering where we’ve disappeared to.”

Charles laughed, the sound light and free. “Yes, let’s not leave Raven hanging. She’s probably plotting something mischievous.”

As they made their way back inside, hand in hand, the atmosphere was charged with excitement. They navigated through the throngs of people, their shared laughter creating a bubble of warmth around them. Charles felt lighter than he had in years, each step bringing him closer to a future he had thought was lost.

Inside the hall, the festivities were in full swing. Guests mingled, drinks clinked, and the music pulsed with energy. Charles and Erik spotted Raven, who was standing by the bar, a mischievous grin on her face as she watched them approach.

“There you two are! I was beginning to think you’d eloped!” she teased, raising an eyebrow.

“Not yet,” Erik replied with a smirk, his fingers still intertwined with Charles’s. “But we’re definitely planning to stick around for a while.”

Raven’s eyes widened, her expression shifting to one of genuine excitement. “Oh really? So there’s hope for you two after all?”

“More than hope,” Charles said, sharing a glance with Erik that spoke volumes. “We’re giving this another shot.”

“Finally!” Raven exclaimed, throwing her arms around both of them in a celebratory hug. “You guys deserve this. I knew it was only a matter of time before you’d come to your senses.”

Erik chuckled, a warm flush of gratitude filling him. “It seems you were right about a lot of things, Raven.”

“Don’t let it get to your head,” she teased, playfully nudging him. “Now, let’s celebrate!”

As the night continued, Charles and Erik found themselves swept into the festivities, dancing, laughing, and mingling with friends old and new. Every interaction was filled with joy and warmth, a testament to the love that had been rekindled between them.

At one point, Erik pulled Charles away from the crowd, leading him to a quieter corner of the hall. The lights dimmed slightly, casting a soft glow around them.

“I’ve been thinking,” Erik said, his tone suddenly serious. “About everything we talked about tonight—our future.”

Charles looked up at Erik, his heart racing. “What do you mean?”

“I want to take this seriously,” Erik said, determination etched on his face. “I don’t want to just drift along and see where things go. I want to put in the work. I want to be committed to us.”

Charles’s heart swelled with affection. “I feel the same way. We can’t rush this, but I want to build a foundation that lasts.”

Erik nodded, the intensity of his gaze unwavering. “Then let’s start laying that foundation tonight. Let’s make promises to each other—no more running, no more hiding. Just honesty and love.”

Charles smiled, feeling a warmth bloom in his chest. “I promise, Erik. I’ll be here, ready to fight for us and for our future.”

“And I promise to do the same,” Erik replied, his eyes shining. “You’re worth it, Charles. Always have been.”

With a renewed sense of purpose, they leaned in for another kiss, the world around them fading into a blur. This kiss was more than just a sweet exchange; it was a vow—an unspoken commitment to the journey they were embarking on together.

As they pulled away, Charles felt a rush of optimism. “Shall we go back and show everyone how it’s done?”

Erik smirked, his playful spirit returning. “Absolutely. I think it’s time we steal the spotlight.”

Together, they returned to the dance floor, laughter and joy spilling from their lips as they twirled and swayed to the music. The world around them was a vibrant tapestry of hope, friendship, and love, each moment stitched together by the memories they were creating.

With every twirl and dip, Charles felt the past slipping away, replaced by the promise of a new beginning. Their connection had been forged in the fires of struggle, but now it glimmered like a beacon of light—a reminder that love could endure, heal, and flourish against all odds.

As the night wore on, Charles and Erik reveled in the joy of being together. They danced under the stars, surrounded by friends, laughter, and love. And as the last song played, they knew that this was just the beginning of a beautiful new chapter—one filled with promise, passion, and a love that would stand the test of time.

The evening ended with a sense of warmth and belonging as they stepped into the crisp night air, hand in hand, ready to face whatever challenges lay ahead—together.

Chapter Text

Valentine’s Day. The most ridiculous, overhyped, and insufferable holiday of the year. At least, that was Johnny Lawrence’s official stance on the matter.

It was bad enough that every shop in town had been vomiting pink and red decorations for weeks, but now, as he stepped into the dimly lit restaurant, he was immediately hit with the sickly sweet atmosphere of romance. Heart-shaped balloons hovered above tables, couples gazed at each other with nauseating affection, and there was even some guy in the corner playing an acoustic version of “Can’t Help Falling in Love.”

Johnny groaned. This was his personal hell.

He wasn’t even supposed to be here, but the fridge in his apartment was empty, and he sure as hell wasn’t going to spend Valentine’s Day eating cold beans out of a tin. So, against his better judgement, he’d decided to treat himself to a decent meal.

That was his first mistake.

His second mistake was not looking properly before the hostess led him to a table. Because there, sitting alone, scowling at a menu, was none other than Daniel LaRusso.

Johnny froze, debating whether to turn around and make a run for it. But before he could decide, Daniel looked up—and the moment their eyes met, it was too late.

“Seriously?” Daniel muttered, setting down his menu. “Of all the restaurants in this town, you had to pick this one?”

Johnny crossed his arms. “You don’t own the place, LaRusso. What, you got a problem with me eating here?”

Daniel sighed, rubbing his temples. “No, but it’s bad enough that I’m here alone. Now people are gonna think we’re on some kind of—” He stopped himself, shaking his head. “Never mind.”

The hostess smiled brightly at them. “Would you like to be seated together?”

“No,” Daniel said immediately.

“Yeah, no way,” Johnny agreed.

The hostess blinked, clearly taken aback. “Uh… well, I’m afraid we’re fully booked. The only available seats are at the bar or at a shared table.”

Johnny scowled. The last thing he wanted was to sit at the bar and drink himself into oblivion—not tonight, at least.

Daniel groaned. “Fine. We’ll share.”

They sat down, an awkward silence settling over them as they picked up their menus. Johnny glanced at Daniel out of the corner of his eye. The guy looked just as miserable as he felt.

“Where’s Amanda?” Johnny asked.

Daniel exhaled sharply. “Business trip. And before you ask, Sam’s with friends, and Anthony’s at a sleepover. So, yeah. I’m alone.”

Johnny smirked. “Sad.”

Daniel shot him a glare. “Like you’re any better? Where’s Carmen?”

“Out with her friends.” Johnny shrugged. “Robby’s doing his own thing. So, yeah, I’m alone too.”

Daniel snorted. “Guess that makes two of us, huh?”

“Tragic,” Johnny said dryly.

As the night went on, the initial awkwardness started to wear off. Maybe it was the wine, or maybe it was just the sheer absurdity of the situation, but somehow, they fell into easy conversation.

They made fun of the couples around them, mocked the ridiculous decorations, and teased each other about past relationships.

Johnny raised an eyebrow. “So, LaRusso, what’s the most embarrassing thing you’ve done for a girl?”

Daniel groaned. “Oh, man. In high school, I tried to impress a girl by dancing at a party. Like, full-on disco moves.”

Johnny nearly choked on his drink. “No way.”

“Oh, yeah,” Daniel said, shaking his head. “I looked like an absolute idiot. Didn’t stop her from kissing me, though.”

Johnny snorted. “Lucky bastard.”

Daniel smirked. “Your turn.”

Johnny took a sip of his wine, considering. “I once wrote a love letter. Like, a proper, heartfelt, sappy love letter.”

Daniel’s eyes widened. “No. You?”

“Yeah.” Johnny grimaced. “Worst part? She never even read it. Threw it away before I could give it to her.”

Daniel winced. “Ouch.”

Johnny shrugged. “Eh. Probably for the best. She would’ve laughed in my face.”

There was a pause, a brief flicker of something unspoken between them. Then Daniel cleared his throat. “Well, at least neither of us are making fools of ourselves tonight.”

Johnny smirked. “Yeah. Just two lonely guys, eating dinner together on Valentine’s Day.”

Daniel rolled his eyes. “Don’t say it like that. It sounds weird.”

Johnny chuckled. “What? Afraid someone’s gonna think we’re on a date?”

Daniel scoffed. “Please. If this were a date, you’d be trying a lot harder.”

Johnny leaned back in his chair. “You’d like that, wouldn’t you?”

Daniel paused, looking at him for a long moment. Something flickered in his eyes—something Johnny couldn’t quite place.

The rest of the night passed in a blur of conversation and laughter. And when they finally left the restaurant, the cold night air sobered them up slightly.

“Well,” Daniel said, shoving his hands into his pockets. “Guess I’ll see you around.”

Johnny hesitated. There was something about this night—something that had felt different. Before he could think better of it, he reached out, grabbing Daniel’s arm.

Daniel turned, eyebrows raised. “What—”

And then, before he could stop himself, Johnny leaned in.

It was instinctual. Natural, even. Their faces were close, the warmth of the wine still lingering between them. And for a moment—just a moment—he thought Daniel might kiss him back.

But then Daniel recoiled as if he’d been burned.

“What the hell, Johnny?” he snapped, stepping back. His face twisted in disgust.

Johnny’s stomach dropped. “I—”

“That was a mistake,” Daniel said, shaking his head. “A huge mistake.”

Johnny opened his mouth, but no words came out. He could only stare as Daniel’s expression hardened.

“Don’t ever do that again,” Daniel said coldly. “And don’t ever talk to me again.”

And with that, he turned on his heel and walked away, leaving Johnny standing there, the taste of regret heavy on his tongue.

The night had felt like a dream—until reality had come crashing down around him.

And for the first time in a long time, Johnny wished he’d spent Valentine’s Day alone.

Chapter Text

Miguel Diaz had always prided himself on being strong. He had fought through pain that would break anyone else—pain that had left him lying on the ground, paralysed, barely clinging to life. He had faced Robby’s kick, the one that sent him flying off a railing, and that hadn’t broken him either. He’d been through worse. He always found a way to stand up, to keep going.

But now?

Now, as he watched Axel Kovačević walk away, his back turned in that final, heart-wrenching act of self-sacrifice, Miguel realised something.

He had never known true powerlessness until this moment.

The absence of Axel was more suffocating than any physical pain he had ever endured. This wasn’t a fight Miguel could win. No matter how much he wanted to run after him, to beg him to stay, there was nothing he could do.

Axel had always been everything Miguel wasn’t supposed to have. The forbidden. The dangerous. The temptation he couldn’t resist. The fire he couldn’t extinguish, no matter how many times he tried to keep his distance. It had been reckless, thrilling, and devastating all at once. Every stolen moment had felt like an addiction, and yet, it had been the only thing that had ever made Miguel feel truly alive.

But now it was over.

And it was all because of Sensei Wolf.

Miguel hadn’t been surprised when he’d seen the fear in Axel’s eyes earlier that day. Axel had always been strong, unshakeable, but that day? The cracks were showing. The weight of everything was too much for him to carry, and when he finally spoke the words that shattered Miguel’s heart, it felt like the ground had dropped out from under him.

Axel had tried to explain. His voice was shaking when he’d said it—He knows. If I don’t end it, he’ll make sure you never fight again.

The words had settled over Miguel like a thick fog, suffocating him. He had felt his stomach twist, his chest tighten, but there was nothing he could say to make it better. There was no solution. Axel had already made up his mind.

“I’m not losing you,” Axel had said, his voice raw, broken. He had meant every word, Miguel could hear it in the tremble, but the finality in his tone was unmistakable. Axel had already given up on them. Given up on them, for Miguel’s own sake. The words echoed in his mind like a death sentence. So you have to let me go.

Miguel had tried to refuse. His heart had screamed in protest. He had begged, in the only way he knew how, to make Axel stay. “Don’t ask me to do that,” he had said, his voice barely above a whisper, his chest heavy with the weight of a love that had never been allowed to see the light of day.

Axel exhaled sharply, shaking his head. “Then don’t make me beg.”

Miguel felt something inside him shatter. He could see it—Axel was already slipping away, already retreating, already making himself into a ghost. If Miguel let him leave now, that would be it. The end. The final, cruel cut.

So he did the only thing he could do.

He kissed him.

It wasn’t soft. It wasn’t gentle. It was desperate, aching, raw. Miguel crushed his lips against Axel’s like he could will him to stay, like he could stitch the broken pieces back together with nothing but sheer force. Axel let out a strangled sound, hands fisting in Miguel’s shirt, pulling him closer even though he had already made his choice.

For a moment, it felt like time had stopped. Like they could pretend, just for a few seconds more, that none of this was happening. That the world wasn’t forcing them apart. That this wasn’t goodbye.

Then Axel pulled away, breathing hard, his forehead resting against Miguel’s.

“I love you,” Miguel whispered, voice cracking.

Axel squeezed his eyes shut. When he spoke, his voice was barely audible. “Don’t make this harder.”

Miguel let out a choked breath, but he didn’t let go. “Then don’t go.”

Axel pulled back, and this time, when he looked at Miguel, his eyes were glassy with unshed tears. “I have to.”

Miguel wanted to scream. Wanted to fight. Wanted to do something. But there was nothing left to say.

Axel took a shaky step back. Then another. And another.

And then, just like that, he was gone.

Miguel hadn’t realised he was crying until the coldness of the tears on his hands registered. The sting in his chest was unbearable, like something had been ripped from him that he could never get back. He had never felt so utterly lost.

The world had always expected them to be enemies.

And now, they finally were.

Chapter Text

Remus Lupin had spent years learning to live with ghosts.

The war had taken too much—friends, family, pieces of himself he could never get back. He had buried too many people, mourned too many times. But no loss had ever cut as deep as losing him.

Regulus Black had been a secret, a love hidden in the shadows, something Remus had clung to in stolen moments between the chaos of war. And then, just like that, he was gone. No body. No funeral. Just a name whispered in grief, another casualty, another piece of Remus’s heart lost to the dark.

For years, he had tried to forget. He had told himself that it was for the best, that Regulus had never truly been his to begin with. But even now, long after the dust had settled, after the war had ended, the ache remained—an old wound that refused to close.

And then, one evening, Regulus walked back into his life.

Remus had been at Grimmauld Place, sorting through the remnants of a war-torn world, when he heard the creak of the front door opening. He froze, wand clutched tightly in his fingers, his heart hammering against his ribs. No one else was supposed to be here.

He turned, expecting an intruder.

And there, standing in the dimly lit hallway, was Regulus.

Remus’s breath caught in his throat. His mind refused to process what his eyes were seeing. Regulus looked older, thinner, his sharp features shadowed with exhaustion. But his grey eyes—Merlin, those eyes—were the same.

Remus felt like the floor had been ripped out from under him.

His chest constricted, his pulse roared in his ears, and before he could stop himself, he was moving.

He crossed the space between them in seconds, shoving Regulus hard against the wall. “You’re dead,” he snarled, his voice breaking on the last word. “You died, Reg—”

Regulus let out a sharp breath, his hands coming up in surrender, but he didn’t push Remus away. “I know.”

Two words. Just two words. And they shattered something inside Remus.

He grabbed Regulus by the collar, fingers shaking. “You let me think you were dead for years—”

“I didn’t have a choice,” Regulus said hoarsely.

Remus let out a bitter laugh, his grip tightening. “Didn’t have a choice?” His voice cracked. “You had a choice to come back. To tell me. To—” His breath hitched. “I— I mourned you.”

Regulus’s expression twisted, something like guilt flickering in his eyes. “I know.” His voice was quieter now, rough with something Remus couldn’t name. “I wanted to come back, but I couldn’t. Not until now.”

Silence stretched between them, thick with unsaid things.

Remus’s hands were still fisted in Regulus’s robes, but his anger had burned away, leaving only the raw, aching truth.

Regulus was alive.

He was standing here, warm and real and breathing, and Remus wanted to hate him for it—wanted to shove him away, to punish him for every sleepless night, every hollow ache of grief.

But he couldn’t.

Because the only thing stronger than his anger was his longing.

“Say something,” Regulus whispered.

Remus didn’t think. Didn’t hesitate.

He kissed him.

The moment their lips met, it was like something inside him snapped—weeks, months, years of longing crashing over him all at once.

Regulus made a quiet, desperate sound against his lips, his hands finally coming up to clutch at Remus’s robes, pulling him closer, as if he were afraid Remus would disappear if he let go.

The kiss was rough, messy—filled with too much emotion, too much time lost. Remus kissed him like he wanted to devour him, like he needed to make up for every second they had lost.

Regulus kissed him back just as fiercely, fingers tangling in his hair, gasping softly when Remus pushed him harder against the wall.

There were no words—only this. The press of lips, the slide of hands, the silent promise that this time, neither of them would let go.

When they finally broke apart, breathing hard, Regulus rested his forehead against Remus’s, his fingers still curled in the fabric of his robes.

“I’m sorry,” he murmured.

Remus closed his eyes, exhaling shakily. “Don’t ever do that again.”

Regulus swallowed. “I won’t.”

And for the first time in years, Remus allowed himself to believe him.

Later that night, they lay in bed together, bodies tangled beneath the sheets, limbs intertwined like they were afraid of losing each other again.

Regulus traced idle patterns on Remus’s bare shoulder, his touch featherlight. “Will you forgive me?” he asked softly.

Remus turned his head, pressing a lingering kiss to Regulus’s palm. “I already have.”

Regulus let out a slow breath, something like relief washing over his face.

And as Remus pulled him closer, pressing kisses to every inch of skin he could reach, he knew that, finally, finally, he had his heart back.

Chapter Text

Johnny Lawrence’s birthday was supposed to be simple.

A few beers (sneaked, obviously), some music, probably a bonfire somewhere in the canyon, maybe a few half-hearted punches thrown at Tommy if he made another dumb joke. That was the plan. That’s how it went every year.

Until Daniel LaRusso got involved.

To be fair, it wasn’t Daniel’s idea to go big. He just… cared. A lot. And when he cared, he panicked. And when he panicked, he did things like sneak around with Bobby in a dusty garage trying to rig up fairy lights, or bribe Dutch with fast food to keep quiet, or stress-eat three packs of sour sweets while desperately texting Jimmy about whether “surprise” meant “surprise” or “don’t-do-this-it’ll-kill-him.”

Johnny’s friends were suspicious from the start.

"Why are you planning his birthday?" Dutch asked, raising a brow as he tossed a football between his hands.

Daniel forced a smile. "Because… I like him. As a friend. You know. Friendly friend things. Totally normal."

Tommy snorted. "Mate, if you’re gonna lie, at least try."

Still, they didn’t rat him out. Not entirely. Bobby seemed to be in on the secret, though he didn’t say anything, just gave Daniel an occasional reassuring pat on the back when the decorations started falling down or when Dutch threw a tantrum because the speakers kept crackling.

The plan was this: Johnny would show up at the beach, think it was just another casual hangout, and then boom—surprise party. Food, music, a dumb homemade cake Daniel stressed over for three days, and a quiet moment at sunset where Daniel would give him his actual gift. A leather cuff bracelet. Simple, subtle. Something Johnny could wear without anyone asking questions.

Except… nothing went to plan.

First, the radio died halfway through setting up. Then, Dutch accidentally set fire to the picnic blanket with a lighter and a misguided attempt at roasting marshmallows “for aesthetic.” Then Johnny showed up early, saw all the chaos, and turned right back around.

Which led to Daniel sprinting after him down the sand, shouting, “Wait, WAIT—it wasn’t supposed to look like this!”

Johnny turned, scowling, arms crossed. “What the hell is this?”

Daniel stumbled to a stop, panting. “Your birthday. A surprise. A terrible, horrible, chaotic surprise—but it was supposed to be good.”

Johnny blinked. “You… planned this?”

Daniel rubbed the back of his neck. “Yeah. I got your friends involved. Sort of. They kinda know. Or guess. Or think I’m just madly obsessed with you in a not-dating-you way, which—honestly—fair.”

Johnny’s face shifted slightly. His shoulders relaxed. “You did all this… for me?”

Daniel nodded. “I know you don’t like big gestures. But I just wanted to do something, you know? You’ve never really had someone go all out for you. I wanted to be that person.”

Johnny stared at him.

Then he laughed.

Actually laughed—loud, real, and totally delighted.

“I knew you were planning something,” he said, stepping closer. “Tommy’s the worst at keeping secrets. But I didn’t think you’d go full rom-com disaster.”

Daniel groaned. “It’s not funny! Your cake melted, Dutch punched the speakers, and Jimmy spilled grape soda on your gift!”

Johnny grinned and slid his hand into Daniel’s. “Doesn’t matter. You’re here. You tried. And you’re a complete disaster, LaRusso, but you’re my disaster.”

Daniel flushed, smiling despite himself. “You’re unbelievable.”

Johnny leaned in and kissed him, slow and sweet, with the breeze catching Daniel’s curls and the last light of the setting sun painting the sky behind them.

They were still kissing when Tommy shouted from the fire pit, “CALLED IT!”

Daniel groaned. Johnny just smirked and kissed him again.

---

Later, after the fire was built (again), the music fixed, and the cake scraped back into a vaguely acceptable shape…

Johnny sat with Daniel under a worn blanket, both of them sticky with marshmallow and laughter.

"Best birthday I’ve ever had," Johnny murmured.

Daniel smiled against his shoulder. “Next year, I’ll try not to set the beach on fire.”

“Don’t,” Johnny said, pressing a kiss to his temple. “I like it when you burn stuff for me.”

---

The End

Chapter Text

Daniel LaRusso liked to pretend he didn’t care about birthdays. He always said he didn’t need fuss, didn’t need gifts—“It’s just another day, Johnny.” But Johnny knew better. Daniel loved the attention, loved the surprise, and Johnny planned to give him the biggest one yet.

He was going to propose.

The ring had been burning a hole in Johnny’s sock drawer for weeks. Simple, silver, engraved with always the rival, always the love. He knew Daniel would hate how sentimental it was. He’d love it.

Which was why Johnny had enlisted the help of his friends.

That was his first mistake.

—

“Okay,” Johnny clapped his hands together, facing the group like they were about to storm a fortress. “We’re doing this right. No screw-ups. Bobby, you’ve got the cake. Tommy, fireworks. Jimmy, the playlist. Dutch… just don’t set anything on fire.”

Dutch gave him a look like he’d just asked him not to breathe.

“Where’s the proposal happening?” Bobby asked, adjusting his grip on the bakery box.

“Backyard. Daniel thinks I’m taking him to dinner, but I told Amanda to keep him busy until sundown. When they get back, lights go on, we’re waiting, boom—romantic as hell.”

“Boom,” Tommy said with a grin. “You mean literal boom, right? Like, fireworks?”

“Yes. Small ones,” Johnny warned. “Not the illegal ones.”

Dutch whistled innocently.

—

An hour later, catastrophe had already struck.

The backyard decorations—string lights, candles, a homemade banner that read Happy Birthday Danny!—had half blown over in the wind. The cake had been dropped (Bobby claimed the dog startled him, Johnny wasn’t convinced), and Tommy had managed to set off one firework early, scaring a kid off his bike three blocks down.

“This is a disaster,” Johnny groaned, holding the mangled banner. “He’s gonna think I don’t even care.”

Bobby placed a hand on his shoulder. “You’re asking him to marry you. That’s what he’ll care about.”

Johnny ran a hand through his hair. “What if he says no?”

Tommy snorted. “Dude, you’ve been glued to each other since you were teenagers. Everyone knows he’s crazy about you.”

Dutch smirked. “Even if he pretends to hate your music.”

Johnny scowled. “He does hate my music.”

—

By the time Amanda’s car pulled into the driveway, the sun was setting and the backyard was semi-repaired. The new cake had Daniel spelt with one ‘L’ and the candles wouldn’t light, but the lights were twinkling and the playlist—handpicked songs from their teen years—was playing low from the speakers.

Johnny stood waiting, trying to look casual in a button-down shirt he only wore for very serious fights and very serious dates.

When Daniel stepped into the yard, the first thing he did was laugh.

“I knew you were up to something.”

Johnny grinned nervously. “Surprise?”

Daniel looked around—at the string lights drooping, the cake with his name misspelled, the Cobras awkwardly holding sparklers in the wrong direction—and smiled like he’d never seen anything better.

“This is…” he stepped closer, eyes soft, “actually kind of perfect.”

Johnny cleared his throat. “Not yet.”

He motioned for the guys to dim the music. Tommy managed to trip over the speaker, but the music cut just in time.

Johnny took Daniel’s hands. His heart was hammering in his chest.

“I was gonna do a big speech,” he said, voice a little hoarse. “Had it all planned. Something about how I hated you before I loved you, how you drive me crazy but you’re the only person who’s ever made me feel like… me.”

Daniel swallowed hard.

“But I don’t need a big speech to tell you this,” Johnny went on. “I’ve loved you since the second you tried to punch me in the face and called me a jerk. I’ve loved you every day since. And if you let me, I’ll love you for the rest of our lives.”

He dropped to one knee. Dutch elbowed Bobby and whispered something that got him smacked.

Johnny held up the ring. “So what do you say, LaRusso? Marry me?”

For a second, Daniel just stared. The sky behind him was gold and orange and pink with sunset, and he looked so stunned Johnny felt a stab of fear.

Then Daniel dropped to his knees, grabbed Johnny by the shirt, and kissed him.

“Of course I will, you idiot,” he whispered against Johnny’s lips. “Yes. Yes.”

Cheers broke out behind them—Tommy whooping, Bobby clapping, Jimmy wiping his eyes, Dutch yelling, “About bloody time!”

Johnny kissed Daniel again. Then again. And again.

And somewhere in the chaos of sparklers and laughter, Daniel whispered, “Best birthday ever.”

Johnny grinned. “Wait ‘til you see the honeymoon.”

The End.

Chapter Text

The sky hadn’t been blue in over a year.

Daniel trudged through the ash-coated remnants of what used to be Reseda, boots kicking up clouds of grey dust that clung to the air like ghosts. Buildings crumbled into themselves; storefronts were hollow-eyed and silent. The pulse of life—cars, music, laughter—had gone out like a candle in a storm.

He moved carefully, hunting for anything: food, clean water, a scrap of hope. His fingers tightened around the hilt of the machete he carried, more out of habit than expectation. People were scarce these days. The ones left? Dangerous, desperate, or both.

He ducked into the husk of an old hardware store, shelves ransacked long ago. But something stopped him. A sound. Movement.

He spun, weapon raised

and froze.

“Jesus Christ,” he breathed.

Johnny Lawrence stood in the doorway, gaunt but somehow still swaggering, hair a mess, bruises across his jaw, and a rusted crowbar slung across his back like it was part of him. His face twisted when he saw Daniel.

“You.”

Daniel lowered the machete, but barely. “Thought you were dead.”

“Same.”

They stared each other down in the dim light. Both breathing hard, both half-starved. Daniel hated the rush of relief that swelled in his chest. Hated how familiar Johnny looked in the end of the world.

“What are you doing here?” Daniel finally asked.

Johnny shrugged. “Surviving.”

That was the first time they teamed up. Not by choice. The storm came that night. Acid rain and wind that howled like wolves. Daniel let Johnny into the basement of the old store. They didn’t speak much, but they didn’t sleep either. Just sat with their backs to opposite walls, watching each other like the old rivalry might spark into something ugly.

It didn’t.

---

The weeks that followed were slow. They scavenged together. Fought off wild dogs and worse, packs of scavengers with no mercy left. Johnny got shot once. Daniel stitched him up with shaking hands, snapping, “You’re not allowed to die on me, Lawrence.”

Johnny smirked, blood on his teeth. “Aw, didn’t know you cared, LaRusso.”

They kissed for the first time the next morning. Out of nowhere. Desperate. Ugly. Beautiful.

Daniel pushed him away after. “This doesn’t mean anything.”

Johnny didn’t argue. But the way he looked at Daniel after that the way he handed over the last piece of jerky, or threw his jacket over Daniel when he shivered at night. It meant everything.

---

They found a small survivor outpost weeks later. Barricaded, organized. People who remembered what it meant to live. It should’ve been a dream.

But Johnny didn’t fit in. He got into fights. Didn’t take orders. Daniel tried to smooth it over, tried to make Johnny stay.

“You want to stay here, fine,” Johnny spat one night, face shadowed by the firelight. “But I’m not a damn housecat, Daniel. I’m not meant for walls.”

Daniel stepped close, heart pounding. “So what, you’re just gonna disappear again? Wander into the ash until you drop dead somewhere?”

“Better than staying and watching you forget all of this,” Johnny growled. “Forget us.”

“There is no us,” Daniel snapped, but his voice cracked halfway through. Johnny heard it. Stepped forward. Pressed their foreheads together.

“You keep saying that,” he murmured, “but you keep kissing me too.”

And Daniel kissed him again, fierce, painful, like it might be the last time.

---

Johnny stayed. Not for the outpost. For Daniel.

The tension didn’t disappear. They fought. A lot. Sometimes with fists. Sometimes with mouths and hands and desperate kisses behind storage sheds, gasping like the world might burn down again.

Sometimes Daniel woke in the middle of the night and found Johnny curled beside him, one hand resting lightly over his chest. He never said anything, just watched the rise and fall of Johnny’s breath and thought, I can’t lose him again.

---

Then the raiders came.

They hit the outpost hard. Fire. Screams. Blood. Daniel barely escaped with his life. He ran, calling Johnny’s name, lungs raw.

He found him in the rubble, covered in ash and blood, eyes barely open.

“No,” Daniel whispered, dropping to his knees. “No, no, no—don’t you dare.”

Johnny smiled, weak. “Still… not allowed to die on you?”

“Damn right,” Daniel choked out.

He carried Johnny out of the wreckage. Found shelter in the woods. Nursed him back, days of fever and fear and whispered promises. When Johnny finally opened his eyes again, Daniel sobbed into his shoulder.

“I love you,” he said without thinking.

Johnny blinked slowly, and then—softly—“About time.”

---

Years passed.

They rebuilt. Helped others. The world was still broken, but there were patches of green again. Clean water. Sunlight through clouds.

Daniel built a dojo in the new settlement. Taught the next generation to fight and protect.

Johnny taught them to survive.

They shared a house on the edge of the town, modest but warm. Daniel grew tomatoes in the backyard. Johnny fixed radios that almost never worked.

They kissed in the mornings. And again before sleep.

Sometimes Daniel looked at the sky, still grey, but clearing more each year, and thought, We made it. Then he’d glance at Johnny, sprawled on the couch, bitching about something or laughing too loud, and smile.

They had survived the end of the world.

Together.

Chapter Text

The castle seemed to hold its breath after midnight. The wind whispered secrets against the cold stone battlements, mingling with the lonely echo of a single knight's footsteps in the deserted halls.

Sir Jonathan of House Lawrence knew he shouldn't be there. The Prince's private wing was strictly off-limits at this hour. But with the looming threat of war casting a long shadow over their borders, Johnny had long since stopped caring about rules when it came to him.

He pushed the heavy door open, the hinges groaning in the silence. No knock, no formality. Just a desperate need.

Daniel stood by the window, his shirt hanging open, the familiar weight of his crown absent from his dark, usually well-tamed curls. Moonlight painted his figure, softening the sharp lines of tension in his shoulders—but Johnny's eyes were trained to see beyond the surface. He saw the fear Daniel masked so carefully during court meetings. The crushing responsibility he carried like an invisible suit of armor.

"You're late," Daniel murmured, not turning from the window. His voice was low, almost a plea.

"You told me not to come anymore." Johnny's own voice was rough, edged with a vulnerability he rarely allowed himself.

"I did." A pause stretched between them, thick with unspoken longing. "You never listen."

Johnny moved closer, his footsteps quiet on the cold stone. His voice dropped, becoming a low, intimate rumble. "Not when it's about you."

That earned him a reaction. Daniel finally turned, his dark, intense eyes searching Johnny's face. He looked exhausted, haunted by worries he couldn't share. Yet, even in his weariness, he was achingly beautiful.

"You're my knight, Johnny," Daniel whispered, the words filled with a fragile desperation. "You shouldn't be in my chambers like this. You shouldn't—"

"Love you?" Johnny cut in, the raw truth escaping him.

Silence hung heavy in the air, thick with the weight of their forbidden feelings.

Then, Daniel looked away, his hands tightening on the cold stone of the window ledge. "You swore an oath to protect the crown. Not to fall in love with it."

"And what about you, Dani?" Johnny asked, his voice softening with a tenderness that belied his rough exterior. "Don't pretend I'm the only one losing sleep over this. Don't pretend you don't feel it too."

Daniel didn't answer, but the slight tremble in his hands, the almost imperceptible tightening of his jaw, betrayed him. He couldn't deny the truth that bound them together.

Their connection had begun years ago, when Daniel was a spirited sixteen-year-old, constantly finding ways to slip past the palace guards and escape the stifling formality of his life. Johnny, newly knighted and assigned to protect a prince he'd expected to find spoiled and arrogant, found himself constantly surprised.

Instead of the entitled brat he'd imagined, Daniel had met his sarcasm with laughter, challenged his skill with a sword, and engaged him in passionate debates about everything from the intricacies of court politics to the beauty of ancient poetry. He was quick-witted, endlessly frustrating, and fiercely brave—and somewhere between those clandestine meetings and shared, stolen moments, by the time Daniel turned twenty, Johnny had fallen, completely and irrevocably in love.

Now, the drums of war beat louder, closer.

Whispers of strategic marriage alliances, meant to strengthen their kingdom's defenses, echoed in the shadowed corners of the court. And Johnny—lowborn, burdened by the circumstances of his birth, a soldier whose only possessions were his sword and a heart overflowing with a love he couldn't claim—knew the grim reality.

He would be sent to the front lines, a pawn in a larger, more dangerous game.

Daniel would be offered to some distant royal, a prize to be traded for power and security.

And they would both be forced to pretend that none of it mattered, that their connection was nothing more than duty and obligation.

"Say something," Johnny urged now, closing the distance between them, his voice thick with emotion.

Daniel finally turned to face him, his expression guarded, yet his voice trembled. "If I ask you to stay tonight, Johnny, you'll never truly leave. You'll never be able to walk away."

Johnny nodded, his gaze unwavering, locked on Daniel's. "Probably not. And I wouldn't want to."

"If I kiss you again..." Daniel's voice trailed off, the unspoken question hanging in the air.

"There's no going back to pretending," Johnny finished for him, the words heavy with the weight of their shared desire. "I know."

They stood a breath apart, the air crackling with unspoken longing, a silent storm brewing between them. Then, the dam broke, and all the carefully constructed barriers crumbled.

Daniel surged forward, his hands finding the rough fabric of Johnny's tunic, pulling him close with a desperation that mirrored Johnny's own. His kiss wasn't gentle; it was raw, urgent, a frantic gasp for air after holding their breath for far too long. Johnny met him with equal fervor, his arms wrapping tightly around Daniel's waist, years of suppressed longing pouring into the embrace. The weight of his sword clattered against the cold stone floor, forgotten. Daniel's fingers twisted in Johnny's tunic as if he could physically hold him there, tether him to that moment, a futile attempt to stop the relentless march of the world outside that threatened to tear them apart.

They broke apart only when their lungs screamed for air, their breaths mingling in the charged space between them.

Daniel rested his forehead against Johnny's, his breath warm against his skin. "I'm not ready to lose you, Johnny. I don't know if I can."

"You won't," Johnny whispered, the words a fragile promise against the harsh reality they both faced. A promise he desperately wanted to keep.

But this, he could promise, with every fibre of his being:

"I love you, Dani. That's not something that can be taken away. Not by anyone."

Daniel kissed him again, the urgency replaced by a tender reverence. It was a blessing, a silent vow, and a bittersweet acknowledgment of the impossible situation they were trapped in.

The next morning, as dawn painted the sky with hues of gold and rose, Johnny rode out with the King’s army, the rising sun glinting off his polished armor. He didn’t dare look back at the castle, at the window where a prince stood watching him go, his heart heavy with a love he couldn't openly declare.

But hidden within the sturdy lining of his cloak, carefully stitched by hands more accustomed to holding scepters than needles, was a small, intricately embroidered sigil. A golden crane, the proud emblem of House LaRusso.

A silent testament that somewhere, deep within the heart of a prince bound by duty, a knight's name had found its cherished, secret home. A symbol of hope, and a promise of a love that would endure, no matter what the future held.

Chapter Text

Daniel hated the way Johnny Lawrence walked into a room like it belonged to him.

The community center gym buzzed with activity as vendors set up for the city’s fall festival—booths for candles and soaps and homemade chili sauces—and there, right across from LaRusso Auto’s glossy charity raffle table, was Lawrence’s Bikes & Boards. Complete with a banner that looked like it was made in the '90s and Johnny himself, looking like he’d just stepped out of a motorcycle ad.

Daniel could already feel the headache building.

“You’ve got to be kidding me,” he muttered.

Amanda didn’t even look up from the clipboard. “Don’t start a war before the fair even opens.”

“I’m not starting anything. He’s the one who always—” Daniel waved his hand as Johnny bent to unstrap a skateboard from a display rack. “—struts around like he’s still king of the damn prom.”

As if summoned, Johnny looked up—and locked eyes with him. For a second, neither of them moved.

Then Johnny smirked.

Daniel clenched his jaw so hard he felt it in his molars.

Later, he pretended not to watch Johnny laughing with the kids testing out his boards. Pretended not to care when people wandered over from his booth to check out the bikes. Pretended the flash of heat that crawled up his spine when Johnny leaned against his display, sunglasses perched in his hair and arms crossed, wasn’t anything other than irritation.

Then Johnny crossed the gym and leaned one arm on Daniel’s table like he owned it.

“You’re looking tense, LaRusso,” Johnny said, low and smug. “You okay over here? Someone mess up the raffle drum?”

Daniel gave a tight smile. “You’re not charming. You know that, right?”

Johnny tilted his head. “Didn’t say I was. But you’ve been watching me all morning, so I must be doing something right.”

Daniel’s nostrils flared. “I was watching to make sure you weren’t conning children into buying death traps.”

“Aw,” Johnny said, grinning. “You care.”

“Don’t flatter yourself.”

Johnny looked him over slowly, something sharper in his eyes now. “You always get this mad when you’re losing, or is it just me?”

Daniel stepped forward. “No one’s losing anything.”

“I don’t know, man.” Johnny leaned in. “Your raffle’s pretty weak. Maybe people don’t want car washes and oil changes for their kids’ prize baskets.”

Daniel bristled. “Oh, right. Because everyone wants a dented skateboard and a sunburn.”

Johnny laughed, full-bodied and shameless. “Still the same. You get mad, and your voice goes all high. It’s kind of cute.”

Daniel shoved past him. “Go flirt with someone else.”

“Who said I was flirting?”

But Johnny’s voice was softer now, more serious, and Daniel didn’t look back.

He didn’t know what pissed him off more—the fact that Johnny was flirting or the fact that part of him wanted it to be real.

It rained the next day, and the fair got moved inside. That meant smaller spaces. And—unfortunately—shared booths.

Daniel showed up, saw the sign taped to the folding table that said Lawrence/LaRusso Community Feature, and very nearly walked back out.

“You’ve got to be kidding me.”

Johnny was already there, dragging a cart of helmets and signs. “Nice to see you too, princess.”

“I’m not sharing a booth with you.”

“Then go home.”

Daniel stalked to the other side of the table. “You are unbearable.”

Johnny didn’t even glance up. “Funny. I was gonna say the same about you.”

They bickered all afternoon.

About how much space Johnny’s setup took. About the volume of Daniel’s speaker. About whose name should go first on the booth sign (“Alphabetical, obviously,” Daniel snapped. “It’s not rocket science.” “Then why do you care so much?” Johnny snapped back.)

By mid-afternoon, they were sitting with their backs to each other.

“You always do this,” Daniel said finally.

Johnny glanced sideways. “Do what?”

“Push people away. Turn everything into a fight.”

“Maybe I don’t like people getting close.”

Daniel turned to face him. “You didn’t used to mind when I got close.”

Johnny’s expression flickered—just for a moment. “That was a long time ago.”

“It didn’t have to be.”

Johnny looked at him then. “You walked away.”

“I gave you space. You said you needed it.”

“And then you never came back.”

Daniel’s breath caught. “I didn’t know you wanted me to.”

The silence between them stretched like tight wire.

Then Johnny stood abruptly. “I’m getting coffee.”

He came back ten minutes later. Set a cup down in front of Daniel without a word.

Daniel looked at it. Then at him.

“Thanks,” he said quietly.

Johnny didn’t answer.

But he sat a little closer after that.

That night, after teardown, they were the last two left, boxing supplies.

Johnny leaned against the table. “You’re still a pain in the ass.”

Daniel snorted. “You’re still arrogant.”

Johnny stepped closer. “You still smell like cinnamon rolls and expensive soap.”

Daniel blinked, heart racing. “You still look like trouble.”

They were close. Closer than they’d been in years.

“Why do we always do this?” Daniel asked, voice soft.

Johnny’s eyes searched his face. “Because we’re idiots?”

Daniel huffed a laugh. “Yeah. Probably.”

Then Johnny kissed him.

It was careful at first, like testing a flame that could still burn. Then it was faster, desperate—hands in hair, months or years of anger and want melting between them. Johnny’s hand slid to Daniel’s waist. Daniel pulled him closer like it hurt to be apart.

They pulled back, breathless.

“I’m still mad at you,” Daniel whispered.

“Yeah?” Johnny smiled. “Me too.”

They kissed again anyway.

Later, Daniel ended up pressed against Johnny’s truck, still laughing, as Johnny kissed his neck and muttered, “You’re such a pain,” between breaths.

“You love it.”

“I do.”

The next day, their booth was rearranged.

Lawrence-LaRusso was written on the sign in thick marker.

Neither of them complained.

They shared coffee. Argued about music. Teased each other in front of customers.

They kissed again behind the storage tents. Twice.

By the end of the week, everyone at the fair already knew. They were hopeless at hiding it.

But for the first time in years, Daniel didn’t want to.

Not when Johnny looked at him like that. Not when the world, for once, felt like it was finally turning the way it was supposed to.

With him and Johnny, still bickering. Still burning.

But this time—together.